Latest / Your Psychic Powers and How to Develop Them / Your Psychic Powers and How to Develop Them_Part 1

Transcript

Your Psychic Powers and How to Develop Them_Part 1 · Your Psychic Powers and How to Develop Them

• 0:00
  Speaker 1: Your psychic powers and how to develop them. But Heroward Carrington,
• 0:06
  Speaker 1: Chapter one, How to Develop Every student of psychics. Everyone
• 0:12
  Speaker 1: who has experienced phenomena of one kind or another, or
• 0:16
  Speaker 1: who is more or less mediumistic, desires to know how
• 0:20
  Speaker 1: to develop his own powers and faculties, so that the
• 0:23
  Speaker 1: phenomena which come through him may be increased in power,
• 0:27
  Speaker 1: in clearness, and in excellence. It is quite possible to
• 0:31
  Speaker 1: ensure this, since we are all more or less mediumistic
• 0:34
  Speaker 1: or psychic, and need only to cultivate our powers in
• 0:38
  Speaker 1: order to develop them and bring them into maturity. Development
• 0:43
  Speaker 1: may differ according to the character of the phenomena we desire.
• 0:47
  Speaker 1: Those who desire physical phenomena must develop in one way,
• 0:50
  Speaker 1: those who desire to obtain automatic writing must develop in another,
• 0:55
  Speaker 1: and those who wish to become clairvoyant must develop in
• 0:59
  Speaker 1: still another. In so go on spontaneous phenomena. To begin,
• 1:04
  Speaker 1: Let me give a few general hints to those who
• 1:06
  Speaker 1: have experienced spontaneous phenomena in their waking state, or who
• 1:11
  Speaker 1: have experienced remarkable dreams which they feel signify something, but
• 1:16
  Speaker 1: just what they do not understand. These spontaneous phenomena are
• 1:22
  Speaker 1: often the simplest types of mediumship, though as a matter
• 1:25
  Speaker 1: of fact they are also an indication of psychic power,
• 1:29
  Speaker 1: having but little to do with true mediumistic messages. That is,
• 1:33
  Speaker 1: they are the result of remarkable powers within ourselves. All
• 1:38
  Speaker 1: who obtain phenomena of this nature should make it a point,
• 1:42
  Speaker 1: first of all, to maintain the physical health at the
• 1:45
  Speaker 1: highest possible standard, so that the energies are not drained
• 1:50
  Speaker 1: and the body remains healthy in the mind clear in
• 1:53
  Speaker 1: its judgment. It is essential to reduce the amount of
• 1:56
  Speaker 1: stimulants which may be taken to the lowest possible coquurre quantity, or,
• 2:00
  Speaker 1: if possible, omit them altogether. This applies not only to
• 2:04
  Speaker 1: alcohol in all its forms, but also to tea and coffee.
• 2:10
  Speaker 1: These stimulants excite the nerves and the imagination, and often
• 2:15
  Speaker 1: induce manifestations which are not true psychic phenomena at all,
• 2:20
  Speaker 1: but merely the results of a disordered nervous system. The
• 2:24
  Speaker 1: subject should not eat too much meat. On the other hand,
• 2:27
  Speaker 1: fruits of all kinds, particularly acid fruits such as the pear, peach, plum, orange,
• 2:33
  Speaker 1: and lemon, are especially suitable, since the juices of these
• 2:38
  Speaker 1: fruits act upon the liver and tend to cleanse the blood.
• 2:42
  Speaker 1: Of course, these precautions are only for those who are
• 2:45
  Speaker 1: serious in their study and who are determined to obtain
• 2:49
  Speaker 1: the best possible phenomena. The mind should be exercised in
• 2:54
  Speaker 1: all healthy channels. Do not introspect or reflect too much
• 2:59
  Speaker 1: on your own inner mental conditions. You must learn to
• 3:03
  Speaker 1: live outside of your head, so to speak, in the
• 3:06
  Speaker 1: outer world. Do not constantly wonder what is going on
• 3:10
  Speaker 1: within your own brain. If you do, you will surely
• 3:13
  Speaker 1: lead yourself into difficulties later on. In short, you should
• 3:18
  Speaker 1: lead a healthy, active life, and between those times when
• 3:22
  Speaker 1: you experience phenomena, you should think about them as applied
• 3:26
  Speaker 1: to yourself as little as possible conditions for development. If
• 3:31
  Speaker 1: you desire to obtain certain manifestations, it is not advisable
• 3:36
  Speaker 1: to sit for them or try to obtain them for
• 3:39
  Speaker 1: longer than twenty minutes to half an hour each day.
• 3:43
  Speaker 1: At first, five or ten minutes would suffice, and this
• 3:46
  Speaker 1: time can gradually be lengthened as you progress. This is
• 3:51
  Speaker 1: especially important, and the neglect of this rule is one
• 3:55
  Speaker 1: of the great reasons for the dangers which mediums experience
• 3:59
  Speaker 1: later on in their development. Suppose, for example, that someone
• 4:03
  Speaker 1: appeared to you and gave you certain advice as to
• 4:06
  Speaker 1: your course of action. It would certainly be unwise for
• 4:10
  Speaker 1: you to follow this advice in every case without inquiring
• 4:14
  Speaker 1: whether or not it would be just and sensible, and
• 4:18
  Speaker 1: without using your own judgment when the advice was given.
• 4:23
  Speaker 1: Even supposing that the person who appeared to you were
• 4:26
  Speaker 1: really the spirit it claimed to be, there is always
• 4:29
  Speaker 1: the possibility that this spirit may be mistaken, and the
• 4:32
  Speaker 1: further possibility that some malicious and lying spirit is coming
• 4:37
  Speaker 1: to you pretending to give advice, while in reality it
• 4:41
  Speaker 1: was only leading you astray. There is this further possibility
• 4:45
  Speaker 1: that the figure you saw was not really a spirit
• 4:48
  Speaker 1: at all, but merely the product of your own subconscious imagination.
• 4:52
  Speaker 1: Often this is the case, and yet the figure has
• 4:55
  Speaker 1: given true and sound advice. All we are saying now
• 4:59
  Speaker 1: is that the judgment the individual who receives such messages
• 5:03
  Speaker 1: or advice must always be exercised upon the message received.
• 5:08
  Speaker 1: If you do not cultivate this habit, you will find
• 5:11
  Speaker 1: that messages often become more and more insistent when they
• 5:15
  Speaker 1: are not followed, and will sometimes give untrue or lying information.
• 5:20
  Speaker 1: They may even urge you to do certain things which
• 5:23
  Speaker 1: are against your own welfare. All this can only be
• 5:28
  Speaker 1: settled by the exercise of right judgment and by the
• 5:32
  Speaker 1: advice of those who know how much to believe in
• 5:35
  Speaker 1: the messages. It is for this reason that the council
• 5:39
  Speaker 1: and help of one who has had long training and
• 5:42
  Speaker 1: experience in this subject is most desirable during these early
• 5:46
  Speaker 1: stages of mediumship. The proper formation of the circle. The
• 5:51
  Speaker 1: proper formation of the circle is of the utmost importance,
• 5:55
  Speaker 1: and upon it depends the excellence of the phenomena, and
• 5:59
  Speaker 1: whether or not helpful personalities are drawn into your aura
• 6:03
  Speaker 1: and environment. The best results may be obtained by closely
• 6:08
  Speaker 1: obeying the following rules. From six to ten persons usually
• 6:12
  Speaker 1: constitute a circle. They should range, on the average from
• 6:16
  Speaker 1: twenty to fifty years of age. Of these, half should
• 6:20
  Speaker 1: be gentlemen and half ladies. They should sit alternately round
• 6:23
  Speaker 1: a table or around the room. In the case one
• 6:26
  Speaker 1: of the party enters the cabinet, it is desirable to
• 6:29
  Speaker 1: join hands in order to form a battery so called,
• 6:33
  Speaker 1: and the feat should be kept flat on the floor.
• 6:36
  Speaker 1: The circle should not last more than two hours and
• 6:39
  Speaker 1: not less than half an hour. An invocation or short
• 6:43
  Speaker 1: earnest prayer should begin. The proceedings followed by slow and
• 6:47
  Speaker 1: quiet music, which may or may not be accompanied by singing,
• 6:52
  Speaker 1: according to the expressed wish of the controls or the
• 6:56
  Speaker 1: experience of those forming the circle. The light should be subdued,
• 7:00
  Speaker 1: but absolute darkness should not be permitted unless strict instructions
• 7:04
  Speaker 1: are given to that effect. Avoid dark seances if possible
• 7:08
  Speaker 1: at all times. The value of flowers. It is advisable
• 7:13
  Speaker 1: to have flowers in the seance room whenever possible, as
• 7:16
  Speaker 1: their presence is said to attract spirits in a peculiar manner.
• 7:21
  Speaker 1: The spirits say that these flowers are lights. Plenty of
• 7:26
  Speaker 1: fresh air should be allowed to enter the seance room.
• 7:29
  Speaker 1: If any member of the circle be ill, he or
• 7:32
  Speaker 1: she should not be permitted to sit in the circle
• 7:34
  Speaker 1: until well again. A developing circle should meet in the
• 7:39
  Speaker 1: same room, since this room tends to become mediumized or
• 7:43
  Speaker 1: soaked in the magnetic influence is given off by the sitters.
• 7:47
  Speaker 1: The chairs on which the members of the circle set
• 7:50
  Speaker 1: should be wood or cane bottomed. The use of upholstered
• 7:54
  Speaker 1: chairs is generally inadvisable. The table round which the members
• 7:58
  Speaker 1: of the circle set should be free from metal. The
• 8:01
  Speaker 1: chair on which the medium sits must be cane or wood,
• 8:06
  Speaker 1: and as already said, free from all cushions or upholstery
• 8:11
  Speaker 1: atmospheric conditions. Atmospheric changes play a great and important part
• 8:16
  Speaker 1: in all mediumistic conditions. The drier the atmosphere, the better
• 8:20
  Speaker 1: the phenomena. As a rule, on damp, rainy days little
• 8:24
  Speaker 1: can be obtained. During a thunderstorm, startling phenomena occasionally take place.
• 8:31
  Speaker 1: High rarefied air is better than that of lower levels,
• 8:35
  Speaker 1: and for that reason a house on the side or
• 8:38
  Speaker 1: even the top of a high mountain should be selected,
• 8:41
  Speaker 1: if possible, in which to hold seances. Failing this, select
• 8:45
  Speaker 1: a house which has as high an altitude as possible.
• 8:50
  Speaker 1: One member of the circle must, by universal consent, undertake
• 8:54
  Speaker 1: to conduct the proceedings, to converse with the spirits when
• 8:58
  Speaker 1: they appear, to arrange the sitters in their proper places,
• 9:02
  Speaker 1: to adjust the amount of light required, et cetera. His
• 9:05
  Speaker 1: word must be followed at once and without question, Otherwise
• 9:09
  Speaker 1: the necessary harmony will be destroyed and the circle will
• 9:13
  Speaker 1: fail to obtain as good results. Excitement in all its
• 9:18
  Speaker 1: forms should be avoided. If one in the circle develop
• 9:21
  Speaker 1: mediumistic power. He should be placed next to a more
• 9:25
  Speaker 1: fully developed medium, unless instructions are given not to do so.
• 9:30
  Speaker 1: In this way, the power is concentrated and focused at
• 9:33
  Speaker 1: one point misuse of spirit advice. Never attempt to use
• 9:38
  Speaker 1: psychic power for worldly purposes. If you do, you will
• 9:43
  Speaker 1: invite mischievous and lying intelligences to your circle, and the
• 9:47
  Speaker 1: medium will possibly lose what mediumship he already possesses. Do
• 9:52
  Speaker 1: not sit too frequently. Every other night at most should
• 9:57
  Speaker 1: sittings be held, or even twice a week. See that
• 10:01
  Speaker 1: the room is not too cool and is not unduly heated.
• 10:06
  Speaker 1: As soon as the first manifestations have been received, encourage
• 10:10
  Speaker 1: the spirits by talking to them in a natural tone
• 10:13
  Speaker 1: or voice, as you would if they were visibly present
• 10:16
  Speaker 1: in the room. Speak to them as you would if
• 10:19
  Speaker 1: they had returned to Earth in bodily form. Be natural.
• 10:24
  Speaker 1: In fact, you will get the best results this way.
• 10:28
  Speaker 1: Many of those who are interested in spiritualism are so
• 10:31
  Speaker 1: situated that they cannot join circles but wish to develop alone.
• 10:36
  Speaker 1: This is, as a rule, unwise unless someone is present
• 10:40
  Speaker 1: who understands the phenomena which are likely to develop, and
• 10:43
  Speaker 1: who can help and give good advice when required, You
• 10:48
  Speaker 1: may do so if the following instructions are kept carefully
• 10:51
  Speaker 1: in mind. If you can provide yourself with a cabinet,
• 10:55
  Speaker 1: it would be very advisable to do so. Sit inside
• 10:58
  Speaker 1: the cabinet on a comfortable chair, and relax yourself thoroughly.
• 11:02
  Speaker 1: Note whatever impressions come to you, pay particular attention to
• 11:06
  Speaker 1: your bodily feelings no less than your mental states. Do
• 11:10
  Speaker 1: not exaggerate here or let your imagination have too free play.
• 11:15
  Speaker 1: If your legs should happen to tingle or the chair
• 11:17
  Speaker 1: to creak, do not put these down to spiritual influence.
• 11:22
  Speaker 1: They may be due to perfectly normal causes symptoms of
• 11:26
  Speaker 1: oncoming mediumship. For the first few evenings, you will possibly
• 11:31
  Speaker 1: notice nothing much of interest, although very psychic persons begin
• 11:36
  Speaker 1: to develop almost at once. A peculiar lightness and buzzing
• 11:41
  Speaker 1: is sometimes experienced in the head, together with a sense
• 11:45
  Speaker 1: of numbness in the hands and arms, and sometimes in
• 11:48
  Speaker 1: the feet and legs. The respiration seems to become slower,
• 11:53
  Speaker 1: and so does the heart. Tiny lights and spots and
• 11:57
  Speaker 1: light or dark spots appear in the air at a
• 12:00
  Speaker 1: distance of one to two feet in front of the subject.
• 12:03
  Speaker 1: A peculiar pressure is sometimes experienced on the top of
• 12:07
  Speaker 1: the head, or on the base of the brain, or
• 12:10
  Speaker 1: in the solar plexus. Swishing sounds as of the sea
• 12:14
  Speaker 1: breaking upon the seashore may be heard, and a sensation
• 12:18
  Speaker 1: that something inside the head is going round and round
• 12:21
  Speaker 1: in spirals. The head, the hands, and sometimes the whole
• 12:25
  Speaker 1: body break out into a profuse perspiration. At this point,
• 12:30
  Speaker 1: these are the first sensations of oncoming mediumship. Very often
• 12:35
  Speaker 1: they are not pleasant for the first few weeks, but
• 12:37
  Speaker 1: if this period be passed, the unpleasant sensations will, as
• 12:41
  Speaker 1: a rule vanish, and the subject will then develop true
• 12:46
  Speaker 1: mediumship of one character or another, getting the best results.
• 12:50
  Speaker 1: Just here it is advisable to state that the would
• 12:54
  Speaker 1: be medium should not at first sit for the express
• 12:57
  Speaker 1: purpose of cultivating any particular phase of mediumship. He may
• 13:02
  Speaker 1: desire to obtain materialization, but unless he is naturally endowed
• 13:07
  Speaker 1: in this matter, he might sit forever and obtain nothing,
• 13:11
  Speaker 1: Whereas if he developed whatever phenomena presented themselves, he might
• 13:16
  Speaker 1: very soon develop into a striking medium in some other line.
• 13:20
  Speaker 1: To return, however, to the early development of mediumship. Soon
• 13:26
  Speaker 1: after these early impressions have been noticed. The subject may
• 13:30
  Speaker 1: note for the first time that his mind is peculiarly
• 13:33
  Speaker 1: susceptible to influences of all kinds. He feels as if
• 13:37
  Speaker 1: his mind has been skinned, so to speak, and that
• 13:42
  Speaker 1: he is now exposed to the psychic breezes from every direction.
• 13:46
  Speaker 1: He may become erratic and irritable, and develop moods which
• 13:50
  Speaker 1: he himself cannot understand. Peculiar buzzings in the head or
• 13:56
  Speaker 1: are sometimes heard. Sometimes cloudlike mass seem to form in
• 14:01
  Speaker 1: space before him, twisting and turning and moving up and
• 14:04
  Speaker 1: down and round about in very irregular motion. As a rule,
• 14:09
  Speaker 1: these clouds appear to be of the consistency of vapor,
• 14:13
  Speaker 1: though they may in time become more and more solid
• 14:16
  Speaker 1: until they become built up into definite forms of this However,
• 14:21
  Speaker 1: later early signs and experiences. At this phase of the development.
• 14:27
  Speaker 1: The subject may feel cool breezes blowing upon his hands
• 14:31
  Speaker 1: and face from various directions, breezes which appear to be
• 14:35
  Speaker 1: perfectly physical in character. He may also experience a peculiar
• 14:40
  Speaker 1: sticky sensation on his hands and face, as though cobwebs
• 14:45
  Speaker 1: were applied over the bare's skin which is exposed. This
• 14:50
  Speaker 1: cobwebby sensation is very common and is not limited as
• 14:54
  Speaker 1: many think, to mediums who obtain materialization colors and voices.
• 15:00
  Speaker 1: In the early stage of the development, mediums very often
• 15:03
  Speaker 1: see colors of various shades and hues in space before them.
• 15:08
  Speaker 1: They are unable to tell whether or not these colors
• 15:11
  Speaker 1: have any definite shape or outline. They seem to possess
• 15:15
  Speaker 1: an odd, irregular shape of their own, something like a
• 15:18
  Speaker 1: large blot of ink. At this stage, also, many psychics
• 15:23
  Speaker 1: see faces of friends and relatives, either living or dead,
• 15:27
  Speaker 1: just as they are falling asleep or as they are
• 15:29
  Speaker 1: awakening in the morning, usually the former. They also see
• 15:33
  Speaker 1: many strange faces. These may be mere vague images or
• 15:39
  Speaker 1: clearly outlined. Instead of the faces, they may hear voices speaking,
• 15:46
  Speaker 1: and the first thing which these voices generally say is
• 15:50
  Speaker 1: the name of the subject himself. After this, the voices
• 15:54
  Speaker 1: may become more and more clear and intense. But such
• 15:58
  Speaker 1: phenomena should be permitted only at stated times, because if
• 16:02
  Speaker 1: they are allowed to develop, whenever they may be experienced
• 16:05
  Speaker 1: trouble may result. Many odd and grotesque figures and shapes
• 16:11
  Speaker 1: may present themselves to the mind's eye. At the stage
• 16:14
  Speaker 1: of development. These shapes may be highly colored, or may
• 16:17
  Speaker 1: be almost colorless, seeming to be made of the air itself,
• 16:22
  Speaker 1: yet somehow separated from this in outline. Many of these
• 16:27
  Speaker 1: images are symbolic, though as a rule a few of
• 16:31
  Speaker 1: them are recognizable. More often they represent curious patterns and figures,
• 16:37
  Speaker 1: such as roses, circles, outlines of patterns, such as may
• 16:42
  Speaker 1: be seen on the wall paper, and occasionally weird and
• 16:45
  Speaker 1: horrible images flash into the mind, to be gone again
• 16:48
  Speaker 1: in the next instant. Unpleasant experiences. If these manifestations develop
• 16:55
  Speaker 1: an unpleasant character at the time, they should be checked instantly.
• 17:00
  Speaker 1: The subject may do this in several ways. First of all,
• 17:03
  Speaker 1: he should build up his physical health. Second, he should
• 17:07
  Speaker 1: see to it that he obtains plenty of sleep. Third,
• 17:12
  Speaker 1: he should exercise his brain as little as possible on
• 17:15
  Speaker 1: anything of this unpleasant character. Fourth, he should keep busily
• 17:21
  Speaker 1: occupied in material, practical things, and leave himself no time
• 17:25
  Speaker 1: to ponder and dwell upon these unpleasant experiences. Fifth, he
• 17:31
  Speaker 1: should avoid by all means day dreaming, and never allow
• 17:35
  Speaker 1: his mind to become passive or absent. Minded. He should
• 17:39
  Speaker 1: cultivate his objective attention and interest in short and focus
• 17:43
  Speaker 1: his whole personality as it were, between his eyes, so
• 17:48
  Speaker 1: as to have it under thorough control. If he does
• 17:51
  Speaker 1: this and refuses to sit for development for a short time,
• 17:55
  Speaker 1: he will find that these early unpleasant symptoms, should they develop,
• 17:59
  Speaker 1: will soon win are off, And this advice holds good
• 18:02
  Speaker 1: for any stage in the development of mediumship. Exaggeration and imagination.
• 18:07
  Speaker 1: Many of those who develop psychic phenomena are inclined to
• 18:12
  Speaker 1: exaggerate the importance of the manifestations they receive during the
• 18:16
  Speaker 1: early stages of their mediumship. Everything seems so new and
• 18:20
  Speaker 1: strange to them, so remarkable, so unaccountable, so beyond the
• 18:25
  Speaker 1: experience of the average person, that they feel bound to
• 18:28
  Speaker 1: tell it to everyone they meet, and usually it loses
• 18:31
  Speaker 1: nothing in the telling. They fail to realize that every
• 18:33
  Speaker 1: medium who has been developed has gone through these same
• 18:37
  Speaker 1: early stages, but has progressed beyond them years before. In
• 18:42
  Speaker 1: observing these phenomena on yourself, you must be very careful
• 18:46
  Speaker 1: to distinguish between the facts which really occur and the
• 18:50
  Speaker 1: fantasies of your own excited imagination, which is inclined to
• 18:54
  Speaker 1: extend and amplify these facts beyond all recognition. Thus, suppose
• 18:59
  Speaker 1: a blurred outline of a face presents itself to you.
• 19:03
  Speaker 1: The next day you meet your cousin on the street,
• 19:06
  Speaker 1: you instantly come to the conclusion that the face you
• 19:09
  Speaker 1: saw was that of your cousin, while as a matter
• 19:13
  Speaker 1: of fact it might not have borne the least resemblance
• 19:16
  Speaker 1: to him. This is a very simple case, but will
• 19:19
  Speaker 1: serve to explain the point in question why and how
• 19:23
  Speaker 1: your power may be lost. If you obtain such phenomena,
• 19:28
  Speaker 1: you must be very careful not to exaggerate them, for
• 19:32
  Speaker 1: if you do, you will quite possibly lose the real
• 19:35
  Speaker 1: sensitiveness that you are beginning to acquire, and this will
• 19:39
  Speaker 1: be replaced by the products of an over excited imagination.
• 19:44
  Speaker 1: This is a truth well known, as you may see
• 19:47
  Speaker 1: by the following quotation from a work which appeared in
• 19:50
  Speaker 1: eighteen thirteen entitled Animal Magnetism by delus For in it
• 19:56
  Speaker 1: he says, quote, do not press the sonambulis too much,
• 20:01
  Speaker 1: for if you do, you will gain nothing. You will
• 20:04
  Speaker 1: even lose the advantages which you might derive from his lucidity.
• 20:10
  Speaker 1: It is possible that you could make him speak upon
• 20:13
  Speaker 1: all the subjects of your personal curiosity, but in that
• 20:17
  Speaker 1: case you will make him leave his own sphere and
• 20:21
  Speaker 1: introduce him in yours. He will no longer have any
• 20:25
  Speaker 1: other resources than yourself. He will utter to you very
• 20:29
  Speaker 1: eloquent discourses, but they will be no more dictated by
• 20:32
  Speaker 1: the external inspirations. They will be the product of his
• 20:36
  Speaker 1: recollections or of his imagination. Perhaps you will also rouse
• 20:42
  Speaker 1: his vanity, and then all is lost. He will not
• 20:46
  Speaker 1: re enter the circle from which he has wandered. The
• 20:49
  Speaker 1: two states cannot be confounded. The student who cultivates mediumship
• 20:55
  Speaker 1: should therefore be careful to preserve a clear head and
• 21:00
  Speaker 1: a modest estimate of his own phenomena. If he does,
• 21:04
  Speaker 1: he will doubtless progress rapidly and favorably. End of Chapter one,
• 21:10
  Speaker 1: Chapter two.
• 21:11
  Speaker 2: Harmonious conditions. If we exert ourselves in any way whatever,
• 21:16
  Speaker 2: we desire certain conditions in order to bring our powers
• 21:20
  Speaker 2: and faculties into play to the best advantage. If we
• 21:23
  Speaker 2: are undertaking to perform any feat of physical strength, of
• 21:27
  Speaker 2: intellectual or spiritual achievement, we desire to be free from
• 21:31
  Speaker 2: care and worry, distraction and irritation, to be enabled to
• 21:34
  Speaker 2: center and focus the whole of our energy in the
• 21:37
  Speaker 2: channel desired. It is the same with mediumship conditions for
• 21:43
  Speaker 2: the exercise of psynchic powers. Professor Flourney of Geneva writes
• 21:49
  Speaker 2: in this connection quote as to the influence of various
• 21:53
  Speaker 2: physical and mental conditions upon the exercise of mediumship, my
• 21:57
  Speaker 2: correspondence are unanimous in condemning his absolute hindrances or at
• 22:01
  Speaker 2: least grave obstacles to the production of phenomena, all such
• 22:05
  Speaker 2: causes as physical exhaustion, disturbing emotions, uneasiness, absorbing thoughts, fatigue, enervation,
• 22:13
  Speaker 2: et cetera. The conditions required for the successful exercise of
• 22:17
  Speaker 2: mediumistic powers are the same as for the voluntary exercise
• 22:21
  Speaker 2: of any other power. A state of good health, nervous equilibrium, calm,
• 22:26
  Speaker 2: the absence of care, good humour, sympathetic surroundings, et cetera.
• 22:32
  Speaker 2: Many insist upon moral elevation, purity of conduct, noble aspirations, altruism,
• 22:38
  Speaker 2: et cetera, saying that these things strengthen mediumship, while the
• 22:42
  Speaker 2: lower sentiments such as cupidity, pride, jealousy, et cetera, are
• 22:47
  Speaker 2: the cause of much loss of power. Others have insisted
• 22:51
  Speaker 2: that certain physical conditions have a propitious effect silence, semi obscurity,
• 22:57
  Speaker 2: good ventilation, fasting, et cetera necessity for conditions. Those who
• 23:06
  Speaker 2: do not understand the laws of spiritualism have contended that
• 23:10
  Speaker 2: the conditions demanded by mediums are often absurd for the
• 23:13
  Speaker 2: reason that they permit trickery. If the conditions permit the
• 23:17
  Speaker 2: practice of fraud, they should not be allowed. Beyond this,
• 23:21
  Speaker 2: any conditions required by the medium should be granted, for
• 23:24
  Speaker 2: the medium alone is the one to know what these
• 23:26
  Speaker 2: conditions should be. Mediumship doubtless has its conditions, its own
• 23:32
  Speaker 2: psychic laws, just as any other exercise of the inner powers.
• 23:36
  Speaker 2: Many skeptics do not see this. They say, if you
• 23:39
  Speaker 2: can produce these phenomena, you must be able to produce
• 23:42
  Speaker 2: them at any time, just as we can always produce
• 23:45
  Speaker 2: the same effects in a chemical or physical laboratory. Why
• 23:48
  Speaker 2: all this fuss about conditions, et cetera. But they fail
• 23:52
  Speaker 2: to take into consideration human nature and the fact that
• 23:55
  Speaker 2: psychic laws and physical laws are different. We can easily
• 23:59
  Speaker 2: prove this conditions in art. Take any musical composer or
• 24:06
  Speaker 2: any artist who paints, and seat him at a table
• 24:09
  Speaker 2: with instructions to compose a sonata or paint a wonderful
• 24:12
  Speaker 2: picture within half an hour. Suppose that during all the
• 24:16
  Speaker 2: time the work is in progress, noise and flurry is
• 24:19
  Speaker 2: constantly going on in the same room. The desk at
• 24:22
  Speaker 2: which the artist works is being shaken, children are continually
• 24:26
  Speaker 2: running in and out of the room, et cetera. Do
• 24:29
  Speaker 2: you think that under such conditions a masterpiece in either
• 24:32
  Speaker 2: music or art could be produced? Could a poet compose
• 24:36
  Speaker 2: a sonnet under such conditions? Certainly he could not. The
• 24:40
  Speaker 2: exercise of mediumistic power is assuredly as delicate, as subtle,
• 24:44
  Speaker 2: as refined, as easily disturbed as any of these productions
• 24:48
  Speaker 2: of the genius of man. How absurd therefore to pretend
• 24:52
  Speaker 2: or contend that mediums should be able to exercise their
• 24:55
  Speaker 2: powers whenever they want them, under any conditions, and to contend,
• 24:59
  Speaker 2: for whither that if they fail to do so, they
• 25:02
  Speaker 2: are therefore frauds and humbugs. For the successful exercise of
• 25:06
  Speaker 2: mediumship or psychic power in any direction, the essentials which
• 25:10
  Speaker 2: have been mentioned above must be fulfilled, as well as
• 25:14
  Speaker 2: any others which the medium may feel are required. These must,
• 25:17
  Speaker 2: by all means be granted, for if they are not,
• 25:20
  Speaker 2: it is highly probable that no phenomena at all will
• 25:23
  Speaker 2: be obtained. Harmony, all important harmony is the keynote of
• 25:29
  Speaker 2: successful mediumship, harmony of physical, mental, and spiritual life. This
• 25:35
  Speaker 2: is only carrying to its logical conclusion, what we observe
• 25:38
  Speaker 2: every day all around us. Have we not all felt
• 25:41
  Speaker 2: immediately upon meeting certain persons that they were attractive or
• 25:45
  Speaker 2: repellent to us? We felt either drawn or repulsed inwardly
• 25:50
  Speaker 2: for no reason that we could define. Many theories have
• 25:53
  Speaker 2: been advanced to explain this fact, but the most probable
• 25:57
  Speaker 2: is that surrounding each individual there is an aura or
• 26:00
  Speaker 2: psychic atmosphere which surrounds him like a halo or sheath,
• 26:04
  Speaker 2: extending some distance outward from the body, and varying with
• 26:08
  Speaker 2: the individual temperament, emotions, and the physical and mental health.
• 26:12
  Speaker 2: If these auras are sympathetic, if they blend one with another,
• 26:16
  Speaker 2: then we have attraction, leading in many cases to love
• 26:19
  Speaker 2: at first sight. If the opposite conditions exist, we have
• 26:23
  Speaker 2: instinctive dislikes, which are generally correct. As the poet said,
• 26:28
  Speaker 2: I do not like you, doctor Fell. The reason why
• 26:31
  Speaker 2: I cannot tell mental harmony. Next to physical harmony comes
• 26:37
  Speaker 2: mental harmony, and here is a wide field for observation
• 26:41
  Speaker 2: and experiment. All spiritualists know that persons of certain temperaments
• 26:46
  Speaker 2: must be excluded from serious circles if the better class
• 26:49
  Speaker 2: of phenomena are to be obtained. Such persons include the flippant,
• 26:54
  Speaker 2: the arrogant, the unduly skeptical, the frivolous, et cetera. In
• 26:58
  Speaker 2: addition to this, however, finer and more subtle points of
• 27:02
  Speaker 2: mental harmony must be adjusted. In our mental scales. It
• 27:06
  Speaker 2: is advisable, whenever possible, to bring together persons having more
• 27:10
  Speaker 2: or less the same point of view, interests and sympathies.
• 27:14
  Speaker 2: Sympathetic people always obtain better phenomena than the extremely intellectual ones.
• 27:19
  Speaker 2: In the latter the mind is so to speak, hard, unyielding,
• 27:24
  Speaker 2: and tends to build up a wall or barrier between
• 27:26
  Speaker 2: itself and the medium, which it is difficult or even
• 27:29
  Speaker 2: impossible for the latter to break through. We have known
• 27:33
  Speaker 2: of several cases in which mediums were unable to obtain
• 27:36
  Speaker 2: any results at all for individuals of the very intellectual
• 27:39
  Speaker 2: and so to speak critical type of mind, whereas they
• 27:43
  Speaker 2: could obtain an abundance of striking manifestations for the sympathetic
• 27:47
  Speaker 2: and more congenial natures. Excessive gravity. At the same time,
• 27:54
  Speaker 2: extreme gravity and seriousness on all occasions is to be avoided.
• 27:58
  Speaker 2: Every person who invests Gates spiritualism should see to it
• 28:02
  Speaker 2: that he preserves throughout his sense of humor and his
• 28:05
  Speaker 2: continued contact with an interest in the things of this world.
• 28:10
  Speaker 2: If he does not do this, he is liable to
• 28:12
  Speaker 2: become unduly swayed and overbalanced by the messages which are
• 28:16
  Speaker 2: given to him, and by the startling and at first
• 28:19
  Speaker 2: sight almost appalling fact that communication with the spirits of
• 28:22
  Speaker 2: the departed has really been established. If he does not
• 28:25
  Speaker 2: preserve his balance and common sense at such times, he
• 28:29
  Speaker 2: is liable to become not only unduly crunchulous, but even
• 28:32
  Speaker 2: to fly off the handle altogether, and his mind may,
• 28:36
  Speaker 2: in some instances actually become unhinged. Be careful, therefore, to
• 28:41
  Speaker 2: keep the compartments of your mind water tight, as it were,
• 28:44
  Speaker 2: and not allow your interest for the things spiritual to
• 28:47
  Speaker 2: overflow and swamp your interest in things material. Spiritual harmony
• 28:54
  Speaker 2: next we come to spiritual sympathy and harmony, which is
• 28:57
  Speaker 2: perhaps most important of all in the formation of successful circles.
• 29:01
  Speaker 2: This would include an interest in spiritual things aspirations, benevolence, sympathy,
• 29:07
  Speaker 2: a more or less religious turn of mind, tolerance, and
• 29:11
  Speaker 2: the ability to see things from the standpoint of another,
• 29:14
  Speaker 2: this being sympathy in its broadest sense. It is the
• 29:18
  Speaker 2: blending together of a number of temperaments of this character
• 29:21
  Speaker 2: which constitutes the successful circle. The reason for this harmony
• 29:25
  Speaker 2: and delicate adjustment of conditions may be seen readily enough
• 29:29
  Speaker 2: by a reference to the phenomena not only of the
• 29:31
  Speaker 2: mental but of the physical world. For instance, if you
• 29:35
  Speaker 2: set into vibration a tuning fork, this will emit a
• 29:38
  Speaker 2: note of a certain pitch. Another tuning fork, distant, many
• 29:42
  Speaker 2: feet from the first, will instantly vibrate in unison if
• 29:45
  Speaker 2: the two are attuned one to the other. But unless
• 29:49
  Speaker 2: the tuning forks are adjusted at precisely the right pitch,
• 29:52
  Speaker 2: they will not respond. And a thousand tuning forks may
• 29:56
  Speaker 2: be placed around the room, but none of them will
• 29:58
  Speaker 2: respond in any way to the vibration of the first.
• 30:01
  Speaker 2: This crude analogy drawn from the physical world will show
• 30:05
  Speaker 2: us how essential harmony is. And if this be true
• 30:09
  Speaker 2: in material phenomena, more certainly is it true in the
• 30:12
  Speaker 2: mental and spiritual realms. Harmony and vibration. Every individual is
• 30:19
  Speaker 2: said to vibrate at a certain rate. This is his
• 30:22
  Speaker 2: own pitch, so to say, and no two human beings
• 30:25
  Speaker 2: are alike. This definite rate of vibration doubtless corresponds to
• 30:30
  Speaker 2: the personality of the individual. And though no two can
• 30:34
  Speaker 2: be absolutely alike, those who approximate each other the nearest
• 30:37
  Speaker 2: would be the most sympathetic and would be the most
• 30:40
  Speaker 2: drawn one to the other. And if this is true
• 30:43
  Speaker 2: of spirits incarnate here in this life, it is doubtless
• 30:47
  Speaker 2: true when applied to the relations between our own spirits
• 30:50
  Speaker 2: and the spirits of those who have passed over. There
• 30:53
  Speaker 2: is an old saying that like attracts like. If the
• 30:56
  Speaker 2: tone of the circle and of the individuals composing it
• 30:59
  Speaker 2: is high, the aspirations elevated and pure, that circle will
• 31:04
  Speaker 2: attract to it spirits from the other side having the
• 31:07
  Speaker 2: same vibrations as itself. The circle will in fact only
• 31:11
  Speaker 2: come in contact with good and not evil spirits. Certainly,
• 31:15
  Speaker 2: there are exceptions to every rule, but the above is
• 31:18
  Speaker 2: the general law, which may be stated in broad terms
• 31:21
  Speaker 2: as true. For were this not the case, we might
• 31:24
  Speaker 2: contend that no such thing as justice existed in the universe,
• 31:28
  Speaker 2: and that chance and not moral law, held all in
• 31:31
  Speaker 2: its sway. But we know that this is not the case.
• 31:34
  Speaker 2: Inasmuch as we feel assured in our heart of hearts
• 31:37
  Speaker 2: that beauty, truth, and justice are the foundation stones upon
• 31:40
  Speaker 2: which this universe is built, we might rightly suppose that
• 31:45
  Speaker 2: this is in every case the truth, and that a
• 31:47
  Speaker 2: circle formed by serious minded investigators, having in view only
• 31:51
  Speaker 2: the highest and best motives, would draw to them helpful
• 31:55
  Speaker 2: and loving spirits from the great beyond. And the history
• 31:58
  Speaker 2: of spiritualism proved this to be the fact. How to
• 32:03
  Speaker 2: fit yourself for a circle. The method you should follow
• 32:07
  Speaker 2: to fit yourself most effectually for becoming a member of
• 32:10
  Speaker 2: one of these advanced circles is as follows. You should
• 32:13
  Speaker 2: perfect and make as wholesome as possible the physical body
• 32:17
  Speaker 2: in which you live. This is brought about by paying
• 32:20
  Speaker 2: particular attention to the diet, and by taking in abundance
• 32:23
  Speaker 2: of exercise, deep breathing, and frequent baths. Many spiritualists have
• 32:28
  Speaker 2: become vegetarians with this object in view, and also non
• 32:32
  Speaker 2: smokers and obstainers from alcohol. Tea and coffee are also
• 32:36
  Speaker 2: debarred in some quarters, but such strict measures are usually
• 32:40
  Speaker 2: advised only for those who are striving for individual spiritual
• 32:43
  Speaker 2: perfection and need not necessarily be followed by one who
• 32:46
  Speaker 2: is a member of a large circle. Of course, such
• 32:50
  Speaker 2: measures cannot fail to benefit an individual in any case.
• 32:55
  Speaker 2: The keystone of the arch cultivate cheerfulness, altruism, and a simple,
• 33:01
  Speaker 2: wholesome point of view. Banishing fear as you would the devil,
• 33:05
  Speaker 2: and never allowing it for a moment to dominate or
• 33:07
  Speaker 2: enter into you. Preserve a sane religious balance, and endeavor
• 33:12
  Speaker 2: in any way possible to cultivate sympathy for the point
• 33:15
  Speaker 2: of view of others, no matter how prejudiced and narrow
• 33:18
  Speaker 2: it may be. Keep your mind lifted up, elevated, and
• 33:23
  Speaker 2: as Andrew Jackson Davis said, under all circumstances, keep an
• 33:27
  Speaker 2: even mind if you do not naturally possess it, Cultivate
• 33:31
  Speaker 2: an insight into things spiritual and above all true benevolence
• 33:35
  Speaker 2: and sympathy. This is the keystone of the arch, erected
• 33:39
  Speaker 2: to and supporting self perfection.
• 33:42
  Speaker 3: End of Chapter two, Chapter three, Fear and how to
• 33:46
  Speaker 3: Banish It. We are our own greatest enemies. We create
• 33:51
  Speaker 3: the majority of the ills from which we suffer. In
• 33:55
  Speaker 3: psychic investigation, more people have suffered from fear than from
• 33:59
  Speaker 3: any other pressing emotion. But in nine cases out of ten,
• 34:04
  Speaker 3: these fears have been perfectly groundless, and the subject has
• 34:07
  Speaker 3: had all his fears and worry for nothing. He has
• 34:10
  Speaker 3: crossed his bridges before coming to them. Were he to
• 34:14
  Speaker 3: reflect for a moment, he would find that the terrible
• 34:16
  Speaker 3: things he feared very rarely came to him, that the
• 34:20
  Speaker 3: majority of the experiences which he actually went through were
• 34:24
  Speaker 3: of such a nature that he needn't have feared them
• 34:27
  Speaker 3: at all. Fear recks faith saves. Fear is not only
• 34:33
  Speaker 3: useless for the reason that it prevents nothing, but it
• 34:37
  Speaker 3: is actually harmful from this double standpoint. In the first place,
• 34:41
  Speaker 3: that helps to induce the condition we are fearing. As
• 34:45
  Speaker 3: Job said, that which I greatly feared has come upon me.
• 34:50
  Speaker 3: He thought about and dreaded certain conditions so much that
• 34:53
  Speaker 3: he doubtless created them, while had he not done so,
• 34:56
  Speaker 3: they would never have come upon him. Professor Sir William
• 35:00
  Speaker 3: James gives us a very good illustration of the way
• 35:03
  Speaker 3: in which fear sometimes brings about its own fulfillment. He says,
• 35:09
  Speaker 3: suppose that, for example, I am climbing in the Alps
• 35:12
  Speaker 3: and have the ill luck to work myself into a
• 35:15
  Speaker 3: position from which the only escape is by a terrible leap.
• 35:19
  Speaker 3: Being without similar experience, I have no evidence of my
• 35:23
  Speaker 3: ability to perform it successfully. But hope and confidence in
• 35:27
  Speaker 3: myself make me sure that I shall not miss my
• 35:30
  Speaker 3: aim and nerve my feet to execute what without those
• 35:34
  Speaker 3: subjective emotions would perhaps have been impossible. But suppose that,
• 35:40
  Speaker 3: on the contrary, the emotions of fear and mistrust predominate,
• 35:44
  Speaker 3: Or suppose that I feel that it would be sinful
• 35:46
  Speaker 3: to act upon an assumption unverified by previous experience, why
• 35:51
  Speaker 3: then I shall hesitate so long that, at last, exhausted
• 35:56
  Speaker 3: and trembling and launching myself in a moment of despair,
• 36:00
  Speaker 3: miss my foothold and roll into the abyss. In this case,
• 36:04
  Speaker 3: and this is one of an immense class, the part
• 36:07
  Speaker 3: of wisdom clearly is to believe what one desires, for
• 36:11
  Speaker 3: the belief is one of the indispensable preliminary conditions for
• 36:16
  Speaker 3: the realization of its object. There are then cases where
• 36:21
  Speaker 3: faith creates its own verification. Believe and you shall be right,
• 36:25
  Speaker 3: for you shall save yourself. Doubt and you shall again
• 36:30
  Speaker 3: be right, for you shall perish. The only difference is
• 36:34
  Speaker 3: that to believe is greatly to your advantage. The obvious
• 36:39
  Speaker 3: lesson to be drawn from this is that you should
• 36:42
  Speaker 3: not fear the unknown or unseen until you have had
• 36:45
  Speaker 3: just cause to do so. If you do, it will
• 36:48
  Speaker 3: predispose you to experience the very manifestations you most dread
• 36:55
  Speaker 3: evil effects of fears upon the body. In the second place,
• 37:00
  Speaker 3: fear has a destructive and depressing effect upon the body.
• 37:04
  Speaker 3: It depletes the vitality, lowers the respiration, and doubly incapacitates
• 37:09
  Speaker 3: you from performing any serious rational work or carrying on
• 37:14
  Speaker 3: any rational, common sense train of thought. Fear, therefore, is
• 37:18
  Speaker 3: certainly to be avoided, for it helps nobody and harms everybody.
• 37:24
  Speaker 3: But the reader may object, I cannot control my fear
• 37:27
  Speaker 3: so easily. It is a thing beyond my power. I
• 37:30
  Speaker 3: do not pursue fear. It pursues and overtakes me to
• 37:35
  Speaker 3: a certain extent. This may be true. There are two
• 37:39
  Speaker 3: kinds of fear, the unreasoning, instinctive fear and the conscious,
• 37:44
  Speaker 3: reflective fear. The former is a relic of our lowly ancestry,
• 37:49
  Speaker 3: and is shared by all the higher animals. We cannot
• 37:53
  Speaker 3: help that. But such fear, as a rule is only momentary,
• 37:56
  Speaker 3: and is over in a few instants. We have the
• 38:00
  Speaker 3: impulse to flee, et cetera, which demands immediate expression. But
• 38:04
  Speaker 3: this instinctive fear may be overcome by the mind. Our
• 38:09
  Speaker 3: reason tells us, upon second thought that we have no
• 38:12
  Speaker 3: cause to fear, and we stop abashed and ashamed of ourselves.
• 38:16
  Speaker 3: This is not the fear which we have to correct
• 38:19
  Speaker 3: as a rule, since it is bodily rather than mental,
• 38:22
  Speaker 3: and of short duration. The kind of fear to fear,
• 38:28
  Speaker 3: the conscious mental fear, is that which bothers us, and
• 38:31
  Speaker 3: which we should learn to cure. We are sufficiently advanced
• 38:35
  Speaker 3: in civilization and in the understanding of things spiritual to
• 38:39
  Speaker 3: know that all is natural. Nothing is supernatural. Even if
• 38:44
  Speaker 3: a spirit returns to us, that is a natural event,
• 38:47
  Speaker 3: though it may not be a common or ordinary event,
• 38:50
  Speaker 3: and for this reason we call it super normal. But
• 38:54
  Speaker 3: why should we be afraid of the spirit of a
• 38:56
  Speaker 3: dearly beloved friend, a relative, or even the spirit of
• 38:59
  Speaker 3: a stranger coming to us in this way, any more
• 39:02
  Speaker 3: than we should be afraid of it when coming to
• 39:04
  Speaker 3: us in the flesh. It is the same spirit, in
• 39:08
  Speaker 3: one case possessing a physical body, in the other case
• 39:12
  Speaker 3: animating only an ethereal body of what is there to
• 39:16
  Speaker 3: be afraid. Spirits are but human beings, such as ourselves.
• 39:21
  Speaker 3: We are spirits here and now, just as much as
• 39:24
  Speaker 3: we ever will be. Spirits are in fact human beings
• 39:28
  Speaker 3: who have passed through a certain experience called death, And
• 39:33
  Speaker 3: as Professor Mino Savage says, they are just folks. Why
• 39:38
  Speaker 3: therefore should we be afraid of them the powers of darkness?
• 39:44
  Speaker 3: We must school the mind to reflection, and, by due
• 39:47
  Speaker 3: exercise of the reason and the will, not to be
• 39:50
  Speaker 3: afraid of such happenings, but rather to accept them and
• 39:54
  Speaker 3: be thankful for them, and to treat them either as
• 39:57
  Speaker 3: scientific happenings or as spiritual events of great significance and help.
• 40:02
  Speaker 3: In either case, there is truly no cause to fear.
• 40:06
  Speaker 3: It is true that, in the case of many persons,
• 40:08
  Speaker 3: darkness brings with it a peculiar sense of dread, which
• 40:12
  Speaker 3: is experienced by nearly all children, and which is to
• 40:16
  Speaker 3: a certain extent shared by many animals. A dog will
• 40:20
  Speaker 3: go to the door of a dark room, peer in,
• 40:22
  Speaker 3: and slink away. Even insects often refuse to go into
• 40:26
  Speaker 3: dark places. The cat alone seems to enjoy the uncanny
• 40:31
  Speaker 3: sensation which accompanies darkness, And we know that cats are
• 40:35
  Speaker 3: proverbial ghost lovers, while dogs are the reverse. It may
• 40:41
  Speaker 3: be that there is more truth in this belief than
• 40:44
  Speaker 3: many realize. We know that the Orthodox devil was known
• 40:48
  Speaker 3: as the king of the powers of darkness, and all
• 40:51
  Speaker 3: evil things are associated with that state. On the other hand,
• 40:56
  Speaker 3: Jesus was said to be the light of the world,
• 40:59
  Speaker 3: and light always accompanied spiritual manifestations, as it does today.
• 41:05
  Speaker 3: The expression made use of by mister Hamlin Garland some
• 41:09
  Speaker 3: years ago in his book The Tyranny of the Dark,
• 41:12
  Speaker 3: may therefore have a certain foundation. There are perhaps principalities
• 41:17
  Speaker 3: and powers which can operate more freely and fully in
• 41:20
  Speaker 3: the dark than in the light, but only if they
• 41:23
  Speaker 3: are allowed to do so by the fear and the
• 41:25
  Speaker 3: attitude and mind of the person experiencing them. We remember
• 41:30
  Speaker 3: that in Pilgrim's Progress, the travelers were repeatedly warned that
• 41:35
  Speaker 3: no harm could come to them so long as they
• 41:37
  Speaker 3: faced their spiritual enemies. And we must remember the words
• 41:42
  Speaker 3: of the greatest of all psychics, Resist the devil, and
• 41:45
  Speaker 3: he will flee from thee. All we have to do, therefore,
• 41:50
  Speaker 3: in order to prevent the domination of any evil thought
• 41:53
  Speaker 3: or power, is to fight it, resist it, meet it
• 41:57
  Speaker 3: strongly and courageously, with calmness and decision, and it will
• 42:01
  Speaker 3: melt before your attack, like dew before the rays of
• 42:03
  Speaker 3: the morning sun. Evil emotions. Mister Horace Fletcher, in his
• 42:12
  Speaker 3: Little Book on Happiness, says some very good things regarding fear,
• 42:16
  Speaker 3: which he defines as an expression of fear thought. Fear thought,
• 42:21
  Speaker 3: according to this author, is the self imposed or self
• 42:25
  Speaker 3: permitted suggestion of inferiority. It is both a cause and
• 42:29
  Speaker 3: an effect of selfishness. It is the tap root of evil.
• 42:35
  Speaker 3: The body is a mirror in which all states of
• 42:37
  Speaker 3: the soul are reflected. Perhaps the most extensive of all
• 42:41
  Speaker 3: the morbid mental conditions which reflect themselves so disastrously on
• 42:46
  Speaker 3: the human system, is the state of fear. Doctor hack Took,
• 42:51
  Speaker 3: in his book The Influence of the Mind upon the Body,
• 42:55
  Speaker 3: cites a number of well authenticated instances of disease having
• 42:58
  Speaker 3: been produced by fear or fright, insanity, idiocy, paralysis of
• 43:04
  Speaker 3: various muscles and organs, profuse perspiration turning the hair gray
• 43:10
  Speaker 3: in a short time, baldness, nervous shock followed by fatal anemia,
• 43:15
  Speaker 3: malformation of the embryo and even skin and other diseases
• 43:20
  Speaker 3: apparently more removed than these from the effects of the mind,
• 43:24
  Speaker 3: were traced to the effects of fear and other mental disturbances.
• 43:29
  Speaker 3: He pointed out also that epidemics such as cholera, smallpox, diphtheria,
• 43:34
  Speaker 3: and other malignant diseases obtain a footing in a community
• 43:38
  Speaker 3: largely through the fear of the inhabitants, and that hundreds
• 43:42
  Speaker 3: and even thousands of persons fall victims to their own
• 43:45
  Speaker 3: mental conditions. How fear causes sickness? How does fear operate
• 43:53
  Speaker 3: upon the body to produce sickness, largely by paralyzing the
• 43:58
  Speaker 3: nerve centers, especially those of the vasomotor nerves, thus producing
• 44:02
  Speaker 3: not only muscular relaxation, but capillary congestions of all kinds.
• 44:08
  Speaker 3: It is an interesting fact that fear and all depressing
• 44:12
  Speaker 3: emotions of a similar nature served to constrict or contract
• 44:16
  Speaker 3: the body, while mirth, love, altruism, and all the higher
• 44:20
  Speaker 3: emotions served to produce both physical and mental relaxation, opening
• 44:26
  Speaker 3: up the mental and physiological doorways of the organism. The
• 44:31
  Speaker 3: term frightened to death is not a mere expression, but
• 44:34
  Speaker 3: is founded upon valid physiological and psychological laws. A Southern
• 44:41
  Speaker 3: physician has reported an interesting case. It was that of
• 44:44
  Speaker 3: a big, burly negro who supposed that he had been
• 44:47
  Speaker 3: fatally shot. Fear had seized him with tremendous power. He
• 44:52
  Speaker 3: shook like an aspen leaf. He bordered on the state
• 44:56
  Speaker 3: of collapse, and death seemed imminent. Not finding any blood,
• 45:01
  Speaker 3: the examining physician ordered all his clothes removed, and while
• 45:05
  Speaker 3: he was being undressed, a flattened bullet fell upon the floor.
• 45:10
  Speaker 3: The doctor exhibited the bullet to the frightened patient, explaining
• 45:13
  Speaker 3: that he had had a miraculous escape, whereupon his circulation
• 45:18
  Speaker 3: was immediately restored, his countenance improved, his temperature became normal,
• 45:23
  Speaker 3: and the look of life returned to his eyes, which
• 45:26
  Speaker 3: had been fixed with the gaze of death, while a
• 45:29
  Speaker 3: broad grin crept over his face. The negro got down
• 45:34
  Speaker 3: from the operating table and dressed, apologized for the fuss
• 45:38
  Speaker 3: he had caused, and walked home. Fear is contagious. Fear
• 45:44
  Speaker 3: has the peculiar power of being extremely contagious under the
• 45:49
  Speaker 3: proper conditions. Fear, manifested by one person, is instantly communicated
• 45:53
  Speaker 3: to the entire company. They feel little chills run up
• 45:57
  Speaker 3: and down their spines, their hair begins to stand on end,
• 46:01
  Speaker 3: and a cold perspiration breaks out here and there over
• 46:04
  Speaker 3: the body. This shows the profound effect which this emotion
• 46:08
  Speaker 3: has upon the bodily functions, and also how easily it
• 46:12
  Speaker 3: may be acquired without reason. Fear has the power of
• 46:17
  Speaker 3: almost stopping the heart and paralyzing the entire nervous system.
• 46:22
  Speaker 3: A peculiar fatigue is also caused by fear, as has
• 46:26
  Speaker 3: been proved by delicate experiments. A natural and normal way
• 46:30
  Speaker 3: to overcome fear under such conditions is to open the
• 46:34
  Speaker 3: mind to natural faiths and normal trust. Let the psychic
• 46:38
  Speaker 3: forces be allied with faith and health. Let fear be
• 46:42
  Speaker 3: finely and forever cast down and banished from the mental domain.
• 46:48
  Speaker 3: This may often be brought about by reasoning, though an
• 46:51
  Speaker 3: effort of will is generally necessary. Also, a determined opposition,
• 46:56
  Speaker 3: accompanied by trust, faith in wise protection, faith in your
• 47:00
  Speaker 3: own powers, and in the help of friendly spiritual monitors,
• 47:04
  Speaker 3: are of the greatest use and benefit in overcoming this
• 47:07
  Speaker 3: great monster fear, the fear of evil spirits. Many people
• 47:14
  Speaker 3: are afraid of evil spirits, being alarmed lest they should
• 47:17
  Speaker 3: influence them against their will and cause them to do
• 47:20
  Speaker 3: certain things which they would not normally care to do
• 47:23
  Speaker 3: even to the point of obsessing them. There is a
• 47:26
  Speaker 3: real danger here to a certain extent, which will be
• 47:29
  Speaker 3: dwelt upon and explained in the chapter on obsession. But
• 47:33
  Speaker 3: let it be pointed out that the only way to
• 47:35
  Speaker 3: prevent such things is to keep up a normal, healthful,
• 47:39
  Speaker 3: resistant attitude of mind, and not to give way to fear,
• 47:43
  Speaker 3: which would be doing the very thing to invite attack.
• 47:46
  Speaker 3: Let us recall once more the words of Job in
• 47:49
  Speaker 3: this connection. So long as the sea walls or dykes
• 47:53
  Speaker 3: of Holland are sound and unimpaired, the ocean is kept
• 47:57
  Speaker 3: within its proper limits and cannot break through and blood
• 48:00
  Speaker 3: the land, as it sometimes does when these walls are destroyed.
• 48:05
  Speaker 3: As we know, a tiny little hole through which the
• 48:08
  Speaker 3: merest trickle of water can pass will, unless repaired, soon
• 48:12
  Speaker 3: become a wide crevice, and then a roaring torrent. The
• 48:16
  Speaker 3: most important thing to do is to check this in
• 48:19
  Speaker 3: its inception, for it is easy to prevent the ingress
• 48:22
  Speaker 3: of the water if taken in time. Better still, it
• 48:25
  Speaker 3: would be far easier to keep the sea walls in
• 48:28
  Speaker 3: such repair that accidents of this kind would be impossible,
• 48:32
  Speaker 3: For prevention is better than cure. Applying this to the
• 48:37
  Speaker 3: case before us. We can see that the very first
• 48:40
  Speaker 3: symptoms of fear must be checked as soon as they arise,
• 48:44
  Speaker 3: for if they are allowed to continue, they will spread
• 48:47
  Speaker 3: and work havoc in the mind, just as the waters
• 48:50
  Speaker 3: would work havoc upon the land. The thing to do
• 48:54
  Speaker 3: is to keep the mind so guarded, strengthened, and repaired
• 48:57
  Speaker 3: by healthful exercise, intelligence, cultivation, and control in the exercise
• 49:02
  Speaker 3: of the will, that fear can never batter down its ramparts,
• 49:07
  Speaker 3: and even should it attack the citadel of the mind,
• 49:10
  Speaker 3: it would be quite unable to find a lodgment within
• 49:12
  Speaker 3: this impregnable fortress. The fear of being hypnotized what has
• 49:19
  Speaker 3: been said, applies also to the action of hypnotic influences,
• 49:24
  Speaker 3: which many persons fear greatly. They are afraid of being
• 49:28
  Speaker 3: hypnotized by some distant operator, and this fear sometimes becomes
• 49:32
  Speaker 3: with them a veritable phobia, so that we occasionally find
• 49:37
  Speaker 3: insane asylum patients who have become completely unhinged on account
• 49:41
  Speaker 3: of this fear. We can see from this how useless,
• 49:45
  Speaker 3: how exceedingly harmful fear of this character is, and it
• 49:49
  Speaker 3: is more than useless, it is ridiculous. No one can
• 49:53
  Speaker 3: be hypnotized against his own will by a distant operator
• 49:57
  Speaker 3: in this way, as many suppose if they feel influences
• 50:03
  Speaker 3: of this character, these feelings are the result of their
• 50:05
  Speaker 3: own disordered imagination and are not due to any outside influence. Whatever.
• 50:11
  Speaker 3: An individual really hypnotizes himself the operator directing his own
• 50:16
  Speaker 3: mental powers into certain channels so that this is brought about.
• 50:21
  Speaker 3: If he resists the suggestion, as everyone can do, at first,
• 50:25
  Speaker 3: it is impossible for anyone to hypnotize him. Why such
• 50:31
  Speaker 3: fears are groundless. The only way in which a person
• 50:35
  Speaker 3: can be hypnotized from a distance is the following. If
• 50:39
  Speaker 3: an operator has hypnotized his subject a great many times
• 50:42
  Speaker 3: and repeatedly suggested to him when in the hypnotic trance,
• 50:46
  Speaker 3: that he is becoming more suggestible, that he can easily
• 50:50
  Speaker 3: go off to sleep, that he has only to think
• 50:52
  Speaker 3: of the operator in order to fall asleep, et cetera,
• 50:56
  Speaker 3: he may succeed in making the subject so sensitive after
• 50:59
  Speaker 3: a certain length of time that this condition is really
• 51:03
  Speaker 3: brought about. The subject tends to fall into trance on
• 51:07
  Speaker 3: the slightest provocation. But such cases are abnormal and are
• 51:12
  Speaker 3: rarely met with. And as I have just said, this
• 51:15
  Speaker 3: condition cannot be brought about until the subject has been
• 51:18
  Speaker 3: hypnotized several times in these suggestions given to him. These
• 51:23
  Speaker 3: are well known facts which any experienced hypnotist will sustain.
• 51:29
  Speaker 3: This being so, it may readily be seen how absurd
• 51:32
  Speaker 3: it is to fear telepathic suggestion from a distant operator
• 51:37
  Speaker 3: whom perhaps you have never seen. It is entirely illusory,
• 51:41
  Speaker 3: and you need, in reality, have no fear whatever in
• 51:44
  Speaker 3: this connection. The will, if exercised, is supreme. End of Chapter.
• 51:51
  Speaker 2: Three, Chapter four the Subconscious. In this chapter I shall
• 51:58
  Speaker 2: take up and try to make plain to the student
• 52:00
  Speaker 2: the nature and functions of the subconscious mind. This is
• 52:04
  Speaker 2: the greatest of all stumbling blocks to many spiritualists. Its
• 52:08
  Speaker 2: possibilities and at the same time its limitations should be
• 52:12
  Speaker 2: made clear to the student at the beginning of his studies.
• 52:15
  Speaker 2: Otherwise he is sure to get in trouble later on,
• 52:18
  Speaker 2: not only with himself and with the phenomena he is studying,
• 52:22
  Speaker 2: but with all persons who discuss these subjects with him
• 52:25
  Speaker 2: and try to persuade him that the whole of spiritualism
• 52:27
  Speaker 2: may be accounted for by the powers of a subconscious
• 52:32
  Speaker 2: What is the subconscious mind. First of all, what is
• 52:36
  Speaker 2: the subconscious mind? We do not know exactly, but a
• 52:39
  Speaker 2: great deal has been found out concerning it within the
• 52:42
  Speaker 2: past quarter of a century. Twenty years ago, when Thompson J.
• 52:46
  Speaker 2: Hudson wrote his famous work The Law of Psychic Phenomena,
• 52:50
  Speaker 2: very little was known of the subconscious Nearly everything which
• 52:53
  Speaker 2: has been discovered about it has been learned since he wrote.
• 52:57
  Speaker 2: His attitude is doubtless well known to the majority of
• 52:59
  Speaker 2: my reads. It is that man has two minds, the
• 53:03
  Speaker 2: conscious and the subconscious, or, as he preferred to express it,
• 53:07
  Speaker 2: the objective and the subjective minds. The first of these
• 53:11
  Speaker 2: is the conscious mind, the everyday reasoning mind. The second
• 53:15
  Speaker 2: is that vast realm in which occur the phenomena of dreams, hypnotism, insanity, hysteria, clairvoyance, telepathy,
• 53:23
  Speaker 2: and all kindred psychic phenomena. He placed the objective mind
• 53:28
  Speaker 2: in the cerebrum or fore part of the brain, and
• 53:31
  Speaker 2: the subjective mind in the cerebellum or hinder part of
• 53:34
  Speaker 2: the brain. Two minds or one. But this dual conception
• 53:40
  Speaker 2: of the mind is today given up by practically all psychologists.
• 53:43
  Speaker 2: They admit that the mind is in a certain sense dual.
• 53:47
  Speaker 2: But it is believed that both minds are, in reality one,
• 53:50
  Speaker 2: a part of which is conscious, and of the greater
• 53:53
  Speaker 2: part of which we know nothing. The analogy of the
• 53:56
  Speaker 2: iceberg has often been used. A small percentage of this
• 54:00
  Speaker 2: mergers above the water, and this we see and know.
• 54:03
  Speaker 2: But the greater part of the mountain of ice is
• 54:05
  Speaker 2: below the surface, and this we do not know through
• 54:08
  Speaker 2: our senses. Yet it is all one iceberg. In the
• 54:11
  Speaker 2: same way, there is only one mind. But when the
• 54:14
  Speaker 2: searchlight of consciousness is turned upon certain areas, those areas
• 54:18
  Speaker 2: become illuminated, and we know or are conscious of those parts.
• 54:23
  Speaker 2: All else remains in the dim obscurity beyond, in the
• 54:26
  Speaker 2: great storehouse of the subconscious mind. The powers of the subconscious.
• 54:33
  Speaker 2: It may easily be proved that the subconscious mind acquires
• 54:36
  Speaker 2: far more information, even through the senses, than does the
• 54:39
  Speaker 2: conscious mind. The following simple experiment will prove this. Lead
• 54:43
  Speaker 2: a person into a strange room and ask him to
• 54:46
  Speaker 2: observe as many things in it as he possibly can.
• 54:49
  Speaker 2: Suppose he remains five seconds in that room, He is
• 54:52
  Speaker 2: then quickly removed and the door shut. If now he
• 54:56
  Speaker 2: is asked to tell you all the things that he
• 54:57
  Speaker 2: remembers having seen, he will probably be enabled to remember
• 55:01
  Speaker 2: ten or fifteen of them. But if you were to
• 55:03
  Speaker 2: hypnotize that person, he would then describe to you, under
• 55:07
  Speaker 2: hypnotic influence, forty or fifty things which were in the room.
• 55:11
  Speaker 2: This shows us that the subconscious mind, which we reached
• 55:14
  Speaker 2: through hypnotism, has been able to perceive or take in
• 55:18
  Speaker 2: many more things than the conscious mind. This happens to
• 55:21
  Speaker 2: us every day dreams. It is the same with dreams.
• 55:27
  Speaker 2: If when out walking we should happen to drop a brooch,
• 55:31
  Speaker 2: pin or a piece of money, we might be totally
• 55:33
  Speaker 2: unconscious of the fact, but the subconscious mind would perceive
• 55:37
  Speaker 2: and record it. That night, in sleep, we might have
• 55:40
  Speaker 2: a dream in which a figure appeared to us and
• 55:42
  Speaker 2: told us that the article had been lost, and that
• 55:44
  Speaker 2: it would be found in such and such a place.
• 55:46
  Speaker 2: On looking the next morning, sure enough, there it was.
• 55:50
  Speaker 2: Here we see that the subconscious has perceived a certain
• 55:53
  Speaker 2: fact which the conscious mind did not notice.
• 55:56
  Speaker 4: For long.
• 55:56
  Speaker 2: It was thought that this power signifies some supernormal faculty
• 56:00
  Speaker 2: of the subconscious mind, but in most cases it is
• 56:03
  Speaker 2: not necessary to suppose this. For as the last experiment
• 56:07
  Speaker 2: showed us, The subconscious mind takes in many things which
• 56:10
  Speaker 2: the conscious mind does not, and only the most striking
• 56:13
  Speaker 2: and interesting facts rise into consciousness. Of the thousands of
• 56:18
  Speaker 2: events going on all around us every day, we perceive
• 56:21
  Speaker 2: but a few. All the rest are ignored, though they
• 56:24
  Speaker 2: are lodged within the great mental storehouse within us, the
• 56:29
  Speaker 2: memory of the subconscious. The powers of the subconscious mind
• 56:34
  Speaker 2: are indeed great. It forgets nothing, and facts which have
• 56:38
  Speaker 2: entirely slipped from the conscious mind are retained within it,
• 56:42
  Speaker 2: and may be recalled years later, or may suddenly flash
• 56:45
  Speaker 2: into the memory of their own accord. They may come
• 56:48
  Speaker 2: into the mind in the form of some simple thought
• 56:50
  Speaker 2: or memory, just as any other thought or memory would,
• 56:54
  Speaker 2: or they may come to us in more startling form.
• 56:57
  Speaker 2: They may be, as we say, externalized, that is, projected
• 57:01
  Speaker 2: upward from the subconscious into the conscious mind, forcibly and dramatically,
• 57:05
  Speaker 2: as a bombshell might be exploded within it. In these cases,
• 57:10
  Speaker 2: the thought may strike us as coming wholly from without,
• 57:12
  Speaker 2: and not from within ourselves at all. One or two
• 57:15
  Speaker 2: examples will make this clear. You have mislaid a book
• 57:19
  Speaker 2: you cannot remember where it is. The natural process would
• 57:22
  Speaker 2: be to recollect in the case of an individual who
• 57:25
  Speaker 2: is psychic or mediumistic, the externalization may take more startling form.
• 57:31
  Speaker 2: He may hear a voice telling him to look under
• 57:33
  Speaker 2: certain papers upon the library table, and sure enough, upon
• 57:36
  Speaker 2: looking there, the book is found. Or he may have
• 57:39
  Speaker 2: a mental picture of himself leaving the book in that place,
• 57:42
  Speaker 2: or he may feel a hand gently pushing him in
• 57:45
  Speaker 2: the direction of the table, or he may see a
• 57:47
  Speaker 2: figure standing before him and pointing to the hidden book.
• 57:51
  Speaker 2: In all these cases, it is improbable that the voice,
• 57:53
  Speaker 2: the touch, and the figure were real, that is, that
• 57:56
  Speaker 2: they came from some spirit friend. They may have done so,
• 58:00
  Speaker 2: But it is true that in many cases at least,
• 58:03
  Speaker 2: they are methods by which the subconscious mind externalizes or
• 58:06
  Speaker 2: reproduces its hidden memories in dramatic form, just as they
• 58:10
  Speaker 2: are reproduced in dreams or in visions of the crystal ball.
• 58:14
  Speaker 2: The psychic diaphragm. The subconscious mind therefore may be looked
• 58:20
  Speaker 2: upon as composed of a number of strata like a
• 58:22
  Speaker 2: layer cake, which are normally more or less separated from
• 58:26
  Speaker 2: one another by a sort of psychic membrane or diaphragm,
• 58:29
  Speaker 2: which is impervious at times. This psychic diaphragm becomes thinned.
• 58:34
  Speaker 2: In that case, we remember our dreams of the previous night,
• 58:38
  Speaker 2: or we have wonderful constructions of genius, the productions of
• 58:41
  Speaker 2: musical prodigies, et cetera. The subconscious mind works out the problems,
• 58:46
  Speaker 2: and the finished product is projected into the conscious mind
• 58:49
  Speaker 2: in its completed form. That is why it appears to
• 58:52
  Speaker 2: us so marvelous. On the other hand, if a part
• 58:56
  Speaker 2: of the subconscious mind is diseased, as may sometimes happen,
• 58:59
  Speaker 2: then we have of hysteria, obsession, and insanity. It will
• 59:03
  Speaker 2: be seen therefore, that both good and evil may result
• 59:06
  Speaker 2: from this thinning or puncturing of the psychic diaphragm separating
• 59:10
  Speaker 2: the conscious from the subconscious mind. If the mind be
• 59:14
  Speaker 2: healthy and is kept so, only good will result. Psychic
• 59:18
  Speaker 2: powers will be cultivated, and helpful advice will be given
• 59:21
  Speaker 2: to the subject thenceforward. If, on the other hand, the
• 59:24
  Speaker 2: mind becomes in any way deranged or diseased, then harm
• 59:28
  Speaker 2: may result, and the individual may be sorry that he
• 59:31
  Speaker 2: has ruptured this dividing diaphragm instead of preserving it intact.
• 59:35
  Speaker 2: It is all a question of care, good health, good judgment,
• 59:39
  Speaker 2: and a healthy psychic mental and physical life. Once this
• 59:43
  Speaker 2: psychic membrane has been so to say, punctured, it is
• 59:46
  Speaker 2: very difficult to heal it up again, and great care
• 59:49
  Speaker 2: must be exercised in developing the subconscious phenomena. We shall
• 59:53
  Speaker 2: discuss this more fully, however, in the chapter devoted to obsession.
• 59:58
  Speaker 2: The subconscious mind should be may our friend and not
• 1:00:01
  Speaker 2: our enemy. We should train it carefully, for though it
• 1:00:04
  Speaker 2: is a good servant, it is a bad master. It
• 1:00:07
  Speaker 2: should always be kept in check and dominated and controlled
• 1:00:10
  Speaker 2: by the conscious mind. When this is the case, all
• 1:00:13
  Speaker 2: goes well. How the subconscious reckons time. The subconscious has,
• 1:00:20
  Speaker 2: among other faculties, the power of reckoning time in a
• 1:00:23
  Speaker 2: most remarkable manner. Many of my readers have doubtless conducted
• 1:00:27
  Speaker 2: the following experiment for themselves. On going to bed, you
• 1:00:31
  Speaker 2: have said to yourself, now, I wish to wake tomorrow
• 1:00:33
  Speaker 2: morning at seven o'clock promptly, because I have such and
• 1:00:36
  Speaker 2: such a train to catch. There is no alarm clock
• 1:00:39
  Speaker 2: in the house, but promptly at seven you awake. That
• 1:00:43
  Speaker 2: this is no mere chance coincidence has been proven by
• 1:00:46
  Speaker 2: a number of cases which have been collected, and the
• 1:00:48
  Speaker 2: fact has also been proven experimentally on hypnotic subjects. Thus
• 1:00:53
  Speaker 2: they have been told that, in say, nine thousand, seven
• 1:00:56
  Speaker 2: hundred fifty seconds, they would perform a certain action. Then
• 1:01:00
  Speaker 2: they were immediately awakened. As soon as awake they knew
• 1:01:04
  Speaker 2: nothing of the suggestion which had been given to them,
• 1:01:06
  Speaker 2: and nothing of the action they were to perform. And
• 1:01:09
  Speaker 2: yet precisely in nine thousand, seven hundred fifty seconds they
• 1:01:12
  Speaker 2: performed the action in question. We see, therefore, that the
• 1:01:16
  Speaker 2: subconscious mind has the faculty of reckoning time in a
• 1:01:20
  Speaker 2: very remarkable manner, and this is but one of its
• 1:01:22
  Speaker 2: mysterious powers. The subconscious rules the body. Another of its
• 1:01:29
  Speaker 2: remarkable manifestations is the power which it possesses over the
• 1:01:33
  Speaker 2: bodily organization. By means of suggestion, the pulse has been
• 1:01:37
  Speaker 2: raised or slowed, the temperature has been elevated or lowered,
• 1:01:41
  Speaker 2: the various secretions of the body have been altered, and
• 1:01:44
  Speaker 2: many similar phenomena which are well known to any one
• 1:01:47
  Speaker 2: who has read upon this subject. One of the most
• 1:01:50
  Speaker 2: striking cases, doubtless, is that of Mademoiselle Ilma X. A
• 1:01:55
  Speaker 2: pair of cold scissors was applied to her chest, and
• 1:01:58
  Speaker 2: it was suggested that these were red hot, and that
• 1:02:01
  Speaker 2: they were burning the flesh. In a few moments, an
• 1:02:04
  Speaker 2: angry red mark appeared corresponding to the shape of the scissors,
• 1:02:07
  Speaker 2: and the next day a genuine blister had been created,
• 1:02:10
  Speaker 2: which took several days to heal. Here we see the
• 1:02:13
  Speaker 2: power of a subconscious mind in affecting the body and
• 1:02:16
  Speaker 2: even the local tissues to a remarkable extent. If this
• 1:02:20
  Speaker 2: is true, and the body can be harmed in this way,
• 1:02:23
  Speaker 2: it can doubtless also be cured. We here enter the
• 1:02:26
  Speaker 2: field of suggestion and psychotherapy, which will be treated more
• 1:02:30
  Speaker 2: fully in chapter thirty How to give your own subconscious
• 1:02:35
  Speaker 2: mind suggestions. One of the best methods of treating yourself
• 1:02:39
  Speaker 2: is by suggesting certain desirable things just as you are
• 1:02:42
  Speaker 2: falling off to sleep. Thus, if anything is wrong with
• 1:02:46
  Speaker 2: you physically, mentally, or spiritually, suggest to yourself the last
• 1:02:51
  Speaker 2: thing at night, as you are falling to sleep, that
• 1:02:53
  Speaker 2: all will be well, that the trouble will be removed
• 1:02:56
  Speaker 2: during the night, that you will wake up refreshed and invigorated,
• 1:02:59
  Speaker 2: that there be no pain, no unpleasant feelings or emotions
• 1:03:02
  Speaker 2: in the morning, et cetera. Suggest in fact, whatever you
• 1:03:06
  Speaker 2: desire to have accomplished, and you will find that during
• 1:03:09
  Speaker 2: the night this will have been effected, and that your
• 1:03:11
  Speaker 2: bodily or mental ills will have disappeared as the result
• 1:03:14
  Speaker 2: of your auto suggestion during the hours of sleep. Here
• 1:03:18
  Speaker 2: again we shall be enabled to see the remarkable powers
• 1:03:21
  Speaker 2: of the subconscious mind brought into play and clearly demonstrated
• 1:03:26
  Speaker 2: spirit messages and the subconscious Now, these faculties of the
• 1:03:30
  Speaker 2: subconscious mind explain a certain number of spirit messages which
• 1:03:34
  Speaker 2: are received at seances. Let me illustrate this in the
• 1:03:38
  Speaker 2: following manner. Just before leaving your home to join a circle,
• 1:03:42
  Speaker 2: you glance at the evening paper. Your attention has been
• 1:03:45
  Speaker 2: attracted to the leading articles. Apparently you have seen nothing
• 1:03:48
  Speaker 2: else At the seance that evening, the name of a
• 1:03:51
  Speaker 2: friend of yours is spelled out, and the announcement that
• 1:03:54
  Speaker 2: this friend has been killed that day by falling from
• 1:03:56
  Speaker 2: the fourth story of his residence. At first sight, this
• 1:04:00
  Speaker 2: seems a very good test message. But on going home
• 1:04:03
  Speaker 2: and again looking at your evening paper, you find a
• 1:04:05
  Speaker 2: small article tucked away in the corner of the paper
• 1:04:08
  Speaker 2: stating these facts. Therefore, probably what happened was this Your
• 1:04:12
  Speaker 2: subconscious mind perceived and took in these facts without their
• 1:04:16
  Speaker 2: even rising to consciousness, and at the seance they were
• 1:04:20
  Speaker 2: given out either by yourself or by the medium who
• 1:04:22
  Speaker 2: obtained them from your mind by telepathy. In this way,
• 1:04:26
  Speaker 2: many messages have been explained and shown to be due
• 1:04:29
  Speaker 2: to the workings of the subconscious mind, and not to
• 1:04:32
  Speaker 2: spirits at all. We must therefore always be on our
• 1:04:35
  Speaker 2: guard against these possibilities. The structure of the mind. The
• 1:04:42
  Speaker 2: older conception of the human mind was that it was
• 1:04:44
  Speaker 2: a single entity, an individual thing, a sort of sphere
• 1:04:48
  Speaker 2: incapable of division. This was, in fact one of Plato's
• 1:04:52
  Speaker 2: main arguments for the immortality of the soul. Unfortunately, modern
• 1:04:56
  Speaker 2: science has destroyed this illusion. We now know that the
• 1:04:59
  Speaker 2: human mind is a composite and not a simple thing.
• 1:05:02
  Speaker 2: To use a rough analogy, it has been proved that
• 1:05:05
  Speaker 2: the mind is somewhat like a rope composed of a
• 1:05:08
  Speaker 2: number of strands twisted together. Under normal, healthy conditions, this
• 1:05:12
  Speaker 2: rope remains one the strands are united, but under certain
• 1:05:16
  Speaker 2: abnormal states or conditions, these strands may be divided up
• 1:05:20
  Speaker 2: into several groups, and they would all pull in different directions.
• 1:05:24
  Speaker 2: What holds these strands together normally first good health, then cheerfulness, attention, concentration,
• 1:05:31
  Speaker 2: will and an interest in objective things. What favors this
• 1:05:35
  Speaker 2: disintegration process, this dissociation of the mind, as it is
• 1:05:39
  Speaker 2: called the exact opposite of all this a run down
• 1:05:42
  Speaker 2: or fatigued condition introspection and particularly all continued subjective practices
• 1:05:48
  Speaker 2: and the two passive attitude of the mind. If we
• 1:05:51
  Speaker 2: lose contact with an interest in the objective world, if
• 1:05:55
  Speaker 2: we go inside our hands and spin romances in dream
• 1:05:58
  Speaker 2: daydreams to too great an extent, if we gaze blankly
• 1:06:01
  Speaker 2: into space, thinking of nothing. In particular, if we allow
• 1:06:05
  Speaker 2: the mind to become too passive and do not exercise
• 1:06:07
  Speaker 2: our intellect in a normal, healthy manner, this disintegration is
• 1:06:11
  Speaker 2: likely to take place. The strands of the rope become separated,
• 1:06:15
  Speaker 2: and then the mind may go to pieces and spirit
• 1:06:18
  Speaker 2: obsession and even insanity may result. How to heal a
• 1:06:23
  Speaker 2: sick mind? Of course, this is only a crude analogy.
• 1:06:27
  Speaker 2: The mind is not like a rope and cannot be
• 1:06:30
  Speaker 2: divided into strands in the same way, But it is
• 1:06:32
  Speaker 2: an analogy which will help us. The only way to
• 1:06:35
  Speaker 2: heal and restore a mind in this condition is to
• 1:06:38
  Speaker 2: weave or well together these separate strands and bind them
• 1:06:41
  Speaker 2: up again into one solid, single rope, as it were.
• 1:06:45
  Speaker 2: This may often be done by hypnotism, but great care
• 1:06:48
  Speaker 2: must be exercised in doing this, for if it is
• 1:06:51
  Speaker 2: not rightly applied by an expert operator, the mind may
• 1:06:54
  Speaker 2: become still more disintegrated, and the last state of that
• 1:06:58
  Speaker 2: man shall be worse than the firm. Now, these separate
• 1:07:02
  Speaker 2: strands of the mind, to return to our analogy of
• 1:07:05
  Speaker 2: the rope, may form different selves. Each self may possess
• 1:07:10
  Speaker 2: a certain identity and individuality of its own, and they
• 1:07:13
  Speaker 2: may all pull in different directions. That is, they may
• 1:07:16
  Speaker 2: all exercise their own functions and powers, and think their
• 1:07:19
  Speaker 2: own thoughts. There is no one self anymore, It has
• 1:07:23
  Speaker 2: gune to pieces. These various selves may alternate one with
• 1:07:27
  Speaker 2: another in the same individual, and then we have those
• 1:07:30
  Speaker 2: interesting cases known to us as alternating personality. If there
• 1:07:34
  Speaker 2: are two of these, we have double personality. If there
• 1:07:37
  Speaker 2: are three or more of these personalities, we have a
• 1:07:40
  Speaker 2: case of multiple personality. There are sometimes six or seven
• 1:07:44
  Speaker 2: of these, and in one case it was reported that
• 1:07:47
  Speaker 2: there were ten, all in the same individual, all alternating
• 1:07:51
  Speaker 2: with one another, all having their own prejudices, likes, dislikes, interests,
• 1:07:55
  Speaker 2: points of view, and knowledge of persons and things. Many
• 1:07:59
  Speaker 2: such cases have been cured by welding together several of
• 1:08:02
  Speaker 2: these selves by hypnotic suggestion, when the original man was restored.
• 1:08:08
  Speaker 2: The differences between spirits and subconscious selves. Now, if this
• 1:08:13
  Speaker 2: be true, and it has been proved to be true
• 1:08:16
  Speaker 2: by many well authenticated cases, how distinguished these selves from
• 1:08:20
  Speaker 2: true spirits? This is a very complex question which cannot
• 1:08:23
  Speaker 2: be fully answered in this place, because we must understand,
• 1:08:26
  Speaker 2: first of all more of the nature of the subconscious
• 1:08:29
  Speaker 2: mind and its powers. But one simple test can be applied,
• 1:08:33
  Speaker 2: which is this, All these personalities or parts of selves
• 1:08:37
  Speaker 2: derive their knowledge of men and things through the same source, namely,
• 1:08:41
  Speaker 2: the five senses. None of them can possibly know any
• 1:08:45
  Speaker 2: fact which was not supplied to them through sight, hearing, touch,
• 1:08:48
  Speaker 2: et cetera. So that if any of them manifest supernormal knowledge,
• 1:08:52
  Speaker 2: this proves to us at once either that some external
• 1:08:55
  Speaker 2: intelligence is present, or that this personality, whatever it may be,
• 1:09:00
  Speaker 2: has acquired this knowledge in some occult manner by telepathy, clairvoyance,
• 1:09:04
  Speaker 2: et cetera. Which of these two interpretations is the correct one?
• 1:09:07
  Speaker 2: I shall endeavor to answer in another place personalities created
• 1:09:12
  Speaker 2: by hypnotism. It may seem incomprehensible to many how the
• 1:09:17
  Speaker 2: human mind can become split up or dissociated in this manner.
• 1:09:21
  Speaker 2: They think that this is rather a far fetched theory
• 1:09:24
  Speaker 2: and prefer to believe the simple theory of spiritism as
• 1:09:27
  Speaker 2: applied even to the most simple facts. This might be admissible,
• 1:09:31
  Speaker 2: but for the following consideration. We can trace a gradual
• 1:09:34
  Speaker 2: series of intermediate steps all the way from normal states
• 1:09:37
  Speaker 2: of mind to these dissociations in daydreaming and absent mindedness.
• 1:09:42
  Speaker 2: We see the first of these steps when we hypnotize
• 1:09:45
  Speaker 2: a subject and suggest to him that he is Napoleon
• 1:09:48
  Speaker 2: Bonaparte or Julius Caesar, and he enacts the part with
• 1:09:51
  Speaker 2: due gravity. We can hardly suppose that Napoleon Bonaparte or
• 1:09:54
  Speaker 2: Julius Caesar really returned to manifest through him, and should
• 1:09:59
  Speaker 2: any be inclined to accept this view, it may be
• 1:10:01
  Speaker 2: said that the hypnotic subject will just as easily carry
• 1:10:04
  Speaker 2: out the suggestion that he is a lion or a
• 1:10:06
  Speaker 2: bear or a bird flying in the air. And no one,
• 1:10:10
  Speaker 2: we imagine, would contend that a lion or a bear
• 1:10:12
  Speaker 2: or a bird really manifested at such times. So therefore
• 1:10:16
  Speaker 2: we see that one part of the mind may enact
• 1:10:18
  Speaker 2: a little comedy by itself without the knowledge of another part.
• 1:10:22
  Speaker 2: And from this simple fact to the most striking phenomena
• 1:10:25
  Speaker 2: of the subconscious we can trace a definite chain of
• 1:10:28
  Speaker 2: connection the picture forming faculty of the mind. One of
• 1:10:34
  Speaker 2: the most striking powers which the subconscious mind possesses is
• 1:10:38
  Speaker 2: its ability to reconstruct mental pictures or photographs of distant
• 1:10:42
  Speaker 2: or imaginary persons. Your mind contains a whole picture gallery
• 1:10:46
  Speaker 2: of all your friends, which you see as it were
• 1:10:48
  Speaker 2: in your mind's eye. This is limited not only to
• 1:10:52
  Speaker 2: your friends and relatives, but to heroes of books you
• 1:10:55
  Speaker 2: have read, and even to imaginary personages. These pictures are
• 1:10:58
  Speaker 2: not set and in but live and move, and we
• 1:11:02
  Speaker 2: place the characters in various situations and cause them to move,
• 1:11:06
  Speaker 2: act and talk as human beings would do. Thus, suppose
• 1:11:09
  Speaker 2: your friend A or David Harrem, or some imaginary personage
• 1:11:13
  Speaker 2: were thought by you to be on a journey, you
• 1:11:15
  Speaker 2: would imagine them to be in various situations, and would
• 1:11:19
  Speaker 2: picture to yourself precisely how they would act in each situation,
• 1:11:22
  Speaker 2: and would put into their mouths arguments and conversations which
• 1:11:25
  Speaker 2: they would carry on with those about them. This faculty
• 1:11:29
  Speaker 2: which the mind possesses is a very peculiar one, and
• 1:11:32
  Speaker 2: its functions are technically known as spiritoid functions. They have
• 1:11:36
  Speaker 2: a great bearing upon spiritism. How dream personalities talk. These
• 1:11:43
  Speaker 2: phenomena show us how easy it is for the subconscious
• 1:11:46
  Speaker 2: to imagine that various personages are present, carrying on a
• 1:11:50
  Speaker 2: conversation with us, etc. Whereas as a matter of fact,
• 1:11:54
  Speaker 2: they are not present at all, but were invented by us.
• 1:11:57
  Speaker 2: If therefore, at a seance, some existed personage appears and
• 1:12:01
  Speaker 2: claims to communicate, we must always assure ourselves, first of all,
• 1:12:05
  Speaker 2: that this personage is not one of these semi conscious
• 1:12:08
  Speaker 2: or subconscious creations, and must make him give proof of
• 1:12:11
  Speaker 2: his own identity. This faculty of the mind is again
• 1:12:15
  Speaker 2: seen in dreams. In dreams we create situations in a
• 1:12:18
  Speaker 2: similar manner and imagine that other personages are present talking
• 1:12:22
  Speaker 2: to us. We have long debates and arguments with such personages,
• 1:12:26
  Speaker 2: and sometimes they beat us out. So you see how
• 1:12:28
  Speaker 2: important it is to be sure that the intelligences which
• 1:12:31
  Speaker 2: communicate at seances are not creations, but are really individualities,
• 1:12:35
  Speaker 2: as they claim to be how to distinguish true from false?
• 1:12:41
  Speaker 2: How are we to prove this and make this distinction?
• 1:12:43
  Speaker 2: You may say, the following is the first method. All
• 1:12:47
  Speaker 2: our knowledge, whether it is conscious or subconscious, is supposed
• 1:12:51
  Speaker 2: to be obtained through the five senses. The subconscious is
• 1:12:55
  Speaker 2: built upon the facts obtained by means of hearing, sight, touch,
• 1:12:58
  Speaker 2: et cetera. If the communicating intelligence tells us many facts
• 1:13:03
  Speaker 2: as proof of its identity which the mind of the
• 1:13:05
  Speaker 2: medium never knew, we have fairly good proof of identity,
• 1:13:10
  Speaker 2: or at least that the knowledge given was obtained by
• 1:13:12
  Speaker 2: some supernormal means. But decisive proof is not yet obtained.
• 1:13:17
  Speaker 2: We know that there are other methods of obtaining supernormal information,
• 1:13:21
  Speaker 2: for instance, telepathy, clairvoyance, et cetera. Adding these powers to
• 1:13:26
  Speaker 2: the subconscious faculties of the medium, we have often a
• 1:13:29
  Speaker 2: difficult task to prove that the intelligence which communicates with
• 1:13:32
  Speaker 2: us is really the personage it claims to be. Repeated
• 1:13:36
  Speaker 2: questions must be asked. Absolute proof of identity must be
• 1:13:39
  Speaker 2: insisted upon, and in this way only can we be
• 1:13:42
  Speaker 2: sure that we have passed beyond the limitations of a
• 1:13:45
  Speaker 2: subconscious mind of the medium, and that we are really
• 1:13:48
  Speaker 2: obtaining messages direct from the spirit world. Why and how
• 1:13:53
  Speaker 2: spirits prove their identity? This proof of identity is really
• 1:13:58
  Speaker 2: the great problem, and the first point to solve. Let
• 1:14:01
  Speaker 2: me make this plane. Suppose that a cousin of yours
• 1:14:04
  Speaker 2: had disappeared twelve years ago. One day, you receive a
• 1:14:07
  Speaker 2: call over the telephone, and a voice says to you,
• 1:14:10
  Speaker 2: I am your cousin so and so. I demand my
• 1:14:12
  Speaker 2: share of your uncle's will. Naturally, you will reply, how
• 1:14:16
  Speaker 2: do I know that you are so and so? In
• 1:14:19
  Speaker 2: daily life? It would be an easy matter to prove this.
• 1:14:22
  Speaker 2: He could appear before you in his physical body, and
• 1:14:24
  Speaker 2: you could identify him more or less easily in most cases.
• 1:14:27
  Speaker 2: But suppose he were so pleased that he could never
• 1:14:30
  Speaker 2: see you personally. In such a case, how could he
• 1:14:33
  Speaker 2: prove to you that he really was the person in question.
• 1:14:36
  Speaker 2: He would have to relate to you a number of
• 1:14:38
  Speaker 2: personal and detailed incidents in his past life which he
• 1:14:41
  Speaker 2: would be the only likely person to know, or relate
• 1:14:44
  Speaker 2: facts which only he and you knew, or tell you
• 1:14:47
  Speaker 2: things which you did not know but which you afterwards
• 1:14:50
  Speaker 2: found out to be correct. If you receive a number
• 1:14:52
  Speaker 2: of these replies, you would be right in concluding that
• 1:14:55
  Speaker 2: he really was the person at the other end of
• 1:14:57
  Speaker 2: the line. And this is the way in which spirits
• 1:15:00
  Speaker 2: prove to us their identity. Until they do so, we
• 1:15:04
  Speaker 2: can never be sure that the teachings they give are correct.
• 1:15:07
  Speaker 2: If they succeed in proving their identity, we may then
• 1:15:10
  Speaker 2: accept their word as to the conditions of the next
• 1:15:12
  Speaker 2: life and other matters, since they were always truthful people
• 1:15:16
  Speaker 2: in this life, and we have no reason to suppose
• 1:15:18
  Speaker 2: that they are other than truthful. Now, how we obtain
• 1:15:22
  Speaker 2: spirit messages through the subconscious? The subconscious is the channel
• 1:15:27
  Speaker 2: through which we obtain spirit messages in nearly all cases.
• 1:15:31
  Speaker 2: That is, they come through or by means of the
• 1:15:34
  Speaker 2: subconscious mind, and it therefore assists the spirits to communicate.
• 1:15:39
  Speaker 2: The spirit can manipulate or act upon the subconscious, while
• 1:15:42
  Speaker 2: it cannot readily affect the conscious mind. This we can
• 1:15:46
  Speaker 2: see ourselves in the following way. Many of us have
• 1:15:49
  Speaker 2: noticed that, just as we are dropping off to sleep,
• 1:15:51
  Speaker 2: a forgotten memory has flashed into our mind. It could
• 1:15:54
  Speaker 2: not find its way to our conscious attention while the
• 1:15:56
  Speaker 2: latter was busy with the day's activities, But as soon
• 1:15:59
  Speaker 2: as the conscious mind became passive, then the subconscious have
• 1:16:03
  Speaker 2: the power to send up this memory or message of warning.
• 1:16:07
  Speaker 2: It is the same in the case of spirits who communicate.
• 1:16:10
  Speaker 2: They are only enabled to do so when the conscious
• 1:16:12
  Speaker 2: mind is in abeyance, quieted, or abstracted more or less completely,
• 1:16:16
  Speaker 2: as in a trance. Then the spirit is enabled to
• 1:16:19
  Speaker 2: act upon the subconscious mind of the medium and through
• 1:16:23
  Speaker 2: it to reach us still in the body. The subconscious
• 1:16:26
  Speaker 2: is therefore the true medium or vehicle for the manifestation
• 1:16:30
  Speaker 2: of discarnate spirits, and this will become more apparent when
• 1:16:34
  Speaker 2: we come to consider the phenomena of trance, which will
• 1:16:37
  Speaker 2: be dealt with more fully in a later chapter. End
• 1:16:42
  Speaker 2: of chapter four.
• 1:16:44
  Speaker 5: Chapter five. Orthodox theology has always taught us that when
• 1:16:49
  Speaker 5: we die, we pass into either one of two places,
• 1:16:54
  Speaker 5: heaven or Hell. The Catholic Church introduces a third inter
• 1:16:59
  Speaker 5: misdiary state, purgatory, and when in this state souls may
• 1:17:05
  Speaker 5: be helped either by those who have passed over or
• 1:17:09
  Speaker 5: by the prayers of the living. It will thus be
• 1:17:13
  Speaker 5: seen that in this respect, at least, the Catholic Church
• 1:17:17
  Speaker 5: approaches nearer than any other religion the doctrines of spiritualism.
• 1:17:22
  Speaker 5: Information regarding the spirit world has come to us in
• 1:17:27
  Speaker 5: various ways. Seers or clairvoyants have gone on spiritual excursions
• 1:17:32
  Speaker 5: into the spiritual world and have told us on coming
• 1:17:36
  Speaker 5: back what they have remembered of their clairvoyant visions. Moses, Saint,
• 1:17:42
  Speaker 5: John Swedenborg, Andrew Jackson, Davis and others were seers of
• 1:17:47
  Speaker 5: this type. On the other hand, we have the direct
• 1:17:52
  Speaker 5: statements of spirits who have come back and related to
• 1:17:56
  Speaker 5: us the precise conditions existing in the next world. From
• 1:18:01
  Speaker 5: both these sources, spiritualists have succeeded in constructing a fairly
• 1:18:06
  Speaker 5: complete representative picture of the next life and its various activities.
• 1:18:15
  Speaker 5: I propose here to give a rapid and more or
• 1:18:18
  Speaker 5: less dogmatic resume of these teachings, without fully endorsing them myself,
• 1:18:26
  Speaker 5: but merely asking the reader to form his own opinion
• 1:18:30
  Speaker 5: concerning them. Parent contradictions. There are various contradictory teachings regarding
• 1:18:37
  Speaker 5: the future state which have been given us from time
• 1:18:41
  Speaker 5: to time in the past, and it has been held
• 1:18:45
  Speaker 5: by many that because of these contradictions, none of them
• 1:18:49
  Speaker 5: can be trusted. Consequently, none of the descriptions can be true. Thus,
• 1:18:56
  Speaker 5: spirits who return through many French medium declare that reincarnation
• 1:19:03
  Speaker 5: is a fact, while those who return through Enguish and
• 1:19:06
  Speaker 5: American mediums declare that it is not a fact, etc.
• 1:19:12
  Speaker 5: How are we to account for these discrepancies, As this
• 1:19:16
  Speaker 5: is a stumbling block to many spiritualists, the reason for
• 1:19:20
  Speaker 5: these contradictions must be given at once. The answer is,
• 1:19:26
  Speaker 5: as a matter of fact simple enough. Spirits tell us
• 1:19:31
  Speaker 5: that after death they are by no means omniscient. On
• 1:19:36
  Speaker 5: the contrary, they enter the next life as before said,
• 1:19:41
  Speaker 5: carrying with them all their prejudices, beliefs, and preconceived opinions.
• 1:19:48
  Speaker 5: Now this being the case, we can see that a
• 1:19:51
  Speaker 5: spirit who, when alive believed in reincarnation would after death
• 1:19:57
  Speaker 5: continue to believe in it, and he would naturally gather
• 1:20:01
  Speaker 5: round him or drift into the company of those who
• 1:20:05
  Speaker 5: also believed in it. In returning through a medium. Therefore,
• 1:20:11
  Speaker 5: he would state dogmatically that reincarnation was true. He would
• 1:20:16
  Speaker 5: merely express his own belief, which might or might not
• 1:20:20
  Speaker 5: be true. On many points of this nature, we have
• 1:20:24
  Speaker 5: no absolute means of arriving at the truth. Spirits tell
• 1:20:30
  Speaker 5: us their convictions, their beliefs, and these are founded on
• 1:20:36
  Speaker 5: observation or the wisdom of those spirits who have progressed
• 1:20:41
  Speaker 5: greatly since their departure from Earth. The doctrine of zones
• 1:20:48
  Speaker 5: and spheres. Many spirits teach us that the spirit world
• 1:20:54
  Speaker 5: is composed of a number of zones and spheres, one
• 1:20:58
  Speaker 5: upon the other. Some have stated that there are thirty
• 1:21:03
  Speaker 5: two such zones, others sixteen. But the greater number have
• 1:21:09
  Speaker 5: declared that there are but seven, beginning with the one
• 1:21:14
  Speaker 5: nearest the earth, in which are earth bound spirits, and
• 1:21:19
  Speaker 5: progressing gradually until they are inhabited by more and more
• 1:21:24
  Speaker 5: spiritualized beings. These zones are said to exist one beyond
• 1:21:31
  Speaker 5: the other, like the various layers of an onion. On
• 1:21:36
  Speaker 5: the other hand, others tell us that there are no
• 1:21:39
  Speaker 5: such things as zones or spheres, but that Heaven or
• 1:21:43
  Speaker 5: Hell are merely mental states, and that the various degrees
• 1:21:48
  Speaker 5: of spiritual perfection represent the different zones. They do not
• 1:21:54
  Speaker 5: occupy space, that is, they exist purely in the mind
• 1:21:58
  Speaker 5: of the individual. Yet perhaps these two may be but
• 1:22:04
  Speaker 5: two aspects of a single truth. It is only natural
• 1:22:10
  Speaker 5: to suppose that those of similar interests would gravitate together,
• 1:22:15
  Speaker 5: just as they do in this life, and shun the
• 1:22:19
  Speaker 5: society of others. Less evolved than themselves, unless they chose
• 1:22:25
  Speaker 5: voluntarily to help them as occasion arose. This being the case,
• 1:22:32
  Speaker 5: those more advanced spiritually would congregate in certain places, and
• 1:22:38
  Speaker 5: those less advanced would gather together in other places, so
• 1:22:43
  Speaker 5: that although the zones would not exist as physical spheres,
• 1:22:48
  Speaker 5: shut off from each other by physical barriers, as many believe,
• 1:22:53
  Speaker 5: yet they exist practically, the barrier being a mental or
• 1:22:59
  Speaker 5: spiritual one. Conditions and occupations in the spirit world. Spiritualism
• 1:23:07
  Speaker 5: teaches that the next life is a busy one, that
• 1:23:11
  Speaker 5: we continue our pursuits, activities, and interests just as we
• 1:23:16
  Speaker 5: do here, only under more favorable conditions. Evolution reign supreme,
• 1:23:24
  Speaker 5: just as it does in this world. This is only
• 1:23:28
  Speaker 5: natural and rational and what we should expect. It is
• 1:23:33
  Speaker 5: a gradual continuation and process of advancement. The next world
• 1:23:39
  Speaker 5: is said to be more or less a duplicate of
• 1:23:42
  Speaker 5: this one. Those who are interested in learning may attend
• 1:23:46
  Speaker 5: lectures or schools of instruction, may read, write, compose, paint, play,
• 1:23:52
  Speaker 5: et cetera, just as they do here. The scenery is
• 1:23:57
  Speaker 5: more or less similar to the scenery on this earth,
• 1:24:00
  Speaker 5: although more beautiful and perfect in every respect. We are
• 1:24:06
  Speaker 5: told that children never enter the lower spheres, nor are
• 1:24:11
  Speaker 5: there any flowers in these spheres. They are found only
• 1:24:14
  Speaker 5: in the higher spheres, or more advanced stages. These spheres
• 1:24:20
  Speaker 5: can influence one another more or less directly to a
• 1:24:24
  Speaker 5: great extent, and particularly the higher spheres can exert a
• 1:24:30
  Speaker 5: helpful influence on the lower ones. For this reason, progress
• 1:24:36
  Speaker 5: is always possible for a spirit who desires it. He
• 1:24:41
  Speaker 5: can secure assistance from those who are more advanced than
• 1:24:45
  Speaker 5: he is in the spiritual world. His progress would therefore
• 1:24:51
  Speaker 5: be rapid, and it all depends upon individual effort. How
• 1:24:56
  Speaker 5: rapid this will be. The sooner sp realizes his own
• 1:25:01
  Speaker 5: possibilities and the fact that his own future happiness or
• 1:25:06
  Speaker 5: unhappiness depends upon himself, the more rapidly will he advance.
• 1:25:13
  Speaker 5: The spirit body. Spirits tell us that we inhabit in
• 1:25:17
  Speaker 5: the next life a body similar to the material body,
• 1:25:22
  Speaker 5: but representing the glow of youth in its strength and purity.
• 1:25:28
  Speaker 5: The spirit of man is ever young, and that being so,
• 1:25:32
  Speaker 5: it assumes that rejuvenated outward appearance upon entering the new life.
• 1:25:39
  Speaker 5: This etheric body is incapable of fatigue, and is fed
• 1:25:43
  Speaker 5: by the magnetic and spiritual forces which surround it. In
• 1:25:48
  Speaker 5: that sphere, children entering the new life gradually grow to maturity,
• 1:25:54
  Speaker 5: though more rapidly than they do on this earth, because
• 1:25:58
  Speaker 5: greater advantages offered them, and progress is consequently swifter. At
• 1:26:06
  Speaker 5: the age of greatest mental and spiritual maturity, they cease
• 1:26:10
  Speaker 5: growing and thenceforward remain in that perfected condition on entering
• 1:26:18
  Speaker 5: the spirit world. Upon entering the next life, the human
• 1:26:23
  Speaker 5: spirit is met by friends or relatives who have before
• 1:26:27
  Speaker 5: passed over, and who are drawn by natural magnetic attraction
• 1:26:33
  Speaker 5: and sympathetic interest to those who have just entered the
• 1:26:37
  Speaker 5: spirit world. When the spirit enters the next life, it undergoes,
• 1:26:43
  Speaker 5: in a way a new birth, and is for some
• 1:26:47
  Speaker 5: time bewildered. This is only natural after the shock and
• 1:26:52
  Speaker 5: wrench of death, when we have had an accident in
• 1:26:55
  Speaker 5: this life and have been knocked unconscious. Process of regaining
• 1:27:00
  Speaker 5: consciousness is peculiar. When such a man opens his eyes,
• 1:27:06
  Speaker 5: objects are presented to him vaguely indistinctly, he would see
• 1:27:11
  Speaker 5: men as trees walking. Sounds would be heard, but faintly.
• 1:27:16
  Speaker 5: There would be a vague jumble of noises, and no
• 1:27:20
  Speaker 5: definite and articulate sounds would be recognized at first, until
• 1:27:26
  Speaker 5: consciousness was more fully restored, thoughts would be scattered incoherent,
• 1:27:32
  Speaker 5: and only the strongest stimuli would focus the attention on
• 1:27:36
  Speaker 5: any definite object for longer than a few moments at
• 1:27:40
  Speaker 5: a time. When a man dies, the departure of the
• 1:27:45
  Speaker 5: soul from the body must be as great as a
• 1:27:49
  Speaker 5: strain upon the surviving consciousness as any accident could be,
• 1:27:55
  Speaker 5: especially in cases of sudden death suicide, and in those
• 1:28:00
  Speaker 5: cases where the patient is said to die hard. Of course,
• 1:28:05
  Speaker 5: after a little time, the spirit survives the initial shock
• 1:28:10
  Speaker 5: and soon becomes adjusted to the new environment and condition,
• 1:28:16
  Speaker 5: and this fact would account for the bewilderment and confusion
• 1:28:21
  Speaker 5: which many spirits seem to experience upon their entering into
• 1:28:26
  Speaker 5: the next life. It is only natural and what we
• 1:28:30
  Speaker 5: should expect sex in the spirit world. Many have asked
• 1:28:35
  Speaker 5: whether the distinction of sex is maintained in the next life,
• 1:28:39
  Speaker 5: whether man continues to be man and woman woman. Here again,
• 1:28:45
  Speaker 5: many different opinions have been expressed by those who have
• 1:28:49
  Speaker 5: passed over, but the majority seem to contend that the
• 1:28:53
  Speaker 5: distinction between male and female is fundamental mentally and spiritually,
• 1:29:00
  Speaker 5: no less than physically, and for this reason they are
• 1:29:05
  Speaker 5: destined to be more or less different for all time.
• 1:29:11
  Speaker 5: This does not mean, as many think, that woman is there,
• 1:29:15
  Speaker 5: as she is here too often in a condition of
• 1:29:19
  Speaker 5: subservience or inferiority. On the other hand, she is man's
• 1:29:24
  Speaker 5: equal in many particulars, in some ways inferior to him,
• 1:29:29
  Speaker 5: and in some ways superior. It is a question of
• 1:29:34
  Speaker 5: differing viewpoints and constitution. Each may attain perfection and ultimate
• 1:29:42
  Speaker 5: complete happiness in their own particular way, just as every
• 1:29:47
  Speaker 5: individual here must obtain in his own way. As to
• 1:29:53
  Speaker 5: the relations of the sexes in the next life, the
• 1:29:56
  Speaker 5: teaching of the highest spirits is that there is love, harmony, sympathy, cooperation,
• 1:30:04
  Speaker 5: and a mental and spiritual blending together of their natures
• 1:30:09
  Speaker 5: which corresponds to physical love on this plane. Earth Bound
• 1:30:16
  Speaker 5: spirits in the lowest plane are said to be unable
• 1:30:20
  Speaker 5: to get away from the atmosphere and magnetic attraction of
• 1:30:24
  Speaker 5: this earth, and do not care to even if they could.
• 1:30:30
  Speaker 5: They are the cause of much of the trouble which
• 1:30:33
  Speaker 5: mediums experience, often causing obsession by delivering false or lying messages.
• 1:30:41
  Speaker 5: There seems to be a law which permits spirits from
• 1:30:44
  Speaker 5: the higher zones to descend into the lower zones, but
• 1:30:48
  Speaker 5: the reverse of this does not take place. Thus there
• 1:30:53
  Speaker 5: are good or spiritual influences always playing upon the lower
• 1:30:58
  Speaker 5: spheres from the higher sphere, and progress is thus rendered
• 1:31:03
  Speaker 5: easy to those who care to take advantage of their opportunities.
• 1:31:08
  Speaker 5: Where and how spirits live. Many of the descriptions which
• 1:31:13
  Speaker 5: have been given to us indicate that spirits inhabit houses
• 1:31:17
  Speaker 5: or mansions very similar to our own, and that the
• 1:31:22
  Speaker 5: scenery of the spirit land is also similar to that
• 1:31:26
  Speaker 5: of the earth plane, only more beautiful. Garments of variegated
• 1:31:32
  Speaker 5: colors are said to be worn, as well as ornaments
• 1:31:35
  Speaker 5: for those who care for them. The occupations of spirits
• 1:31:39
  Speaker 5: are many and varied. Time is not spent in the
• 1:31:43
  Speaker 5: spiritual spheres as many imagine in idleness or in religious devotions.
• 1:31:50
  Speaker 5: How spirits talk. The spirit body in the spirit heaven
• 1:31:56
  Speaker 5: is thus as material to them as our world all,
• 1:32:00
  Speaker 5: only it exists on a different plane of activity and
• 1:32:03
  Speaker 5: vibrates add a different rate of activity from ours. Hence,
• 1:32:08
  Speaker 5: it is invisible to us as we are usually invisible
• 1:32:12
  Speaker 5: to them, and it requires clairvoyance on the part of
• 1:32:17
  Speaker 5: spirits to perceive the material world, just as it does
• 1:32:22
  Speaker 5: on the part of mortals to perceive the spiritual world.
• 1:32:26
  Speaker 5: Conversation between spirits is carried on by a species of
• 1:32:31
  Speaker 5: thought exchange or telepathy. Though the conversation appears perfectly natural
• 1:32:36
  Speaker 5: and as though delivered by means of mouth, as it
• 1:32:40
  Speaker 5: is with us. We can form some idea as to
• 1:32:43
  Speaker 5: how natural this would be from our dreams, when the
• 1:32:47
  Speaker 5: exchange of thought is purely mental. Yet the word spoken
• 1:32:52
  Speaker 5: to each other by the dream figures seem as natural
• 1:32:56
  Speaker 5: and as sonorous as our usual converse station insanity and spirits,
• 1:33:04
  Speaker 5: There are strictly speaking, no insane spirits, it is said,
• 1:33:09
  Speaker 5: except in the Earth's spheres, and these, previous to their insanity,
• 1:33:15
  Speaker 5: were degraded spiritually and morally. They frequently continue in some
• 1:33:21
  Speaker 5: degree insane for a long period of time, their spiritual
• 1:33:25
  Speaker 5: condition not being favorable to their restoration, and here they
• 1:33:30
  Speaker 5: are often attracted to mortals with like tendencies, whom they
• 1:33:35
  Speaker 5: obsess and through whom they ventilate their own disordered fancies,
• 1:33:41
  Speaker 5: and even impel them to acts of violence. However, as
• 1:33:45
  Speaker 5: much insanity is caused by disorders of the links between
• 1:33:50
  Speaker 5: body and mind, and as these are all severed at
• 1:33:54
  Speaker 5: the moment of death, the mind is usually normal and
• 1:33:57
  Speaker 5: sound as soon as it enters the spirit world, and
• 1:34:02
  Speaker 5: in any case, it recovers very rapidly upon its entrance
• 1:34:07
  Speaker 5: into that realm. How spirits travel. Spirits are said to
• 1:34:14
  Speaker 5: possess the ability to move from place to place with
• 1:34:18
  Speaker 5: extreme rapidity. The fact as quick as thought, as the
• 1:34:22
  Speaker 5: saying is. It is as easy for one to imagine
• 1:34:26
  Speaker 5: oneself in China or in England as it is to
• 1:34:30
  Speaker 5: imagine oneself in Brooklyn, if one is living in New York.
• 1:34:35
  Speaker 5: The one process takes no longer than the other. And
• 1:34:40
  Speaker 5: as you are in a spirit world where your thoughts
• 1:34:43
  Speaker 5: and interests are, you may readily perceive that it takes
• 1:34:47
  Speaker 5: you no longer to reach one place than it does another.
• 1:34:52
  Speaker 5: However incredible this may seem at first sight, it is
• 1:34:56
  Speaker 5: quite intelligible when we remember the rapidity with which wireless
• 1:35:01
  Speaker 5: messages travel, flying through space at the speed of light
• 1:35:06
  Speaker 5: one hundred eighty six thousand miles a second. This would
• 1:35:10
  Speaker 5: carry these waves nearly seven and a half times around
• 1:35:14
  Speaker 5: the world in one second, and it has been experimentally
• 1:35:19
  Speaker 5: proven that these electric waves do travel at that rate.
• 1:35:25
  Speaker 5: Such being the case, we can at least conceive that
• 1:35:29
  Speaker 5: thought can travel add as quick a rate. However inconceivable,
• 1:35:35
  Speaker 5: it may appear to our reason good and evil spirits.
• 1:35:40
  Speaker 5: We have heard much of obsessing and lying spirits, of
• 1:35:45
  Speaker 5: evil spirits and those who work calm. But we must
• 1:35:49
  Speaker 5: remember that there are spirits of quite another character in
• 1:35:53
  Speaker 5: the heavens who are said to protect and guard us,
• 1:35:57
  Speaker 5: give us wise counsel and advice, and are in fact
• 1:36:02
  Speaker 5: veritable guardian angels. Their duty is to impress our minds,
• 1:36:07
  Speaker 5: and by this means to instruct and guide us, to
• 1:36:11
  Speaker 5: instill good thoughts and resolves, admonish us of our faults,
• 1:36:17
  Speaker 5: reprove us when we go astray, and assist in the
• 1:36:20
  Speaker 5: development of special talents. They do not interfere directly in
• 1:36:26
  Speaker 5: the physical world, but impress our minds, influencing them in
• 1:36:31
  Speaker 5: this way or in that the doctrine of correspondences, there
• 1:36:37
  Speaker 5: is said to be a definite agreement or correspondence between
• 1:36:42
  Speaker 5: the material and spiritual order of things. What we perceive
• 1:36:48
  Speaker 5: as a tree in this world is only the outward
• 1:36:51
  Speaker 5: manifestation of the real spiritual tree lying within it, And
• 1:36:56
  Speaker 5: this is true of all physical manifestations and facts which
• 1:37:01
  Speaker 5: we see in nature. Every physical body has a corresponding
• 1:37:06
  Speaker 5: spiritual body behind it, and this fact gives rise to
• 1:37:11
  Speaker 5: the famous doctrine of correspondences elaborated by Swedenborg. This correspondence
• 1:37:19
  Speaker 5: throws a little light on the bewildering fact that spirits
• 1:37:23
  Speaker 5: often speak of spirit, gold, spirit, marble, spirit houses, spirit books, etc.
• 1:37:30
  Speaker 5: As if they were tangible realities, not of course, that
• 1:37:34
  Speaker 5: these are sublimations of corresponding objects of Earth, existent throughout,
• 1:37:40
  Speaker 5: but different as to material, yet sufficiently alike to be
• 1:37:45
  Speaker 5: called by the same name. In other words, these spirit
• 1:37:50
  Speaker 5: objects are expressed in a different vehicle of the nature,
• 1:37:54
  Speaker 5: which is to us externalized as gold, marble, etc. We
• 1:38:01
  Speaker 5: must endeavor to realize the reality of the spiritual world,
• 1:38:05
  Speaker 5: which we have been unaccustomed to think of as in
• 1:38:09
  Speaker 5: any way substantial. Owing to the teachings of theology the
• 1:38:13
  Speaker 5: difficulty of describing the spirit world, it is impossible to
• 1:38:19
  Speaker 5: express things psychic adequately in direct language, for the simple
• 1:38:24
  Speaker 5: reason that our words are images drawn from material things
• 1:38:29
  Speaker 5: and their effects. Immaterial things and the life beyond must
• 1:38:34
  Speaker 5: therefore generally be described by symbols rather than by words,
• 1:38:40
  Speaker 5: and the symbols, whether seen in vision or representing themselves
• 1:38:45
  Speaker 5: to the mind in the normal state partake less of
• 1:38:49
  Speaker 5: the seer's idiosyncrasies than any direct language would do. This
• 1:38:56
  Speaker 5: symbolism is often carried to a high place in an interpretation,
• 1:39:01
  Speaker 5: so much so that the original is almost lost. Sight
• 1:39:05
  Speaker 5: of this, however, we shall speak at length of the
• 1:39:09
  Speaker 5: chapter devoted to symbolism. There is much evidence to show
• 1:39:15
  Speaker 5: that spirits can create forms and objects by the mere
• 1:39:20
  Speaker 5: exercise of their volition. They build up what appear to
• 1:39:24
  Speaker 5: be solid objects by the use of their minds, and
• 1:39:28
  Speaker 5: these objects are often mistaken by the spirits for realities. Thus,
• 1:39:34
  Speaker 5: thought forms may be created by a spirit intelligence, and
• 1:39:40
  Speaker 5: this is a fact which many spiritualists have overlooked, though
• 1:39:45
  Speaker 5: it is an important one. Is I shall endeavor to
• 1:39:48
  Speaker 5: show later darkness and light, wrong and evil in some
• 1:39:54
  Speaker 5: ways seem connected with darkness. Unhappy spirits always complain that
• 1:40:01
  Speaker 5: they can find no light, but as they progress, the
• 1:40:05
  Speaker 5: darkness seems to lift and light begins to dawn. This
• 1:40:10
  Speaker 5: does not mean that they emerge from a material darkness
• 1:40:15
  Speaker 5: into a material light, but go through a process of
• 1:40:19
  Speaker 5: psychic evolution which would in their own minds correspond to this.
• 1:40:26
  Speaker 5: The quickest way for an unhappy spirit to progress towards
• 1:40:30
  Speaker 5: the light is for it to help and comfort or
• 1:40:34
  Speaker 5: assist another in like condition. Unfortunately, they are very often
• 1:40:40
  Speaker 5: ignorant of this. But fortunately many spiritualists have done a
• 1:40:46
  Speaker 5: great deal of good in the seance room, etc. By
• 1:40:50
  Speaker 5: giving this knowledge to spirits of a low order. Many
• 1:40:54
  Speaker 5: of the spirits who have passed over, being nearer Earth
• 1:40:58
  Speaker 5: than Heaven soon after their transition, are more easily reached
• 1:41:03
  Speaker 5: by the living than by other spirits so far as
• 1:41:07
  Speaker 5: comfort and advice and assistance are concerned, And for this reason,
• 1:41:13
  Speaker 5: prayers of the living are often of great help to
• 1:41:17
  Speaker 5: those who have recently passed over and are extremely earth
• 1:41:21
  Speaker 5: bound by reason of their mental and moral characteristics. Ordinary
• 1:41:27
  Speaker 5: advice and assistance may also be given to these spirits
• 1:41:31
  Speaker 5: at a seance visits to the spirit world. The spirit
• 1:41:38
  Speaker 5: world can occasionally be visited, it is said, by the
• 1:41:42
  Speaker 5: spirit of the sleeper or the somnumbulist, And the deeper
• 1:41:47
  Speaker 5: the sleep, the more separated from the body is the spirit,
• 1:41:51
  Speaker 5: until in deep trance the spirit is sometimes entirely withdrawn.
• 1:41:58
  Speaker 5: In deep sleep, also, the spirit occasionally goes on clearvoyant
• 1:42:03
  Speaker 5: excursions and comes back to its normal body, remembering much
• 1:42:08
  Speaker 5: that it has seen in the spiritual realms. In the
• 1:42:12
  Speaker 5: state of ecstasy, these voyages are often made, and the
• 1:42:17
  Speaker 5: seer will retain a certain amount of consciousness of this
• 1:42:21
  Speaker 5: earth and be able to dictate to those about him
• 1:42:25
  Speaker 5: his impressions while visiting the spiritual world, and while seeing
• 1:42:29
  Speaker 5: more or less clearly what is happening there. Spirits are
• 1:42:35
  Speaker 5: said to exercise free will and have far more liberty
• 1:42:39
  Speaker 5: of choice in the next world than they do here,
• 1:42:43
  Speaker 5: where they are bound by habit and tradition, no less
• 1:42:47
  Speaker 5: than by mental and physical obstructions and difficulties. The psychic
• 1:42:53
  Speaker 5: gifts of spirits are far more highly developed than they
• 1:42:58
  Speaker 5: were when on this earth, and they are frequently capable
• 1:43:02
  Speaker 5: of exercising the faculty of foreknowledge or provision, as well
• 1:43:07
  Speaker 5: as other supernormal powers such as telepathy, clairvoyance, and clear
• 1:43:14
  Speaker 5: audience infinite intelligence. They are also able to perceive the
• 1:43:20
  Speaker 5: general plan of nature far more thoroughly and effectively than we,
• 1:43:26
  Speaker 5: because they have, so to speak, a greater mental grasp
• 1:43:30
  Speaker 5: of the universe in its entirety, and many spirits who
• 1:43:34
  Speaker 5: have died while disbelieving in an infinite intelligence have, as
• 1:43:40
  Speaker 5: time progressed, shown that they have more or less changed
• 1:43:44
  Speaker 5: their viewpoint and now are more definitely religious than they
• 1:43:48
  Speaker 5: were before. As doctor Crawl says, I have constantly been
• 1:43:53
  Speaker 5: impressed with the numerous proofs of the creative and sustaining
• 1:43:58
  Speaker 5: power of Deity, and step by step I have been
• 1:44:02
  Speaker 5: led to undoubtedly believe that He, though not in human form,
• 1:44:07
  Speaker 5: is everywhere present, the creator, preserver, and controller of all things.
• 1:44:14
  Speaker 5: Literally God in the most comprehensive sense of the term,
• 1:44:19
  Speaker 5: with whom all wisdom and power and infinite love extends
• 1:44:24
  Speaker 5: to all his creatures. This is the effect of these
• 1:44:28
  Speaker 5: investigations upon my mind, and I am disposed to believe
• 1:44:33
  Speaker 5: that similar and more extended researches by others in the
• 1:44:38
  Speaker 5: future will lead all true earnest spiritualists to the same belief,
• 1:44:44
  Speaker 5: and thus modern spiritualists will be stamped with the higher
• 1:44:49
  Speaker 5: polity of true religion, with a correct, though necessarily limited
• 1:44:55
  Speaker 5: conception of God's character and of his relations to us
• 1:45:00
  Speaker 5: and of ours to him. Shall we see God, however
• 1:45:07
  Speaker 5: this may be, it is claimed that spirits, for some
• 1:45:11
  Speaker 5: time after transition at least, do not definitely know anything
• 1:45:16
  Speaker 5: more about the nature or extent of this infinite intelligence
• 1:45:21
  Speaker 5: than we do. They do not pass directly into the
• 1:45:26
  Speaker 5: presence of any deity, as theology tells us. Questioned on
• 1:45:31
  Speaker 5: this fact, they reply, I do not know. However, as
• 1:45:36
  Speaker 5: they progress in spiritual perception and understanding, they gradually perceive
• 1:45:43
  Speaker 5: that the universe, instead of being a chaos due to chance,
• 1:45:48
  Speaker 5: is orderly and systematic and governed by a supreme or
• 1:45:53
  Speaker 5: infinite intelligence, which is the guiding principle involved, and that
• 1:45:59
  Speaker 5: it would only be logical to believe that such an
• 1:46:02
  Speaker 5: intelligence necessarily existed. The spirit world the source of energy.
• 1:46:11
  Speaker 5: The spiritual world is the source of all energy. Even
• 1:46:15
  Speaker 5: in this life, our energy is derived from some spiritual source.
• 1:46:20
  Speaker 5: The nature of life is as yet unknown, and there
• 1:46:24
  Speaker 5: is every indication that it is due to some spiritual
• 1:46:29
  Speaker 5: influx acting upon and through the material world. One proof
• 1:46:35
  Speaker 5: of this is that during the hours of sleep, when
• 1:46:39
  Speaker 5: the body is resting and passive, the nervous or spiritual
• 1:46:44
  Speaker 5: energy is revived. The body is recharged as it were,
• 1:46:48
  Speaker 5: in the same way as a storage battery might be
• 1:46:52
  Speaker 5: recharged with electric energy. This process does not depend upon
• 1:46:58
  Speaker 5: any material condition, for sleep can often revive us instantly,
• 1:47:04
  Speaker 5: as many can attest in moments of extreme exhaustion, the
• 1:47:10
  Speaker 5: head may drop to the breast for a fraction of
• 1:47:12
  Speaker 5: a second, and a moment later consciousness be regained. Yet
• 1:47:18
  Speaker 5: in that moment of time, some complete spiritual revivification has
• 1:47:23
  Speaker 5: taken place. The energy of the body seems to have
• 1:47:27
  Speaker 5: been recharged or replenished, and new energy infused from some
• 1:47:33
  Speaker 5: spiritual source, in a manner which would be quite inexplicable
• 1:47:38
  Speaker 5: were we to depend upon the ordinary teachings of science
• 1:47:42
  Speaker 5: to explain such facts. The phenomena and teachings of spiritualism
• 1:47:48
  Speaker 5: alike constitute a great solace and comfort to many souls
• 1:47:53
  Speaker 5: in distress and sorrow. The proof that death does not
• 1:47:58
  Speaker 5: end all, and that the indie visual human spirit continues
• 1:48:02
  Speaker 5: to exist as an entity and in precisely the same
• 1:48:05
  Speaker 5: form as it is now, is a great comfort to
• 1:48:09
  Speaker 5: the majority of persons. In this way, the teachings of
• 1:48:13
  Speaker 5: spiritualism are a solace to those who accept them, to
• 1:48:19
  Speaker 5: those who not only believe, but are enabled to obtain
• 1:48:23
  Speaker 5: some of the varied phenomena. This assurance and consolation is
• 1:48:28
  Speaker 5: doubly true the different kinds of spiritual gifts. There are
• 1:48:34
  Speaker 5: many spiritual gifts. As Saint Paul says in his message
• 1:48:38
  Speaker 5: to the Corinthians. He wrote, Now there are diversities of gifts,
• 1:48:44
  Speaker 5: but the same Spirit. And there are differences of administrations,
• 1:48:50
  Speaker 5: but the same Lord. And there are diversities of operations.
• 1:48:55
  Speaker 5: But it is the same God which worketh all in all,
• 1:48:59
  Speaker 5: but the manifestation of the Spirit is given to every
• 1:49:02
  Speaker 5: man to profit withal. For to one is given by
• 1:49:06
  Speaker 5: the Spirit, the word of wisdom to another, the word
• 1:49:10
  Speaker 5: of knowledge by the same spirit to another, faith by
• 1:49:15
  Speaker 5: the same spirit to another, the gift of healing by
• 1:49:19
  Speaker 5: the same spirit to another, the working of miracles to another,
• 1:49:25
  Speaker 5: prophecy to another, discerning of spirits to another, diverse kinds
• 1:49:31
  Speaker 5: of tongues to another, the interpretation of tongues. But all
• 1:49:37
  Speaker 5: these worketh that one and the self same Spirit, dividing
• 1:49:42
  Speaker 5: to every man severely as he will one Corinthians, Chapter twelve.
• 1:49:50
  Speaker 5: How anyone can disbelieve in spirit communication on the ground
• 1:49:54
  Speaker 5: that it is contrary to Bible teachings after the above passage,
• 1:49:59
  Speaker 5: it is it is hard to comprehend, since here are
• 1:50:03
  Speaker 5: a large number of spirit manifestations clearly outlined and stated
• 1:50:09
  Speaker 5: by the apostle to be manifestations of the divine Spirit.
• 1:50:15
  Speaker 5: And of Chapter five.
• 1:50:17
  Speaker 6: Chapter six the health of mediums and psychics. The health bodily,
• 1:50:23
  Speaker 6: mentally and spiritually of mediums is a very important factor
• 1:50:27
  Speaker 6: in all mediumistic and psychic development, far more so than
• 1:50:30
  Speaker 6: is usually realized. In the first place, we have a
• 1:50:33
  Speaker 6: certain amount of bodily energy in order to accomplish anything
• 1:50:36
  Speaker 6: we desire in life, and this energy comes largely from
• 1:50:39
  Speaker 6: physical health. Mediums have found, to their cost that the
• 1:50:43
  Speaker 6: production of phenomena, especially of the physical order, is at
• 1:50:46
  Speaker 6: times a very exhausting process, and unless they keep themselves
• 1:50:50
  Speaker 6: in good bodily health, they discover that they become run
• 1:50:53
  Speaker 6: down and nervously exhausted, in which case they render themselves
• 1:50:56
  Speaker 6: subject to insomnia, depressing mental emotion, and if this gets worse,
• 1:51:02
  Speaker 6: to obsession and even greater dangers and difficulties. It is
• 1:51:05
  Speaker 6: very important, therefore, for all mediums to keep up their
• 1:51:08
  Speaker 6: physical health a healthy brain. The mind of man depends
• 1:51:13
  Speaker 6: largely upon the condition of his brain, and if this
• 1:51:15
  Speaker 6: is not rested, freshened, and supplied in abundance with rich,
• 1:51:18
  Speaker 6: healthy blood, his mental life suffers in consequence. For we
• 1:51:22
  Speaker 6: know that any poisonous substance mixed with the blood immediately
• 1:51:26
  Speaker 6: affects the mind by circulating through the delicate substance of
• 1:51:29
  Speaker 6: the brain. The tiny nerve cells all over the body,
• 1:51:32
  Speaker 6: which are the storehouses of energy, may be compared to
• 1:51:35
  Speaker 6: a number of tiny cups which we fill with energy
• 1:51:39
  Speaker 6: every night during sleep, and more or less empty every day.
• 1:51:43
  Speaker 6: Our duty is to keep these little cups brim full,
• 1:51:45
  Speaker 6: and if we allow them to become too emptied, so
• 1:51:48
  Speaker 6: that nothing is left, we run into danger of nervous exhaustion, neurosthenia,
• 1:51:53
  Speaker 6: et cetera. The first thing which the medium must pay
• 1:51:57
  Speaker 6: attention to is therefore the state of his physical health.
• 1:52:00
  Speaker 6: Health and the following rules will be found helpful by
• 1:52:03
  Speaker 6: all those who wish to attain this condition deep breathing exercises.
• 1:52:08
  Speaker 6: In the first place, a certain number of deep breathing
• 1:52:10
  Speaker 6: exercises should be taken every day. These serve to keep
• 1:52:14
  Speaker 6: the lungs active and to massage the internal organs. But
• 1:52:18
  Speaker 6: deep breathing exercises have a more potent and far reaching
• 1:52:20
  Speaker 6: effect than this. There is a peculiar life giving property
• 1:52:24
  Speaker 6: in fresh air, and if we do not breathe this fully,
• 1:52:27
  Speaker 6: we never live as completely and receive as large a
• 1:52:30
  Speaker 6: supply of the vital and magnetic currents of the universe,
• 1:52:33
  Speaker 6: as we otherwise would. If anyone doubts this, he has
• 1:52:37
  Speaker 6: but to stand direct and take half a dozen deep
• 1:52:39
  Speaker 6: breathing exercises as directed below, and he will feel energized
• 1:52:43
  Speaker 6: from top to toe. The way to take these breathing
• 1:52:45
  Speaker 6: exercises so as to get the best results is as follows. One.
• 1:52:50
  Speaker 6: How to breathe. Stand before an open window or out
• 1:52:53
  Speaker 6: of doors, free from all restrictive clothing. Before beginning, exhale forcibly,
• 1:52:58
  Speaker 6: bending the body forward and relaxing the muscles. Place both
• 1:53:02
  Speaker 6: open hands over the abdomen. Now, breathe as deeply as
• 1:53:05
  Speaker 6: possible against these hands, expanding the abdomen as much as possible,
• 1:53:10
  Speaker 6: without allowing the chest or ribs to expand in the
• 1:53:12
  Speaker 6: least In other words, breathe with abdomen only. After you
• 1:53:16
  Speaker 6: have done this five or six times, place both your
• 1:53:18
  Speaker 6: hands against your ribs on either side. Now breathe in deeply,
• 1:53:22
  Speaker 6: pressing out the ribs, but without allowing either the abdomen
• 1:53:25
  Speaker 6: or the upper chest to expand. After you have done
• 1:53:29
  Speaker 6: this five or six times, place your hands on the
• 1:53:31
  Speaker 6: upper chest just below the neck, and breathe with this
• 1:53:33
  Speaker 6: portion of the lungs without allowing either the ribs or
• 1:53:36
  Speaker 6: the abdomen to expand. At first, you will find it
• 1:53:40
  Speaker 6: very difficult to control your breathing limiting it to these
• 1:53:43
  Speaker 6: parts of the lungs. But this will come with practice,
• 1:53:45
  Speaker 6: and it will be shown later in chapter forty one
• 1:53:48
  Speaker 6: how important these breathing exercises are when the psychic side
• 1:53:51
  Speaker 6: of the breathing exercises is understood, the psychic complete breath.
• 1:53:58
  Speaker 6: After you have mastered these three separates steps, you will
• 1:54:00
  Speaker 6: be enabled to take what is known as a complete breath,
• 1:54:04
  Speaker 6: that is, one which expands first the abdomen, then the ribs,
• 1:54:08
  Speaker 6: then the upper chest. You should by this time have
• 1:54:12
  Speaker 6: such control over your breathing that you are enabled to
• 1:54:14
  Speaker 6: do this in three distinct stages, or merge them together
• 1:54:17
  Speaker 6: into one as you wish. In all these breathing exercises,
• 1:54:21
  Speaker 6: the back of the nasal passage should be relaxed, and
• 1:54:24
  Speaker 6: you should breathe through the nose, never the mouth, as
• 1:54:26
  Speaker 6: though you were smelling a flower. If you do this
• 1:54:29
  Speaker 6: and relax inwardly, you will find that the air strikes
• 1:54:32
  Speaker 6: the back of the throat before it is felt at all,
• 1:54:35
  Speaker 6: and you will never notice the air in the nose itself.
• 1:54:38
  Speaker 6: Practice this every day until you become proficient. The best
• 1:54:41
  Speaker 6: way to ensure this is to close the lips while
• 1:54:44
  Speaker 6: keeping the teeth separated. Then throw down the under portion
• 1:54:47
  Speaker 6: of the jaw developing exercises two. A certain amount of
• 1:54:52
  Speaker 6: exercise should be taken each day. The particular character of
• 1:54:56
  Speaker 6: exercise which will be found beneficial for the maintenance of
• 1:54:59
  Speaker 6: health also for development of psychic and mediumistic gifts are
• 1:55:03
  Speaker 6: those which develop the vitality of the inner organs about
• 1:55:06
  Speaker 6: the waistline. Bending exercises of all kinds are especially useful.
• 1:55:12
  Speaker 6: Large muscles are not required for good health, but energy
• 1:55:15
  Speaker 6: and endurance are. The following four exercises will be found
• 1:55:18
  Speaker 6: very helpful in this connection. A stand erect raising both
• 1:55:24
  Speaker 6: arms over the head as far as possible. Raise yourself
• 1:55:28
  Speaker 6: on your toes, and at the same time stretch upwards
• 1:55:30
  Speaker 6: with the finger tips as far as you can, as
• 1:55:32
  Speaker 6: though trying to lengthen yourself. B stand as before, arms
• 1:55:38
  Speaker 6: raised over the head. Now bend forward and try to
• 1:55:41
  Speaker 6: touch the floor with your finger tips without bending the knees. Again,
• 1:55:45
  Speaker 6: raise yourself up to a standing position very rapidly. This
• 1:55:49
  Speaker 6: is a well known but very useful exercise. See stand
• 1:55:54
  Speaker 6: as an exercise. B and bend the body sideways from
• 1:55:57
  Speaker 6: the waist as far as possible, first to the left,
• 1:56:00
  Speaker 6: then to the right. Make this motion as rapid as
• 1:56:03
  Speaker 6: you can. D Stand as before, and bend slowly, trying
• 1:56:09
  Speaker 6: to touch the floor with the fingers. As you do this,
• 1:56:12
  Speaker 6: take in a deep breath. The purpose of this exercise
• 1:56:15
  Speaker 6: is to compress the liver from above and below at
• 1:56:18
  Speaker 6: the same time, and this massage will prove very helpful.
• 1:56:23
  Speaker 2: Health.
• 1:56:23
  Speaker 6: Hence, other points to be observed and maintaining good health
• 1:56:27
  Speaker 6: are the following.
• 1:56:30
  Speaker 7: One.
• 1:56:30
  Speaker 6: Eat as little red meat as you can, since this
• 1:56:33
  Speaker 6: is acknowledged by all to retard psychic development. Two eat
• 1:56:38
  Speaker 6: a certain amount of fruit every day, not in addition
• 1:56:40
  Speaker 6: to other food, but in place of it. Acid fruits
• 1:56:43
  Speaker 6: are particularly beneficial in nearly all cases. Three drink at
• 1:56:48
  Speaker 6: least a quart of water each day. Four. Accustom the
• 1:56:52
  Speaker 6: body to cool baths. It is best to begin these
• 1:56:55
  Speaker 6: in the summer time and continue them in the winter.
• 1:56:59
  Speaker 6: Five where is lie little clothing as you can consistent
• 1:57:01
  Speaker 6: with warmth. The skin breathes as well as the lungs,
• 1:57:04
  Speaker 6: and free circulation of air on the surface is essential
• 1:57:08
  Speaker 6: the powers of the mind. We now come to the
• 1:57:11
  Speaker 6: mental factor. Few realize how important this is in the
• 1:57:15
  Speaker 6: development of psychic gifts. If the mind be depressed, worried, scattered,
• 1:57:20
  Speaker 6: and enabled to concentrate upon any definite thing, good results
• 1:57:24
  Speaker 6: can hardly be hopedul in any way of psychic development.
• 1:57:28
  Speaker 6: Many psychics can obtain good results for individual sitters, but
• 1:57:31
  Speaker 6: as soon as they make a public appearance, they fail
• 1:57:34
  Speaker 6: more or less completely. We can hardly doubt that the
• 1:57:37
  Speaker 6: reason for this is their apprehension for the results, fear
• 1:57:39
  Speaker 6: they will not succeed, et cetera. This prevents all free communication.
• 1:57:44
  Speaker 6: It shuts the doors of the soul, as it were,
• 1:57:46
  Speaker 6: against any outside influences. In order to be receptive and sensitive,
• 1:57:52
  Speaker 6: we must have a free mind and give ourselves up
• 1:57:54
  Speaker 6: wholly to those forces and vibrations which play upon us.
• 1:57:58
  Speaker 6: If you watch yourself, you will mind that your body
• 1:58:00
  Speaker 6: tends to contract all over as soon as you think
• 1:58:03
  Speaker 6: certain thoughts or experience certain emotions such as jealousy, hatred, envy,
• 1:58:08
  Speaker 6: et cetera. On the other hand, as soon as you
• 1:58:11
  Speaker 6: send out thoughts of friendship, love, sympathy, et cetera, you
• 1:58:15
  Speaker 6: find that your whole being expands and relaxes. If this
• 1:58:19
  Speaker 6: is true of the muscles of the body, how much
• 1:58:21
  Speaker 6: more true it is of the muscles of the soul,
• 1:58:23
  Speaker 6: if I may so express it. The imagination, it has
• 1:58:27
  Speaker 6: been said, is the lungs of the spiritual life, and
• 1:58:30
  Speaker 6: in order to have free play, they must be unrestricted,
• 1:58:33
  Speaker 6: just as our physical lungs are. The essence of psychic
• 1:58:36
  Speaker 6: development is this complete surrender and quiescence. And until this
• 1:58:40
  Speaker 6: is ensured, full development can hardly be expected. There is
• 1:58:45
  Speaker 6: such a thing as spiritual contraction. We have all heard
• 1:58:48
  Speaker 6: of the man with the in growing conscience. This means
• 1:58:51
  Speaker 6: simply that this man is dwarfed, contracted, and unsympathetic in
• 1:58:55
  Speaker 6: his attitude to all that he meets. Gentleness and cheerfulness,
• 1:58:59
  Speaker 6: said Robert Lewistine Ravenson, are the perfect duties, and we
• 1:59:02
  Speaker 6: cannot do better than advise the medium to follow this
• 1:59:04
  Speaker 6: motto in his daily life. Psychic contagion these influences which
• 1:59:11
  Speaker 6: are harmful in ourselves, are harmful when experienced in others,
• 1:59:14
  Speaker 6: and they are contagious to a remarkable degree. All experienced
• 1:59:18
  Speaker 6: spiritualists know that a medium is liable to take on
• 1:59:21
  Speaker 6: the conditions of the spirit or of another person when
• 1:59:24
  Speaker 6: in a sensitive state, and this is true of his
• 1:59:26
  Speaker 6: mental and spiritual life as well as his physical health.
• 1:59:30
  Speaker 6: We can acquire the other's irritable disposition, his sourness, and
• 1:59:33
  Speaker 6: lack of balance for the time being, just as easily
• 1:59:37
  Speaker 6: as we can acquire other symptoms. And unless this is
• 1:59:40
  Speaker 6: recognized and the medium takes care to throw off these influences,
• 1:59:43
  Speaker 6: they are liable to remain with him more or less
• 1:59:46
  Speaker 6: and influence him, just as we sometimes experience the after
• 1:59:49
  Speaker 6: influence of a bad dream in the daytime. How to
• 1:59:52
  Speaker 6: choose a good developing medium. The practical conclusion to be
• 1:59:56
  Speaker 6: drawn from all this is that it is very dangerous
• 1:59:58
  Speaker 6: to the mental and moral health of a psychic to
• 2:00:01
  Speaker 6: develop under the guidance of a medium who is mentally, morally,
• 2:00:04
  Speaker 6: physically or spiritually ill, for these conditions will possibly sooner
• 2:00:09
  Speaker 6: or later be taken on, and they are liable to
• 2:00:11
  Speaker 6: influence the medium to his own detriment. Be most careful therefore,
• 2:00:16
  Speaker 6: in selecting the psychic under whom you develop, for your
• 2:00:18
  Speaker 6: own future progress and happiness will depend largely upon that.
• 2:00:24
  Speaker 6: End of chapter six.
• 2:00:27
  Speaker 7: Chapter seven, Know Thyself was a mandate of the Delphic oracle.
• 2:00:36
  Speaker 7: Before man can undertake to govern and control external forces,
• 2:00:42
  Speaker 7: he must learn to control those within himself, For only
• 2:00:46
  Speaker 7: by doing this can success be attained. Man utilizes his
• 2:00:53
  Speaker 7: mind as he would a tool, every day of his life.
• 2:00:58
  Speaker 7: The better we are understand our tools, the better workmen
• 2:01:03
  Speaker 7: we are. Hence, he who would succeed must understand the
• 2:01:10
  Speaker 7: workings of his own nature. The cosmic currents. First of all,
• 2:01:17
  Speaker 7: we are told that there are cosmic currents playing to
• 2:01:21
  Speaker 7: and fro in the world, contradictory currents, or streams of thoughts,
• 2:01:26
  Speaker 7: into which we are liable to enter unconsciously, even against
• 2:01:31
  Speaker 7: our will. Some of these currents are beneficial, others are harmful.
• 2:01:41
  Speaker 7: Some natures are strong to stem the tide and achieve
• 2:01:46
  Speaker 7: success against the greatest obstacles. Others can extricate themselves, but
• 2:01:54
  Speaker 7: partially others do not do so at all. For this
• 2:02:01
  Speaker 7: reason we have the successes and the failures in life.
• 2:02:08
  Speaker 7: It depends partly upon outside influences, partly upon ourselves. The
• 2:02:17
  Speaker 7: first we cannot control, except indirectly through ourselves. How to
• 2:02:25
  Speaker 7: make a success of your life? Here is the explanation
• 2:02:32
  Speaker 7: of a great fallacy which many people make. They imagine
• 2:02:36
  Speaker 7: that they can be their own will mold circumstance to
• 2:02:41
  Speaker 7: soothe themselves. This is only partly true. Let me explain,
• 2:02:50
  Speaker 7: we must not turn our power of mind upon others.
• 2:02:55
  Speaker 7: We must turn it upon ourselves in such a way
• 2:02:59
  Speaker 7: that it will make is stronger, more positive, more capable,
• 2:03:04
  Speaker 7: and more efficient. And as we develop in this manner,
• 2:03:09
  Speaker 7: success will come of itself. The way to control circumstances
• 2:03:15
  Speaker 7: is to control the forces within yourself, to make a
• 2:03:19
  Speaker 7: greater man of yourself. And as you become greater and
• 2:03:24
  Speaker 7: more competent, you will naturally gravitate into better circumstances. We
• 2:03:31
  Speaker 7: should remember that like attracts like. For as doctor Larson says,
• 2:03:39
  Speaker 7: those people who fail and who continue to fail all
• 2:03:43
  Speaker 7: along the line fail because the power of their minds
• 2:03:47
  Speaker 7: is either in a habitual negative side or is always misdirected.
• 2:03:56
  Speaker 7: If the power of mind is not working positively and
• 2:04:00
  Speaker 7: constructively for a certain goal, you are not going to succeed.
• 2:04:06
  Speaker 7: If your mind is not positive, it is negative, and
• 2:04:10
  Speaker 7: negative minds float with the stream. We must remember that
• 2:04:16
  Speaker 7: we are in the midst of all kinds of circumstances,
• 2:04:20
  Speaker 7: some of which are for us and some of which
• 2:04:23
  Speaker 7: are against us. And we will either have to make
• 2:04:27
  Speaker 7: our own way or drift. And if we drift, we
• 2:04:32
  Speaker 7: go wherever the stream goes. But most of the streams
• 2:04:38
  Speaker 7: of human life are found to flow into the world
• 2:04:42
  Speaker 7: of the ordinary and the inferior. Therefore, if you drift,
• 2:04:47
  Speaker 7: you will drift with the inferior, and your goal will
• 2:04:51
  Speaker 7: be failure. The three Laws of success. In order to
• 2:04:58
  Speaker 7: achieve mental and space spiritual success, three rules must be observed,
• 2:05:04
  Speaker 7: which are of prime importance. The first is that you
• 2:05:09
  Speaker 7: must have in your mind a clear conception of what
• 2:05:12
  Speaker 7: you want. If you have not any definite goal in view,
• 2:05:17
  Speaker 7: you cannot expect to achieve any great success because you
• 2:05:23
  Speaker 7: will be constantly wasting your energy in byways without directing
• 2:05:29
  Speaker 7: it all towards one certain point. The second is you
• 2:05:34
  Speaker 7: must make your thinking positive and not negative. This does
• 2:05:39
  Speaker 7: not mean that you must grind your teeth, frown and
• 2:05:43
  Speaker 7: try to dominate everyone you meet. It means that you
• 2:05:48
  Speaker 7: possess a calm self assurance and the inner conviction and
• 2:05:53
  Speaker 7: the certainty that you will succeed Physically. This state of
• 2:05:59
  Speaker 7: things may be fault in a full firm sensation throughout
• 2:06:03
  Speaker 7: the nervous system. The third rule is all your thinking
• 2:06:09
  Speaker 7: must be constructive, that is, built about the goal or
• 2:06:14
  Speaker 7: object you have in mind. If you spend only a
• 2:06:18
  Speaker 7: fraction of your energy of thought in any one direction,
• 2:06:22
  Speaker 7: you cannot expect to progress very far in that line.
• 2:06:29
  Speaker 7: The runner who tries at the same time to work
• 2:06:32
  Speaker 7: out a mathematical problem in its head will not be
• 2:06:36
  Speaker 7: first in the race. Constructive thinking means that you must
• 2:06:41
  Speaker 7: consistently and continually think of and about what you wish
• 2:06:46
  Speaker 7: to accomplish. The sooner you learn to do this, the
• 2:06:51
  Speaker 7: sooner will success be us. Obstacles in life present great difficulties.
• 2:07:00
  Speaker 7: Up to a certain point. They may be looked upon
• 2:07:04
  Speaker 7: as helps to character and progress, and the more these
• 2:07:09
  Speaker 7: are overcome, the stronger will your character ultimately be. At
• 2:07:15
  Speaker 7: the same time, this may be overdone, and there is
• 2:07:19
  Speaker 7: such a thing as kicking against the pricks flowing with
• 2:07:26
  Speaker 7: the tide if you're striving your best, and every man
• 2:07:31
  Speaker 7: knows in his heart when he is doing his best
• 2:07:35
  Speaker 7: to accomplish a certain thing, and more and more difficulties
• 2:07:40
  Speaker 7: seem to multiply the further you progress. You may, under
• 2:07:45
  Speaker 7: certain conditions assume that it is not meant for you
• 2:07:52
  Speaker 7: at this particular time. To do this particular thing, and
• 2:07:57
  Speaker 7: you may shortly look back and see how you will
• 2:08:00
  Speaker 7: prevented from undertaking something that might have proven disastrous. In
• 2:08:07
  Speaker 7: this way, it is possible to float with these currents
• 2:08:10
  Speaker 7: instead of stemming them to advanish. Missus Town tells us
• 2:08:16
  Speaker 7: that she, at one period of her life, could do
• 2:08:21
  Speaker 7: nothing on account of her desire to rest and sleep.
• 2:08:25
  Speaker 7: She determined that she would give this full play. She
• 2:08:30
  Speaker 7: went to bed and stayed there for fourteen days and nights.
• 2:08:35
  Speaker 7: At the end of that time, she felt that at
• 2:08:40
  Speaker 7: last she had had enough rest, and thence forward work
• 2:08:46
  Speaker 7: became a joy instead of a burden. It proved to
• 2:08:51
  Speaker 7: be the turning point in her life, acting for our
• 2:08:58
  Speaker 7: ultimate good. There are therefore cosmic currents swaying to and fro,
• 2:09:06
  Speaker 7: flowing back and forth throughout the psychic universe, and the
• 2:09:11
  Speaker 7: more we can sense or become receptive to these currents,
• 2:09:15
  Speaker 7: the more will our life be guided and directed for
• 2:09:18
  Speaker 7: us by an intelligent control greater than our own. We
• 2:09:25
  Speaker 7: all think that we know exactly what we want to
• 2:09:28
  Speaker 7: do and what is best for us, Yet this is
• 2:09:33
  Speaker 7: not always the case. To a mind vaster and more
• 2:09:38
  Speaker 7: inclusive than ours, the more opposite of this may seem
• 2:09:42
  Speaker 7: better for our ultimate good. For example, a dog has
• 2:09:49
  Speaker 7: to have a tooth extracted. The painful operation of removing
• 2:09:54
  Speaker 7: the tooth is all that the dog can see. To him.
• 2:10:00
  Speaker 7: It is all painful, nothing beneficial to us, on the contrary,
• 2:10:06
  Speaker 7: who see not only what a dog sees. But more,
• 2:10:10
  Speaker 7: it is clear that the dog will eventually be better
• 2:10:13
  Speaker 7: for the removal of his teeth. Though it is a
• 2:10:17
  Speaker 7: painful experience applied to ourselves, it is most probably true
• 2:10:24
  Speaker 7: that our painful experiences in life can be interpreted in
• 2:10:28
  Speaker 7: a similar manner, and that many of them could we
• 2:10:33
  Speaker 7: see them in that light for our ultimate good. How
• 2:10:40
  Speaker 7: these laws apply to psychic developments? Now, let us apply
• 2:10:45
  Speaker 7: what we have learned to psychic development and the cultivation
• 2:10:50
  Speaker 7: of mediumistic gifts. We have found that there are magnetic
• 2:10:55
  Speaker 7: and spiritual forces playing upon us from different directions here
• 2:10:59
  Speaker 7: and there all over the world. Some of these are
• 2:11:03
  Speaker 7: for our own good, others are not. We must learn
• 2:11:08
  Speaker 7: to become sensitive to these currents which are beneficial to us,
• 2:11:12
  Speaker 7: and shout out those which are not. How are we
• 2:11:17
  Speaker 7: two do this? In the first place, It is necessary
• 2:11:23
  Speaker 7: for this student who really desires to obtain this guidance
• 2:11:27
  Speaker 7: to make certain renunciations or sacrifices. He cannot be in
• 2:11:33
  Speaker 7: the world and at the same time receive the spiritual perfection.
• 2:11:39
  Speaker 7: One cannot both eat one's cake and have it, So
• 2:11:44
  Speaker 7: you must make up your mind just what you wish
• 2:11:47
  Speaker 7: to do. Many mediums, unfortunately, do not develop along these lines.
• 2:11:54
  Speaker 7: The cultivation of the spiritual self is not altogether the
• 2:11:59
  Speaker 7: same thing as a cultivation of the psychic self obtaining
• 2:12:04
  Speaker 7: psychic phenomena. The one great reproach which has been made
• 2:12:09
  Speaker 7: against many mediums and spiritualists is that spiritualists are everything
• 2:12:16
  Speaker 7: but spiritual. Doubtless, this is not true of spiritualists anymore
• 2:12:24
  Speaker 7: than the followers of any other religious faith. Human nature
• 2:12:29
  Speaker 7: is weak, and we all fall from grace. But we
• 2:12:37
  Speaker 7: are now only talking of those who sincerely desire personal
• 2:12:41
  Speaker 7: spiritual enlightenment and who are willing to make some sacrifices
• 2:12:46
  Speaker 7: in order to obtain it. To those who are anxious
• 2:12:51
  Speaker 7: to follow this path, we would say that it is
• 2:12:56
  Speaker 7: unwise to give two full directions thus early in your development.
• 2:13:02
  Speaker 7: This is a question which will be discussed more fully
• 2:13:06
  Speaker 7: in chapter forty two. For the present, a few practical
• 2:13:12
  Speaker 7: points may be helpful both in your daily life and
• 2:13:16
  Speaker 7: your psychic unfoldment. Rules to follow, as is so often
• 2:13:22
  Speaker 7: insisted upon, the health must be maintained. If this is
• 2:13:27
  Speaker 7: not done, you render yourself liable to nervous exhaustion and
• 2:13:32
  Speaker 7: through this to obsession. Your clear common sense and interest
• 2:13:38
  Speaker 7: in the things of the world must to a certain
• 2:13:41
  Speaker 7: extent be kept, otherwise the judgment will become unbalanced. Cultivate sympathy, harmony,
• 2:13:54
  Speaker 7: interest in your fellow beings. Cultivate your own sensitiveness along
• 2:14:01
  Speaker 7: ordinary psychic lines by various special exercises. When you obtain
• 2:14:08
  Speaker 7: a certain number of psychic phenomena in this way, you
• 2:14:12
  Speaker 7: will be far more receptive than you were before. Cultivate
• 2:14:18
  Speaker 7: at all times what may be called a listening attitude
• 2:14:22
  Speaker 7: of the soul. This is particularly important and practically valuable
• 2:14:29
  Speaker 7: when you are in doubt upon any question. Retire to
• 2:14:33
  Speaker 7: a quiet room and ask your own higher self what
• 2:14:40
  Speaker 7: is the best thing for you to do. At first,
• 2:14:44
  Speaker 7: these replies will be very vague and indistinct, but as
• 2:14:49
  Speaker 7: you progress in your development, you will find that they
• 2:14:53
  Speaker 7: will become clearer and clearer, and you will soon get
• 2:14:57
  Speaker 7: definite and clearly formed reply. In answer to this mental questioning.
• 2:15:04
  Speaker 7: As soon as you have progressed thus far, you may
• 2:15:08
  Speaker 7: be show that you have begun to sense the cosmic
• 2:15:11
  Speaker 7: currents which flow about you. And when once you have
• 2:15:20
  Speaker 7: done this, it is thenceforward only a matter of personal developments.
• 2:15:28
  Speaker 7: This will be dealt with more fully in several of
• 2:15:31
  Speaker 7: the chapters which follow. End of chapter seven.
• 2:15:38
  Speaker 8: Chapter eight, the Cultivation of spiritual gifts. There are two
• 2:15:44
  Speaker 8: ways of regarding any particular fact. The first is to
• 2:15:49
  Speaker 8: observe it from without. The second is to experience it
• 2:15:53
  Speaker 8: from within. If we look at an orange, we observe
• 2:15:57
  Speaker 8: it from without, and we could never experience it from
• 2:16:01
  Speaker 8: within unless we were the orange. The only things that
• 2:16:07
  Speaker 8: can experience sensations from within in this way are minds.
• 2:16:13
  Speaker 8: Each mind can inwardly experience and see objectively its own sensations,
• 2:16:20
  Speaker 8: and as so far as we know, it is the
• 2:16:23
  Speaker 8: only thing in the world which can do so. All
• 2:16:28
  Speaker 8: psychic experience is therefore inward or sensitive, and can never
• 2:16:34
  Speaker 8: be felt by another person, but must be experienced by
• 2:16:38
  Speaker 8: him in order that he should appreciate and understand the
• 2:16:42
  Speaker 8: mental state you, yourself are experiencing. It is the same with
• 2:16:48
  Speaker 8: psychic phenomena. If anyone experiences any phenomena of this character,
• 2:16:54
  Speaker 8: he can never impart this knowledge to others except in
• 2:16:59
  Speaker 8: a very raw about whey, and for these others to
• 2:17:03
  Speaker 8: understand the phenomena, they themselves must experience them. It is
• 2:17:08
  Speaker 8: for this reason that it is so difficult for psychics
• 2:17:12
  Speaker 8: to express and explain to outsiders the character of the
• 2:17:16
  Speaker 8: sensations and phenomena they are experiencing. Everything being so largely symbolic,
• 2:17:24
  Speaker 8: and our language being so poor in this direction, it
• 2:17:28
  Speaker 8: is often very difficult for them to explain precisely what
• 2:17:32
  Speaker 8: they mean. Developing mediumship. We do not know as yet
• 2:17:40
  Speaker 8: exactly what mediumship is. There is much evidence to show
• 2:17:45
  Speaker 8: that it is very often hereditary and runs through three
• 2:17:48
  Speaker 8: or four generations, just like any other gift. With some
• 2:17:54
  Speaker 8: mediumship appears in childhood and seems to be a very
• 2:17:58
  Speaker 8: part of their constitution. The majority, however, develop it later
• 2:18:03
  Speaker 8: on in life as the result of coming into contact
• 2:18:07
  Speaker 8: with mediums or developing it within themselves by experiments. Some
• 2:18:14
  Speaker 8: retain their mediumship throughout life. Others experience it only for
• 2:18:19
  Speaker 8: a few months, a few weeks, a few days in
• 2:18:23
  Speaker 8: some cases, only a few seconds in some cases, mediumship
• 2:18:29
  Speaker 8: is terminated suddenly. In other cases it is gradually lost
• 2:18:34
  Speaker 8: through a period of years. One who has at any
• 2:18:37
  Speaker 8: time experienced mediumship can usually recall it by reason of
• 2:18:42
  Speaker 8: its persistence, no matter how long afterwards. Controlling phenomena in mediumship,
• 2:18:51
  Speaker 8: or when obtaining psychic phenomena of any character, we are
• 2:18:55
  Speaker 8: as yet experimenting, as it were, with forces and laws
• 2:19:00
  Speaker 8: as yet largely unknown, just as the early scientists experimented
• 2:19:04
  Speaker 8: with electricity. Indeed, we do not yet know what electricity is. However,
• 2:19:11
  Speaker 8: at the present day we can control it perfectly, and
• 2:19:14
  Speaker 8: it is to be hoped that the time will come
• 2:19:17
  Speaker 8: when mediumship and all psychic phenomena can be controlled in
• 2:19:21
  Speaker 8: a similar manner. Even though we may never know the
• 2:19:24
  Speaker 8: innermost essence of psychic power, if we could do that,
• 2:19:29
  Speaker 8: it would be at any rate on a workable basis,
• 2:19:33
  Speaker 8: so to speak, mediumistic exercises. All mediumistic exercises developed this
• 2:19:42
  Speaker 8: power to some extent, but in different directions. The following
• 2:19:47
  Speaker 8: are a few of the methods which may be pursued
• 2:19:50
  Speaker 8: in cultivating and developing the psychic self and the inner
• 2:19:53
  Speaker 8: spiritual center of our being, as distinct from purely physical phenomena.
• 2:20:00
  Speaker 8: As before said, it is essential that we should understand
• 2:20:04
  Speaker 8: and control ourselves before we endeavor to control outside forces.
• 2:20:10
  Speaker 8: Much may be learned through what is known as introspection,
• 2:20:15
  Speaker 8: that is, the turning inward of the attention upon the
• 2:20:19
  Speaker 8: inner self instead of outward upon the external world. If
• 2:20:24
  Speaker 8: you close your eyes and do this and try to
• 2:20:27
  Speaker 8: find out the nature of your true inner being, you
• 2:20:31
  Speaker 8: will probably experience a peculiar sensation. You will find that,
• 2:20:37
  Speaker 8: like happiness, it continually eludes you, and that when you
• 2:20:42
  Speaker 8: think you have grasped your own self, it is only
• 2:20:45
  Speaker 8: a state of mind which has since passed and is
• 2:20:48
  Speaker 8: now only a memory. Practice this introspection for a few
• 2:20:54
  Speaker 8: minutes each day, and before long you will be surprised
• 2:20:58
  Speaker 8: at your development in this direction, for you will be
• 2:21:02
  Speaker 8: enabled to come into far closer touch with yourself than formerly.
• 2:21:07
  Speaker 8: The inner self will become illuminated, as it were, mastering
• 2:21:13
  Speaker 8: the self. This practice will lead to the habit of
• 2:21:18
  Speaker 8: escaping from our sense perceptions, to which most of us
• 2:21:21
  Speaker 8: are slaves. As you get away from these and are
• 2:21:26
  Speaker 8: enabled to withdraw more and more fully into your inner self,
• 2:21:31
  Speaker 8: you will experience a sensation of reality and the ability
• 2:21:35
  Speaker 8: to perceive the truth of things in a manner hitherto
• 2:21:39
  Speaker 8: undreamed of truth exists, we do not perceive it for
• 2:21:45
  Speaker 8: the simple reason that the veil of sense is between
• 2:21:48
  Speaker 8: it and us. Lift this veil and you will perceive
• 2:21:53
  Speaker 8: truth clearly as in the light of day. This practice
• 2:21:59
  Speaker 8: of acquiring greater mastery over self will also put you
• 2:22:03
  Speaker 8: more closely in touch with the great magnetic power currents
• 2:22:07
  Speaker 8: of the universe, so that you will never feel exhausted
• 2:22:11
  Speaker 8: or in need of nervous energy. There being an unlimited
• 2:22:16
  Speaker 8: supply of energy in this universe, all we have to
• 2:22:20
  Speaker 8: do is to learn to tap it, which we can
• 2:22:24
  Speaker 8: do by these methods of psychic development, and we can
• 2:22:29
  Speaker 8: draw upon it in any quantity we choose. We will
• 2:22:33
  Speaker 8: also be put in touch with higher conditions how spirit
• 2:22:40
  Speaker 8: unites us. With increased spiritual development and spiritual life, we
• 2:22:46
  Speaker 8: will perceive that there is a universal brotherhood of mankind,
• 2:22:50
  Speaker 8: and that nothing is really separated from anything else, That
• 2:22:54
  Speaker 8: we are not separated from our neighbor, but that we
• 2:22:57
  Speaker 8: are united in the great universe, so infinite intelligence which
• 2:23:02
  Speaker 8: combines all. We may compare ourselves to trees. In this respect,
• 2:23:08
  Speaker 8: each tree is apparently a separate being, whose leaves whisper
• 2:23:13
  Speaker 8: to one another, and whose branches sometimes touch in the
• 2:23:17
  Speaker 8: swaying of the evening breezes, but their roots are sunk
• 2:23:22
  Speaker 8: deep into the ground and are often intertwined with another.
• 2:23:27
  Speaker 8: While the common earth unites them all in a similar way,
• 2:23:31
  Speaker 8: we are united in the spiritual universe, of which we
• 2:23:35
  Speaker 8: form a part. Fundamentally, physically, we are united one with
• 2:23:42
  Speaker 8: another meditation. Meditation may be considered one of the methods
• 2:23:49
  Speaker 8: by means of which we awaken the inner self, and
• 2:23:53
  Speaker 8: frequently awaken our spiritual or astral senses, so as to
• 2:23:58
  Speaker 8: cause them to function on another plane at the same time.
• 2:24:03
  Speaker 8: If this developing process is done properly, we build up
• 2:24:08
  Speaker 8: walls of power about ourselves which others will find it
• 2:24:12
  Speaker 8: impossible to break through by mental or hypnotic influence, even
• 2:24:17
  Speaker 8: should they desire to do so. We cover ourselves with
• 2:24:22
  Speaker 8: a sphere of energy through which nothing can pass against
• 2:24:26
  Speaker 8: our will. The power of thought. All thoughts sent out
• 2:24:33
  Speaker 8: by us into the universe have some definite purpose and
• 2:24:37
  Speaker 8: have a certain effect, both upon ourselves and upon others.
• 2:24:44
  Speaker 8: Thoughts are things. We can create a thought as surely
• 2:24:48
  Speaker 8: as we can create a house or a chair, and
• 2:24:52
  Speaker 8: once created, there is no telling where this thought may
• 2:24:55
  Speaker 8: stop or how lasting its actions may be. If if
• 2:25:00
  Speaker 8: these thoughts are good, helpful, and useful, they often return
• 2:25:04
  Speaker 8: to us like boomerangs, with the added happiness and power
• 2:25:08
  Speaker 8: which they have accumulated from others of a similar character
• 2:25:12
  Speaker 8: in their flight through space. On the contrary, evil thoughts
• 2:25:17
  Speaker 8: come back to us in the same way, and it
• 2:25:20
  Speaker 8: will be found that they always return to their sender
• 2:25:24
  Speaker 8: with added power, for evil or for good. See to it, therefore,
• 2:25:30
  Speaker 8: that you only send out thoughts of the highest and best.
• 2:25:35
  Speaker 8: Some people, when they first realize this fact, are almost
• 2:25:39
  Speaker 8: afraid at first to think at all, for fear of
• 2:25:42
  Speaker 8: the effects their thoughts may have. But this is a
• 2:25:47
  Speaker 8: great mistake. Expression is the first law of life. We
• 2:25:53
  Speaker 8: must learn to express express. The chief outward difference between
• 2:25:59
  Speaker 8: a living being and an a corpse is that one
• 2:26:01
  Speaker 8: can express itself and the other cannot. Do not be
• 2:26:05
  Speaker 8: afraid to express yourself fully and forcibly in any direction.
• 2:26:10
  Speaker 8: Even the bodily expression of our feelings and emotions is
• 2:26:14
  Speaker 8: quite justified. There is nothing to be ashamed of in
• 2:26:18
  Speaker 8: conviction or in passion. It is the abuse of these
• 2:26:22
  Speaker 8: which is detrimental. The use of the will. In a
• 2:26:28
  Speaker 8: similar way, the power of the will may be used
• 2:26:32
  Speaker 8: for good or for evil, as the case may be,
• 2:26:35
  Speaker 8: and it has a great power in both directions, as
• 2:26:39
  Speaker 8: the history of occultism has shown us. In the one case,
• 2:26:44
  Speaker 8: we have as the result of the exercise of this power,
• 2:26:48
  Speaker 8: various psychic phenomena, marvelous cures, and all the varied accomplishments
• 2:26:54
  Speaker 8: of this world. On the other hand, we have the
• 2:26:57
  Speaker 8: phenomena of witchcraft, black magic, harmful absent treatment, and crime.
• 2:27:06
  Speaker 8: It all depends into which channel we direct the energy
• 2:27:09
  Speaker 8: of our will. The soul must learn to find and
• 2:27:13
  Speaker 8: experience itself fully before it can consider itself thoroughly alive
• 2:27:18
  Speaker 8: and a fully developed entity. After this realization has been accomplished,
• 2:27:24
  Speaker 8: then and then only should we direct our attention to
• 2:27:29
  Speaker 8: cultivating and directing the latent energies which we possess. Self
• 2:27:36
  Speaker 8: development essential. It is because of this fact that self
• 2:27:41
  Speaker 8: and soul culture is necessary before psychic phenomena are cultivated
• 2:27:47
  Speaker 8: to any great extent. We must learn to know ourselves
• 2:27:52
  Speaker 8: to preserve a just and careful balance of judgment, sympathy, understanding,
• 2:27:57
  Speaker 8: and intuition. If we do not possess these qualities, we
• 2:28:02
  Speaker 8: shall never become mediums on the highest plane. On the contrary,
• 2:28:08
  Speaker 8: we may draw to ourselves while developing mediumship harmful or
• 2:28:12
  Speaker 8: lying intelligences which we have attracted into our magnetic aura.
• 2:28:19
  Speaker 8: So I cannot too strongly advise and warn you to
• 2:28:24
  Speaker 8: practice these self developing exercises before cultivating external psychic or
• 2:28:30
  Speaker 8: mediumistic powers. Mediumship opens the doors to influence and powers
• 2:28:36
  Speaker 8: over which we have little control, and we must be
• 2:28:39
  Speaker 8: sure that before the doors of the soul are swung back,
• 2:28:44
  Speaker 8: we must be prepared to receive whoever enters by reason
• 2:28:49
  Speaker 8: of our own self control and inner powers. Otherwise we
• 2:28:54
  Speaker 8: may be unable to close the doors when we wish to,
• 2:28:59
  Speaker 8: or the door of reason may become altogether unhinged. In
• 2:29:05
  Speaker 8: giving these warnings, I do not wish to frighten the reader,
• 2:29:08
  Speaker 8: since there is no necessity to become alarmed if caution
• 2:29:12
  Speaker 8: be exercised in this development. Only I wish to emphasize
• 2:29:18
  Speaker 8: the necessity for this caution. End of Chapter eight.
• 2:29:25
  Speaker 9: Chapter nine psychometry. What is psychometry? Doctor J. Rhodes Buchanan
• 2:29:34
  Speaker 9: says the word psychometry coined in eighteen forty two to
• 2:29:38
  Speaker 9: express the character of a new science and art is
• 2:29:42
  Speaker 9: the most pregnant and important word that has been added
• 2:29:45
  Speaker 9: to the English language. Coined from the Greek psyche soul
• 2:29:50
  Speaker 9: and metron measure, it literally signifies soul measuring. In our
• 2:29:56
  Speaker 9: modern use of the word, however, it means something a
• 2:29:59
  Speaker 9: little different from this. A psychic who picks up an
• 2:30:03
  Speaker 9: object and in connection with it, gets certain psychic impressions
• 2:30:08
  Speaker 9: is said to psychometrize the object, and this process is
• 2:30:11
  Speaker 9: known as psychometry experiments. The famous Professor Denton, a mineralogist
• 2:30:19
  Speaker 9: whose wife possessed remarkable powers in this direction, conducted a
• 2:30:23
  Speaker 9: number of experiments, some of which are described as follows.
• 2:30:27
  Speaker 9: He gave his wife a specimen from the carboniferous formation.
• 2:30:32
  Speaker 9: Closing her eyes, she described swamps and trees with their
• 2:30:35
  Speaker 9: tufted heads and scaly trunks, with the great frog like
• 2:30:38
  Speaker 9: animals that existed in that age. He got a specimen
• 2:30:42
  Speaker 9: of the lava that flowed from the volcano in Hawaii
• 2:30:45
  Speaker 9: in eighteen forty eight. His sister, by its means, described
• 2:30:49
  Speaker 9: a boiling ocean, a cataract of golden lava that almost
• 2:30:53
  Speaker 9: equaled Niagara in size, a small fragment of a meteorite
• 2:30:58
  Speaker 9: that fell at Painsvillow was given to his wife's mother,
• 2:31:03
  Speaker 9: a sensitive who did not then believe in psychometry. This
• 2:31:07
  Speaker 9: is what she said. I seemed to be traveling away,
• 2:31:12
  Speaker 9: away through nothing. Right forward, I see what looks like
• 2:31:16
  Speaker 9: stars and mist. I seemed to be taken right up.
• 2:31:20
  Speaker 9: The other specimens take me down. His wife independently gave
• 2:31:24
  Speaker 9: a similar description, but saw it revolving and its tale
• 2:31:28
  Speaker 9: of sparks not due to telepathy. Professor Denton took steps
• 2:31:34
  Speaker 9: to prove that this was not mind reading by wrapping
• 2:31:37
  Speaker 9: the specimens in paper, shaking them up in a hat,
• 2:31:40
  Speaker 9: and allowing the sensitive to pick out one and describe
• 2:31:43
  Speaker 9: it without anyone knowing which one it was. Among them
• 2:31:47
  Speaker 9: was a fragment of brick from ancient Rome and timmony
• 2:31:50
  Speaker 9: from Borneo, silver from Mexico, basalt from Fingal's cave. Each
• 2:31:56
  Speaker 9: place was described correctly by the sensitive in the most
• 2:31:59
  Speaker 9: minute Diti, These are but examples which could be multiplied.
• 2:32:03
  Speaker 9: Did space permit? Nearly everyone possesses a certain amount of
• 2:32:07
  Speaker 9: power in this direction, and it only needs cultivation to
• 2:32:11
  Speaker 9: bring it to light. Before proceeding to the practical side
• 2:32:14
  Speaker 9: of this question, a few words of explanation of the
• 2:32:18
  Speaker 9: theory involved will doubtless be of interest to the student
• 2:32:23
  Speaker 9: the explanation. It has been said that every object possesses
• 2:32:27
  Speaker 9: its own peculiar psychic influence fluid or aura, which may
• 2:32:31
  Speaker 9: be recognized by one sensitive enough to perceive it. Human
• 2:32:36
  Speaker 9: beings may transfer a certain amount of this fluid to objects,
• 2:32:40
  Speaker 9: leaving them impressed with their influence. We see this in
• 2:32:44
  Speaker 9: the case of magnetic cures and in some cases of
• 2:32:47
  Speaker 9: haunted houses. In fact, as we shall see in chapter
• 2:32:50
  Speaker 9: twenty eight devoted to that subject, this is one of
• 2:32:54
  Speaker 9: the theories which has been advanced to explain haunted houses.
• 2:32:58
  Speaker 9: Objects which have been worn close to the skin, or
• 2:33:01
  Speaker 9: which have been brought into contact for a long time
• 2:33:03
  Speaker 9: with the magnetism of any particular person, seem to retain
• 2:33:07
  Speaker 9: a large share of this aura, and such objects may
• 2:33:11
  Speaker 9: readily be psychometrized. Their aur may be read and interpreted
• 2:33:15
  Speaker 9: according to the ability of the psychic. We often see
• 2:33:19
  Speaker 9: demonstrations of this character given in public. Again, trance mediums
• 2:33:24
  Speaker 9: are very sensitive to influences of this character. And if
• 2:33:27
  Speaker 9: we place an object which has belonged to some person
• 2:33:30
  Speaker 9: who has recently passed over into the hands of a
• 2:33:33
  Speaker 9: good trance medium. He will frequently be enabled to get
• 2:33:37
  Speaker 9: into contact with that person through the magnetism of the
• 2:33:40
  Speaker 9: article in question, and in that way information may be
• 2:33:43
  Speaker 9: obtained which otherwise could not have been secured. How to
• 2:33:47
  Speaker 9: preserve the influence, articles of this character often lose their properties,
• 2:33:53
  Speaker 9: their virtue, we might almost express it, by being left
• 2:33:56
  Speaker 9: around or exposed to the handling of others, and for
• 2:34:00
  Speaker 9: this reason it is best to keep such articles carefully
• 2:34:03
  Speaker 9: wrapped up in thin rubber cloth, which may be procured
• 2:34:06
  Speaker 9: from any drugstore. In this way, their properties are preserved.
• 2:34:11
  Speaker 9: Just what this influence is with which the articles become
• 2:34:14
  Speaker 9: impregnated we are unable to say. Probably it is a
• 2:34:18
  Speaker 9: form of the vital force which animates the universe. Yet,
• 2:34:22
  Speaker 9: even supposing that this could flow into the object, and
• 2:34:26
  Speaker 9: that the psychic could sense it, we have yet to
• 2:34:28
  Speaker 9: explain why it should be that this particular vital energy
• 2:34:32
  Speaker 9: should be enabled to arouse within the psychic the flood
• 2:34:35
  Speaker 9: of information he receives a casic records Professor Draper has
• 2:34:40
  Speaker 9: said a shadow never falls upon a wall without leaving
• 2:34:44
  Speaker 9: thereon a permanent trace, a trace made visible by resorting
• 2:34:48
  Speaker 9: to proper processes on the walls of private apartments, where
• 2:34:52
  Speaker 9: we think the eye of intrusion is altogether shut out,
• 2:34:55
  Speaker 9: and our retirement can never be profaned. There exists the
• 2:34:59
  Speaker 9: records of our acts, silhouettes of whatever we have done.
• 2:35:03
  Speaker 9: It is a crushing thought to whoever has committed secret crime,
• 2:35:07
  Speaker 9: that the picture of his deed and the very echo
• 2:35:09
  Speaker 9: of his words may be seen and heard countless years
• 2:35:13
  Speaker 9: after he has gone the way of all flesh. There
• 2:35:17
  Speaker 9: are certain analogies for this in the physical world. If
• 2:35:20
  Speaker 9: sunlight falls upon a sheet of paper and we place
• 2:35:23
  Speaker 9: upon it a key, the outline of this key will
• 2:35:26
  Speaker 9: be marked upon the paper and may be recovered years
• 2:35:29
  Speaker 9: later by suitable means. If thoughts are things, they doubtless
• 2:35:34
  Speaker 9: impress our surroundings in much the same way. And the
• 2:35:38
  Speaker 9: objects which we psychometrize are influenced by means of our
• 2:35:42
  Speaker 9: thoughts and the human aura or fluid, so that they
• 2:35:46
  Speaker 9: retain them within it and may be read back by
• 2:35:49
  Speaker 9: the sensitive the interpretation of impressions received. In all psychometry,
• 2:35:55
  Speaker 9: we must remember that the interpretation of the impressions received
• 2:35:58
  Speaker 9: is largely symbol, just as the printed word of a
• 2:36:02
  Speaker 9: book is symbolic the thought of the author lying behind it.
• 2:36:06
  Speaker 9: So impressions stored within objects and sensed by the psychic
• 2:36:10
  Speaker 9: must also be symbolic and must be suitably interpreted by
• 2:36:14
  Speaker 9: the psychometrist. Thus, when he places a geological specimen on
• 2:36:18
  Speaker 9: his forehead and describes an antediluvian monster roaring and walking about,
• 2:36:24
  Speaker 9: no one but a very shallow individual would imagine for
• 2:36:27
  Speaker 9: a moment that the psychometrist was actually seeing the original.
• 2:36:31
  Speaker 9: He simply got an impression of that era of the
• 2:36:33
  Speaker 9: world's history and symbolized it subconsciously in the form of
• 2:36:37
  Speaker 9: this roaring monster. In obtaining impressions from an object, we
• 2:36:41
  Speaker 9: must endeavor to become as receptive and sensitive as possible.
• 2:36:45
  Speaker 9: A few preliminary exercises will enable you to do this
• 2:36:49
  Speaker 9: to much better advantage than you otherwise would be enabled to.
• 2:36:56
  Speaker 9: Exercises for developing sensitiveness one cultivate the sensitiveness of your fingertips.
• 2:37:03
  Speaker 9: You may do this effectively by placing in a bowl
• 2:37:06
  Speaker 9: water of the same temperature as the body. Now, close
• 2:37:09
  Speaker 9: your eyes and place your fingertips just above the surface
• 2:37:12
  Speaker 9: of the water, without looking very Gradually lower the fingertips
• 2:37:16
  Speaker 9: until they come into contact with the water. See whether
• 2:37:20
  Speaker 9: you can tell when this is the case, you will
• 2:37:22
  Speaker 9: be surprised to discover that at first you are quite
• 2:37:26
  Speaker 9: unable to tell when you have touched the water.
• 2:37:30
  Speaker 7: Two.
• 2:37:30
  Speaker 9: Another good exercise is to take a pair of compasses,
• 2:37:34
  Speaker 9: and opening them a quarter of an inch or so,
• 2:37:37
  Speaker 9: touch the fingertips with the two sharp points, the eyes
• 2:37:40
  Speaker 9: being closed. See if you can tell how far apart
• 2:37:43
  Speaker 9: these points are before looking at the compasses. In this way,
• 2:37:48
  Speaker 9: your fingers will acquire a sensitiveness of their own. Three.
• 2:37:53
  Speaker 9: Learn to act upon first impressions. Do not hesitate or
• 2:37:57
  Speaker 9: be afraid to express exactly how you feel and the
• 2:38:00
  Speaker 9: impression that comes to you, no matter how ridiculous it
• 2:38:04
  Speaker 9: may be. There is a useful saying which may help
• 2:38:07
  Speaker 9: you in this respect. It is the first thought is
• 2:38:11
  Speaker 9: the spirits, the second is your own. So learn to
• 2:38:15
  Speaker 9: act on first impressions and put into execution immediately anything
• 2:38:19
  Speaker 9: which comes to you. Four. Analyze your own sensations and
• 2:38:24
  Speaker 9: emotions as best you can after the first impression has
• 2:38:28
  Speaker 9: been received, and see what you feel or experience within yourself.
• 2:38:33
  Speaker 9: Then express this in words to the best of your ability.
• 2:38:36
  Speaker 9: These emotions often express in that form facts which could
• 2:38:40
  Speaker 9: not well be expressed in any other way, though they
• 2:38:43
  Speaker 9: apparently have no connection with the object. For example, if
• 2:38:47
  Speaker 9: you are feeling a watch and you get in connection
• 2:38:50
  Speaker 9: with that watch the feeling of depression and pain in
• 2:38:53
  Speaker 9: the throat state, this foolly, since the person who owned
• 2:38:57
  Speaker 9: the watch may have strangled himself in a fit of melancholy.
• 2:39:00
  Speaker 9: In this way, the emotions you perceive are fully in
• 2:39:03
  Speaker 9: accord with the sensations which you receive from the object.
• 2:39:06
  Speaker 9: Its practical value in daily life, the practice of psychometry
• 2:39:11
  Speaker 9: will often enable you to tell the characteristics of another
• 2:39:14
  Speaker 9: living person, and by this means you will be enabled
• 2:39:18
  Speaker 9: to tell whether or not you will like such a person,
• 2:39:21
  Speaker 9: because you may be attracted or repelled by the psychic
• 2:39:24
  Speaker 9: impressions you receive in connection with the object such a
• 2:39:27
  Speaker 9: person has been wearing. In practical life, information of this
• 2:39:31
  Speaker 9: character is at times very useful. In addition to all this,
• 2:39:37
  Speaker 9: the cultivation of psychometry is often useful in paving the
• 2:39:41
  Speaker 9: way for the cultivation of other psychic phenomena, and will
• 2:39:44
  Speaker 9: prove a useful introduction to them. End of Chapter nine.
• 2:39:50
  Speaker 10: Chapter ten. The human aura. Surrounding every living body and
• 2:39:56
  Speaker 10: some non living materials, there is a halo or aura
• 2:39:59
  Speaker 10: which may be seen under certain exceptional conditions. Clairvoyance have
• 2:40:04
  Speaker 10: always contended that they could see this our surrounding human beings,
• 2:40:08
  Speaker 10: but they were laughed at for their pains by the
• 2:40:10
  Speaker 10: majority of scientists, who continued to disbelieve in its existence.
• 2:40:15
  Speaker 10: About the middle of the nineteenth century, Baron von Richthenbach
• 2:40:19
  Speaker 10: published a book on the aura, paying particular attention to
• 2:40:22
  Speaker 10: the emanations which his sensitives had seen coming from crystals
• 2:40:26
  Speaker 10: and the poles of horseshoe magnets. It is now known
• 2:40:30
  Speaker 10: that both magnets and crystals give off a very noticeable aura,
• 2:40:33
  Speaker 10: and this may be seen by anyone possessing even moderate
• 2:40:36
  Speaker 10: psychic development if they observed these objects when placed in
• 2:40:40
  Speaker 10: a darkened room house studied by the aid of chemical screens.
• 2:40:45
  Speaker 10: Needless to say, all this was disbelieved at the time,
• 2:40:48
  Speaker 10: and it was not until nineteen eleven that the existence
• 2:40:51
  Speaker 10: of the ore was proved scientifically by means of mechanical
• 2:40:54
  Speaker 10: and chemical means. Doctor Kilner, the electrician of Saint Thomas Hospital, London,
• 2:41:00
  Speaker 10: then showed that it is possible for anyone to see
• 2:41:02
  Speaker 10: the aura issuing from a living human being by means
• 2:41:05
  Speaker 10: of especially prepared glass slides containing a chemical named dycianin
• 2:41:11
  Speaker 10: the subject of the experiment is placed against a white
• 2:41:13
  Speaker 10: or black cloth background in a nearly darkened room, and
• 2:41:17
  Speaker 10: must be at least partially nude, as the aura cannot
• 2:41:19
  Speaker 10: be seen through the clothing. The investigator then looks through
• 2:41:22
  Speaker 10: one of the chemical screens of the daylight, then, closing
• 2:41:26
  Speaker 10: his eyes, pulls down the blind so as to make
• 2:41:28
  Speaker 10: the room nearly dark. In this light, the figure of
• 2:41:32
  Speaker 10: the model can be seen only faintly, and if the
• 2:41:34
  Speaker 10: subject is looked at through the glass screen, the aura
• 2:41:37
  Speaker 10: may be seen by nearly anyone possessing good eyesight. In
• 2:41:41
  Speaker 10: this case, the investigator does not have to be a clairvoyant,
• 2:41:44
  Speaker 10: since the eyes are rendered susceptible to certain artificial light
• 2:41:47
  Speaker 10: waves by means of the chemical screens. Usually our eyes
• 2:41:50
  Speaker 10: cannot perceive these waves. In this way, the skeptical world
• 2:41:54
  Speaker 10: has been convinced of the reality of the human aura,
• 2:41:57
  Speaker 10: and it is now considered a proved scientific fact. The
• 2:42:01
  Speaker 10: three auras thus disclosed. The human aura or atmosphere consists
• 2:42:06
  Speaker 10: of a number of layers or strata, one beyond the
• 2:42:08
  Speaker 10: other extending out into space. By means of doctor Kilner's
• 2:42:13
  Speaker 10: chemical screens, three of these divisions may be clearly perceived. First,
• 2:42:18
  Speaker 10: what is called the etheric double. This is seen like
• 2:42:21
  Speaker 10: a dark line slightly grayish in colour, which extends over
• 2:42:24
  Speaker 10: the whole surface of the body, conforming exactly to its shape. Doubtless,
• 2:42:29
  Speaker 10: this is one manifestation of the double or etheric body.
• 2:42:33
  Speaker 10: Beyond this extends the inner aura, which is usually two
• 2:42:36
  Speaker 10: or three inches broad. It conforms to the contour of
• 2:42:40
  Speaker 10: the body throughout, and is more or less colored by
• 2:42:42
  Speaker 10: the health of the individual and by the mental or
• 2:42:44
  Speaker 10: emotional states which may be present at that time. Beyond this,
• 2:42:49
  Speaker 10: again is the outer aura, beginning where the inner our ceases,
• 2:42:53
  Speaker 10: and extending from three to six inches as a rule,
• 2:42:55
  Speaker 10: before it becomes invisible. It extends slightly further in the
• 2:42:59
  Speaker 10: case of women than it does in men. This aura
• 2:43:03
  Speaker 10: is very variable and is greatly influenced by all the
• 2:43:05
  Speaker 10: mental and psychic conditions of the person to whom it belongs.
• 2:43:09
  Speaker 10: Its colors vary also very greatly, but this cannot, as
• 2:43:12
  Speaker 10: a rule, be seen through the screens, because they themselves
• 2:43:15
  Speaker 10: are either dark red or blue. It takes a trained
• 2:43:18
  Speaker 10: clairvoyant to see all the subtle gradations and variations of
• 2:43:21
  Speaker 10: color in the aura. How to train your psychic sight.
• 2:43:26
  Speaker 10: The best way to train yourself to see auras of
• 2:43:29
  Speaker 10: this character is perhaps the following one. In a darkened room,
• 2:43:33
  Speaker 10: study the aspect of a good horseshoe magnet, either suspended
• 2:43:36
  Speaker 10: in the air by a silk thread or placed on
• 2:43:38
  Speaker 10: a support with poles up and vary the position of
• 2:43:41
  Speaker 10: the observation until a faint luminosity is observed at the
• 2:43:44
  Speaker 10: poles and along the edges of the magnet. Two in
• 2:43:49
  Speaker 10: the light repeat the same process, trying to make out
• 2:43:52
  Speaker 10: these lines and the extensions and limitations of the aura.
• 2:43:55
  Speaker 10: It must be understood that this vision can be obtained
• 2:43:58
  Speaker 10: artificially only through the action of the world will and
• 2:44:01
  Speaker 10: by a proper focusing of the eyes. The perception of
• 2:44:03
  Speaker 10: auras requiring a very different focus from ordinary sight, and
• 2:44:06
  Speaker 10: this focusing is very often, nearly always in fact different
• 2:44:10
  Speaker 10: in each of the two eyes. The attempt at focusing
• 2:44:13
  Speaker 10: of the sight must therefore be made with each eye separately,
• 2:44:16
  Speaker 10: and then with both combined. It may happen that one
• 2:44:19
  Speaker 10: eye only can be focused for this special vision, or
• 2:44:22
  Speaker 10: when both are found available, if both focuses are not identical.
• 2:44:25
  Speaker 10: The active use of both eyes at one time may
• 2:44:28
  Speaker 10: destroy the psychic site of this sensitive eye. The aura
• 2:44:32
  Speaker 10: in daylight and darkness. It is important to master the
• 2:44:36
  Speaker 10: faculty of seeing the magnetic aura in the daylight, because
• 2:44:39
  Speaker 10: more complete details can thus be eventually obtained than in
• 2:44:42
  Speaker 10: the dark, and this is the only way to learn
• 2:44:44
  Speaker 10: how to perceive the human aura. For the purpose of
• 2:44:47
  Speaker 10: trying one's vision in broad daylight, take a good horseshoe
• 2:44:50
  Speaker 10: magnet and hold it perpendicularly in front of you, either
• 2:44:54
  Speaker 10: against the background of an open outside light, such as
• 2:44:57
  Speaker 10: can be obtained from looking out from the inside of
• 2:44:59
  Speaker 10: a room through an open window, or against a near
• 2:45:01
  Speaker 10: inside background, for instance, a wider dark wall, according to
• 2:45:05
  Speaker 10: the nature of the light. Then look at the edge
• 2:45:08
  Speaker 10: of the magnet with one eye only, and gradually approach
• 2:45:11
  Speaker 10: it or slide it away from you until you obtain
• 2:45:14
  Speaker 10: the best focus of vision. Look steadily along the same
• 2:45:18
  Speaker 10: point until it dawns on you that a kind of
• 2:45:20
  Speaker 10: a quivering, narrow band of mist or vapor is flowing
• 2:45:23
  Speaker 10: from the metal and prevents your sight from freely perceiving
• 2:45:26
  Speaker 10: the object back of it, producing in fact a sort
• 2:45:29
  Speaker 10: of bending of your visual rays. As soon as you
• 2:45:33
  Speaker 10: realize the presence on the edge of the magnet of
• 2:45:35
  Speaker 10: this current of vaporous mist, which may be compared to
• 2:45:38
  Speaker 10: the appearance of the heated air which arises in summertime
• 2:45:41
  Speaker 10: from hot fields. The first psychic visual victory has been obtained,
• 2:45:46
  Speaker 10: and the perception of the other phenomena connected with the
• 2:45:48
  Speaker 10: aura will only need time perseverance in practice, and once
• 2:45:53
  Speaker 10: the magnet is conquered, one may expect to speedily obtain
• 2:45:55
  Speaker 10: the sight of the beautiful and intricate currents on the
• 2:45:58
  Speaker 10: human body. The structure of the aura. After the aura
• 2:46:03
  Speaker 10: has been perceived and its general layers distinguished, the student
• 2:46:07
  Speaker 10: must turn his attention to its structure and color variations.
• 2:46:11
  Speaker 10: The question of color will be treated in the next chapter,
• 2:46:14
  Speaker 10: which is devoted entirely to that subject. As to the
• 2:46:17
  Speaker 10: structure or composition of the aura, if this be studied carefully,
• 2:46:21
  Speaker 10: it will be found that it is composed in a
• 2:46:23
  Speaker 10: great variety of different ways according to the object or
• 2:46:26
  Speaker 10: person emitting it. Thus, the aura of flowers is very
• 2:46:30
  Speaker 10: different to that of magnets or human beings. The aura
• 2:46:34
  Speaker 10: of flowers it is a very interesting study to try
• 2:46:38
  Speaker 10: and perceive psychically the composition of the aura of various flowers.
• 2:46:43
  Speaker 10: For instance, that of the violet is about one eighth
• 2:46:46
  Speaker 10: of an inch in thickness and composed first of a
• 2:46:48
  Speaker 10: bright light, then a line of dark blue shading away
• 2:46:52
  Speaker 10: into a very light blue, all these following the contour
• 2:46:55
  Speaker 10: of the edge of the leaf. Above these lines is
• 2:46:59
  Speaker 10: a scalloped or a semi linear string or border of
• 2:47:01
  Speaker 10: two rows of little purplish red figures, diamond shaped, very
• 2:47:05
  Speaker 10: regularly distributed so as to form two sets of fourteen
• 2:47:09
  Speaker 10: little diamonds over the space of each small lobe of
• 2:47:11
  Speaker 10: the leaf. Then above these a wave of dark blue
• 2:47:16
  Speaker 10: mist and crescent form, shading off into light blue. This
• 2:47:21
  Speaker 10: is only a sample reading of one flower. Each flower
• 2:47:24
  Speaker 10: has its own particular aura, some of them being very complex,
• 2:47:28
  Speaker 10: but it will serve to show the student how interesting
• 2:47:31
  Speaker 10: a study this can be made. The study of the
• 2:47:34
  Speaker 10: aura of plants alone, carefully undertaken, would occupy considerable time.
• 2:47:40
  Speaker 10: The human aura and how to study it. After you
• 2:47:43
  Speaker 10: have studied the auras of magnets and plants in this way,
• 2:47:47
  Speaker 10: you should turn your attention to the auras of living
• 2:47:49
  Speaker 10: human beings. Children may easily be studied, and their auras
• 2:47:53
  Speaker 10: are exceedingly interesting. Developed clairvoyants are enabled to see several
• 2:47:58
  Speaker 10: different auras, each of them being composed of a number
• 2:48:01
  Speaker 10: of subdivisions, and each subdivision having a different structure and color.
• 2:48:06
  Speaker 10: It is a good plan to begin the study of
• 2:48:08
  Speaker 10: the aura by the aid of the chemical screens before
• 2:48:11
  Speaker 10: mentioned in semi darkness, and then to practice viewing the
• 2:48:15
  Speaker 10: aura without the screens, and as the eyes gain sensitiveness,
• 2:48:18
  Speaker 10: to admit more and more light until it can be
• 2:48:20
  Speaker 10: clearly seen in the daylight. In this way, your psychic
• 2:48:24
  Speaker 10: sight will be gradually and naturally developed.
• 2:48:28
  Speaker 11: End of Chapter ten, Chapter eleven, Color and its Interpretation.
• 2:48:34
  Speaker 11: In the last chapter, we learn that there is a
• 2:48:35
  Speaker 11: psychic atmosphere or aura surrounding each animate object, and particularly
• 2:48:40
  Speaker 11: human beings, and that both the structure and the color
• 2:48:43
  Speaker 11: of this varies greatly. We must now inquire first into
• 2:48:47
  Speaker 11: the nature of these colorings, and secondly try to solve
• 2:48:50
  Speaker 11: the question what do they mean? How are we to
• 2:48:54
  Speaker 11: interpret these colors, realizing that they are but symbols of
• 2:48:57
  Speaker 11: something which they merely express. The color of every individual
• 2:49:01
  Speaker 11: is doubtless somewhat different, and with the same individual it
• 2:49:04
  Speaker 11: differs at various times according to a state of health.
• 2:49:07
  Speaker 11: The mental and psychical changes, et cetera. The majority of
• 2:49:12
  Speaker 11: highly developed clairvoyants agree, however, with C. W. Leadbeater, that
• 2:49:16
  Speaker 11: the following colors may be distinguished and that they signify
• 2:49:19
  Speaker 11: the existing physical, mental, and spiritual conditions. As follows the
• 2:49:24
  Speaker 11: meaning of various colors. Black indicates hatred and malice. Anger
• 2:49:30
  Speaker 11: and hate thought forms are like heavy smoke. Red, deep
• 2:49:35
  Speaker 11: red flashes on black ground show anger. Lurid red indicate sensuality. Brown,
• 2:49:43
  Speaker 11: dull brown, red shows avarice. Dull hard brown, gray selfishness,
• 2:49:49
  Speaker 11: greenish brown with redder scarlet flashes denotes jealousy. Gray, heavy
• 2:49:56
  Speaker 11: leaden shows deep depression. Livid gray shows fear, Crimson indicates love,
• 2:50:03
  Speaker 11: Orange pride or ambition. Yellow shows intellectuality. Duller tints show
• 2:50:10
  Speaker 11: it is used for selfish purposes. Green, deep blue green
• 2:50:16
  Speaker 11: shows good qualities deep sympathy, while gray green shows deceit
• 2:50:20
  Speaker 11: and cunning. Blue dark indicates religious feeling. Light blue shows
• 2:50:26
  Speaker 11: devotion to a noble spiritual ideal. White or near white
• 2:50:31
  Speaker 11: shows high spirituality. Dull brown and blue shows selfish religious feeling.
• 2:50:38
  Speaker 11: Dull yellow low type intellect. Apricot shows pride. Brick red
• 2:50:45
  Speaker 11: indicates selfish affection. And avarice. Light and bright red show
• 2:50:50
  Speaker 11: pure affection. Grayish green with reddish tinge shows deceit. The
• 2:50:56
  Speaker 11: health aura is clearly visible to the clairvoyant as a
• 2:50:59
  Speaker 11: mass of faintly blue uman as, violet gray mist, interpenetrating
• 2:51:02
  Speaker 11: the denser part of the human body and extending very
• 2:51:04
  Speaker 11: slightly beyond. It is easy to understand how almost infinite
• 2:51:08
  Speaker 11: may be the combinations and modifications of all these hues,
• 2:51:12
  Speaker 11: so that the most delicate graduation of character or the
• 2:51:15
  Speaker 11: most evanescent of mingled feelings may be expressed with the
• 2:51:18
  Speaker 11: greatest accuracy. Many of the colors are unknown to our
• 2:51:21
  Speaker 11: physical faculties, so that it is impossible to picture them
• 2:51:25
  Speaker 11: with psychic hues. When a clairvoyant sees these colors in
• 2:51:29
  Speaker 11: the aura or surroundings of an individual, therefore, he may
• 2:51:32
  Speaker 11: feel that the characteristica indicated are present, and the same
• 2:51:36
  Speaker 11: thing is true when they are to be seen in
• 2:51:38
  Speaker 11: the surroundings of a returning spirit the seven auras surrounding man.
• 2:51:44
  Speaker 11: When the advanced student carefully studies the human aura, he
• 2:51:47
  Speaker 11: will find that there are a number of straight, white,
• 2:51:50
  Speaker 11: very fine lines emanating from the body and particularly the head,
• 2:51:54
  Speaker 11: which resemble rays of white lights. These are magnetic rays
• 2:51:58
  Speaker 11: which do not deal directly with the psychical condition of
• 2:52:00
  Speaker 11: the subjects. The innermost aura will be found to consist
• 2:52:04
  Speaker 11: of five different colored bands. The first will be pure white,
• 2:52:08
  Speaker 11: the second light blue, the third darker blue, the fourth
• 2:52:13
  Speaker 11: lemon yellow, the fifth dark red. The second layer of
• 2:52:17
  Speaker 11: the aura will be found to be bluish violet, merging
• 2:52:19
  Speaker 11: into rows. Those two interpenetrate one another, forming very beautiful combinations.
• 2:52:26
  Speaker 11: The third layer consists of three cloudy zones, the first pink,
• 2:52:30
  Speaker 11: the second violet, and the third orange. The fourth layer
• 2:52:34
  Speaker 11: consists of green cloud like waves tinged with yellow, resembling
• 2:52:38
  Speaker 11: the golden edges of clouds behind which the sun is shining.
• 2:52:41
  Speaker 11: The fifth will be seen to be slate or indigo
• 2:52:44
  Speaker 11: in color with silver edges. The sixth will consist of
• 2:52:48
  Speaker 11: a beautiful light blue with a whitish golden fringe. The seventh,
• 2:52:53
  Speaker 11: or outermost aura, will be seen to be a grayish
• 2:52:55
  Speaker 11: mist of a light violet tint. The outer aura completes
• 2:52:59
  Speaker 11: the ore or emanation of man, and is the outer shell,
• 2:53:03
  Speaker 11: as it were, consisting of the so called auric egg
• 2:53:06
  Speaker 11: surrounding every human being, of which more will be said
• 2:53:09
  Speaker 11: later changes in the colors. When a golden yellow light
• 2:53:13
  Speaker 11: is seen about the head, it may be assumed that
• 2:53:16
  Speaker 11: such an individual has great intellectuality combined with spirituality, and
• 2:53:20
  Speaker 11: in some cases it has been said that this contains
• 2:53:22
  Speaker 11: a cloud of gold dusk, each speck revolving spirally on itself.
• 2:53:27
  Speaker 11: These colors of various auras are not unchanging, as before said,
• 2:53:31
  Speaker 11: so that the student must not expect to see them
• 2:53:33
  Speaker 11: exactly as described. They are greatly modified by the mental
• 2:53:37
  Speaker 11: and psychical condition of the subject, and the thoughts and
• 2:53:40
  Speaker 11: emotions which the latter may be experiencing at the time
• 2:53:43
  Speaker 11: of observation will also affect the aura. The colors of thoughts. Thus,
• 2:53:49
  Speaker 11: fear gives rise to circles of bright rings spread out
• 2:53:52
  Speaker 11: in the form of a cone of varying shades of gray, pink,
• 2:53:55
  Speaker 11: and purple. A beautiful devotional thought may be expressed in
• 2:53:59
  Speaker 11: the form of a star of bluish mist tinged with yellow.
• 2:54:03
  Speaker 11: Pity may be seen as a reddish violet cloud, from
• 2:54:05
  Speaker 11: which issue pointed cones of a brighter pink. Deception will
• 2:54:09
  Speaker 11: give rise to a steel blue mist tinged with pink,
• 2:54:13
  Speaker 11: and taking the shape of any regular spiral fear may
• 2:54:16
  Speaker 11: give rise to balls of gray, pink and yellow mist,
• 2:54:19
  Speaker 11: while fear combined with anger will give forth a blackish
• 2:54:22
  Speaker 11: gray mist from which red electrical flashes appear to issue
• 2:54:27
  Speaker 11: the auric egg. These colors extend over the whole of
• 2:54:30
  Speaker 11: the auric egg, and may be seen by the clairvoyant
• 2:54:33
  Speaker 11: to be influencing it throughout. The auric egg, which is
• 2:54:36
  Speaker 11: formed round an individual by the atmosphere or aura emanating
• 2:54:40
  Speaker 11: from him, extends both above and below his body, as
• 2:54:43
  Speaker 11: well as sideways and as from nine to ten feet
• 2:54:46
  Speaker 11: in height and five feet in diameter. If the color
• 2:54:50
  Speaker 11: of this oric egg be examined by a clairvoyant, characteristics
• 2:54:54
  Speaker 11: of the individual may be clearly defined after the necessary
• 2:54:57
  Speaker 11: practice and development, and the general character of the sub
• 2:55:00
  Speaker 11: may be in this way discovered and interpreted the colors
• 2:55:04
  Speaker 11: of various individuals. Of course, it is necessary to make
• 2:55:07
  Speaker 11: a long study of the aura and to attain a
• 2:55:10
  Speaker 11: good deal of psychic development, before all the details contained
• 2:55:13
  Speaker 11: in this chapter can be discovered by the student in
• 2:55:15
  Speaker 11: actual practice. Assuming, however, that you have progressed sufficiently in
• 2:55:19
  Speaker 11: your studies to be enabled to see the aura of
• 2:55:20
  Speaker 11: any individual, you may proceed to examine the whole auric
• 2:55:24
  Speaker 11: egg with its varied colors. If you do this, you
• 2:55:27
  Speaker 11: will find them to be about as follows. A highly
• 2:55:31
  Speaker 11: developed individual will have a haze of golden light issuing
• 2:55:35
  Speaker 11: from the head and extending almost to the top of
• 2:55:37
  Speaker 11: the egg. Above this will be a faint purplish light.
• 2:55:40
  Speaker 11: On either side of this golden aura, and issuing upwards
• 2:55:43
  Speaker 11: networks from the shoulders will be a bluish light, which
• 2:55:46
  Speaker 11: merges into pink as it descends to the breast. From
• 2:55:50
  Speaker 11: that point to the thighs, a pinkish light may be
• 2:55:52
  Speaker 11: seen light in some cases darkish red in others. About
• 2:55:57
  Speaker 11: the knees, this pink shades off into a delicate green,
• 2:56:00
  Speaker 11: and this green covers the feet and extends downward almost
• 2:56:03
  Speaker 11: to the lower margin of the auric egg, where it
• 2:56:05
  Speaker 11: becomes a darkish blue. With less highly developed individuals, these
• 2:56:09
  Speaker 11: colors will vary according to the table given above. In
• 2:56:13
  Speaker 11: some cases, the auric egg will be composed almost entirely
• 2:56:16
  Speaker 11: of grays, greens, and browns. Primary colors and their meanings.
• 2:56:21
  Speaker 11: In general, it may be said that yellow and any
• 2:56:23
  Speaker 11: bright clear colors, when seen in the aura of an individual,
• 2:56:26
  Speaker 11: denotes strong vitality and active intellectuality. Lilac, blue and violet
• 2:56:32
  Speaker 11: have to do with spiritual characteristics. They are associated with simple,
• 2:56:36
  Speaker 11: unselfish natures and with those having spiritual aspirations. Red is
• 2:56:41
  Speaker 11: directly connected with passions and particularly anger. Blue is associated
• 2:56:46
  Speaker 11: with religious feeling, though with too muddy it denotes selfishness.
• 2:56:50
  Speaker 11: The brighter and clearer the colors, the better, and they
• 2:56:53
  Speaker 11: should be as clear cut as possible. Colors shown by
• 2:56:56
  Speaker 11: spirits or seen clairvoyantly, these colors are not always associated
• 2:57:02
  Speaker 11: with the human aura or with any human form. They
• 2:57:04
  Speaker 11: are often seen by psychics who are developing themselves as
• 2:57:07
  Speaker 11: cloud like masses or shapes, which form more or less
• 2:57:10
  Speaker 11: distinctly in front of them and appear to take the
• 2:57:12
  Speaker 11: outline of flowers, flash, vis, et cetera. Colors are occasionally
• 2:57:17
  Speaker 11: seen in dreams, but the dream images of most people
• 2:57:20
  Speaker 11: are colorless or only light gray, like a shadow. They are,
• 2:57:24
  Speaker 11: in fact such stuff as dreams are made of. In general,
• 2:57:28
  Speaker 11: these colors may be interpreted according to the laws given above,
• 2:57:32
  Speaker 11: but the precise interpretation of these symbolic messages is a
• 2:57:35
  Speaker 11: more difficult question to settle. A spirit who may be
• 2:57:38
  Speaker 11: trying to communicate and to give a certain message to
• 2:57:40
  Speaker 11: a medium may apply this same method of color symbolism
• 2:57:44
  Speaker 11: to convey his meaning, but this is often confusing to
• 2:57:46
  Speaker 11: the psychic and difficult to interpret. We shall come to
• 2:57:50
  Speaker 11: this question, however, in the next chapter, which is devoted
• 2:57:52
  Speaker 11: to symbolism. End of chapter eleven.
• 2:57:57
  Speaker 4: Chapter twelve symbolism. Symbolism is one of the most important
• 2:58:05
  Speaker 4: and at the same time one of the least understood
• 2:58:08
  Speaker 4: subjects in the whole realm of psychics and spiritualism. A
• 2:58:12
  Speaker 4: proper understanding of what it means and the adequate interpretation
• 2:58:16
  Speaker 4: of symbols as presented to the psychic would prove of
• 2:58:20
  Speaker 4: great value to every student and to all those who
• 2:58:23
  Speaker 4: are undertaking their own psychic development. What symbolism means. First
• 2:58:30
  Speaker 4: of all, it is necessary that you should understand exactly
• 2:58:33
  Speaker 4: what symbolism means. A symbol is a sign for something else,
• 2:58:38
  Speaker 4: which it expresses in a more or less partial and
• 2:58:41
  Speaker 4: incomplete manner. Usually, a symbol is a sign which appeals
• 2:58:46
  Speaker 4: to one of the five senses, but denotes not a
• 2:58:49
  Speaker 4: sensual thing, but the thought lying behind it. Thus, the
• 2:58:54
  Speaker 4: printed word on the page is the symbol of the
• 2:58:57
  Speaker 4: author's thought expressed in that word the poem is the
• 2:59:01
  Speaker 4: expression of the poet's mind and spirit as set forth
• 2:59:05
  Speaker 4: in the words and meter of the poem, et cetera. Thus,
• 2:59:08
  Speaker 4: symbols are always only partial and incomplete, and represent what
• 2:59:13
  Speaker 4: a small fraction of the thing they stand for, and
• 2:59:16
  Speaker 4: we should always be in error if we tried to
• 2:59:18
  Speaker 4: reconstruct the whole of the thing symbolized from what we
• 2:59:22
  Speaker 4: perceive by means of our senses. Before we proceed to
• 2:59:26
  Speaker 4: the subject of symbolism as studied in psychics and the
• 2:59:28
  Speaker 4: phenomena of spiritualism, one other point should be explained. We
• 2:59:33
  Speaker 4: never see an object in the physical world as it
• 2:59:36
  Speaker 4: really is symbolized objects. We only perceive or realize through
• 2:59:44
  Speaker 4: our five senses various aspects or qualities of the object. Thus,
• 2:59:50
  Speaker 4: if you are looking at an orange, your sense of
• 2:59:53
  Speaker 4: sight gives you the impression of a reddish yellow sphere
• 2:59:56
  Speaker 4: rather irregular on its surface. Your sense of touch tells
• 3:00:00
  Speaker 4: you that this thing is round, that it is somewhat
• 3:00:03
  Speaker 4: rough and cool. Your sense of smell supplies you with
• 3:00:06
  Speaker 4: the information that it has a pleasant odor, unlike anything else,
• 3:00:10
  Speaker 4: which is confirmed by your taste. In this particular instance,
• 3:00:14
  Speaker 4: the sense of hearing does not enter into the question,
• 3:00:16
  Speaker 4: as it would in many other instances. Now, all these
• 3:00:20
  Speaker 4: things which appeal to our senses, color, odor, texture, et cetera,
• 3:00:25
  Speaker 4: are qualities of the orange, and not the orange itself.
• 3:00:29
  Speaker 4: The orange is always something different from all of these
• 3:00:33
  Speaker 4: above and beyond them, and is more inclusive than any
• 3:00:36
  Speaker 4: of these qualities and symbols. Thus, suppose you took away
• 3:00:41
  Speaker 4: one of those symbols its color, the orange would immediately
• 3:00:44
  Speaker 4: become invisible to you. Yet it would continue to exist,
• 3:00:48
  Speaker 4: though we could never know of its existence. This shows
• 3:00:52
  Speaker 4: us clearly that symbols are very inadequate and imperfect representations
• 3:00:56
  Speaker 4: of a vaster something lying behind them, and they represent
• 3:01:01
  Speaker 4: only a small fraction of the totality of the thing
• 3:01:04
  Speaker 4: as it really exists. Symbolism of spirit as applied to
• 3:01:12
  Speaker 4: the spirit of man, we must begin by admitting the
• 3:01:15
  Speaker 4: rather startling fact that no man has ever seen it.
• 3:01:19
  Speaker 4: No man has ever seen another. All he has ever
• 3:01:22
  Speaker 4: seen are the outward features, the form, the facial expressions
• 3:01:26
  Speaker 4: of the other. And when our spirits hold communication with
• 3:01:31
  Speaker 4: one another in this world, they do so by written symbols,
• 3:01:35
  Speaker 4: by motions of the hands or head, or by means
• 3:01:37
  Speaker 4: of air waves. Passing from the throat of one to
• 3:01:40
  Speaker 4: the ear of the other. All but expressions or symbols,
• 3:01:45
  Speaker 4: which are interpreted by us according to a certain pre
• 3:01:48
  Speaker 4: arranged code. If we did not have this pre arranged code,
• 3:01:52
  Speaker 4: it would be impossible for two intelligent beings to converse
• 3:01:55
  Speaker 4: with one another, as may readily be seen when a
• 3:01:58
  Speaker 4: Chinaman and an American meet for the first time, neither
• 3:02:01
  Speaker 4: of them speaking the language of the other. They try
• 3:02:04
  Speaker 4: as best they can to make each other understand what
• 3:02:07
  Speaker 4: they are thinking about, what thoughts are in their minds,
• 3:02:10
  Speaker 4: But they succeed very imperfectly, or not at all. The
• 3:02:15
  Speaker 4: symbols employed are too inadequate to express their thoughts. Symbolism
• 3:02:22
  Speaker 4: in spirit communication now all these difficulties we encounter when
• 3:02:29
  Speaker 4: a spirit endeavors to communicate with us through a medium
• 3:02:32
  Speaker 4: or directly. It can express itself, as a rule, only
• 3:02:36
  Speaker 4: very imperfectly, as will be explained in a later chapter,
• 3:02:40
  Speaker 4: and must resort largely to symbols to convey its meaning. Hence,
• 3:02:44
  Speaker 4: we should be very mistaken if we were to interpret
• 3:02:47
  Speaker 4: this symbolism literally, or to assume that it represented the
• 3:02:50
  Speaker 4: whole of the subject matter which the spirit desired to convey.
• 3:02:55
  Speaker 4: As I said in my book the problems of psychical research,
• 3:02:59
  Speaker 4: our dream as we know, are largely symbolic, the work
• 3:03:03
  Speaker 4: of Freud and others having proved this beyond all doubt.
• 3:03:07
  Speaker 4: It is highly probable that the ravings of delirium are
• 3:03:11
  Speaker 4: also of this nature, though no one so far as
• 3:03:14
  Speaker 4: I know, has yet devoted to their study the attention
• 3:03:16
  Speaker 4: they deserve. Certainly it is true in mediumistic phenomena. For
• 3:03:20
  Speaker 4: in trance conditions a large number of the messages, tests,
• 3:03:24
  Speaker 4: and visions seen are of this nature and character, the
• 3:03:28
  Speaker 4: symbolism being often so elaborate that the original thought is
• 3:03:31
  Speaker 4: not perceived. Why this symbolism? The probable answer to this
• 3:03:37
  Speaker 4: question is that the message cannot be given directly, and
• 3:03:41
  Speaker 4: that this symbolic method of presentation must be resorted to
• 3:03:44
  Speaker 4: in order to get the message through at all. There
• 3:03:48
  Speaker 4: is good evidence to show that a pictorial method is
• 3:03:51
  Speaker 4: resorted to very largely by the spirits mediums seeing what
• 3:03:55
  Speaker 4: they describe. Very often, when the more direct auditory method
• 3:03:59
  Speaker 4: is not resorted to, the spirit presents somehow to the
• 3:04:03
  Speaker 4: mind of the medium a picture which is described and
• 3:04:07
  Speaker 4: often interpreted by the medium. Often this interpretation is quite erroneous.
• 3:04:12
  Speaker 4: Resembling a defective analysis of a dream. Because of this,
• 3:04:17
  Speaker 4: the message is not recognized. Yet the source of the
• 3:04:19
  Speaker 4: message may have been perfectly verritical truth telling. Let me
• 3:04:24
  Speaker 4: illustrate this more fully. Suppose you desire to tell a
• 3:04:28
  Speaker 4: chinaman who speaks not a word of English, to fetch
• 3:04:31
  Speaker 4: a certain object from the next room. It would be
• 3:04:34
  Speaker 4: useless for you to say the word watch, because he
• 3:04:37
  Speaker 4: would not know what the word meant. Probably you would
• 3:04:40
  Speaker 4: tap your waistcoat pocket, pretend to take out a watch,
• 3:04:43
  Speaker 4: wind it, look at the hands et, cetera, in your
• 3:04:46
  Speaker 4: endeavor to convey to him your meaning. If this were
• 3:04:49
  Speaker 4: not recognized for any reason, you would have the utmost
• 3:04:53
  Speaker 4: difficulty in conveying your meaning to him, and equal difficulty
• 3:04:56
  Speaker 4: in telling him to fetch the watch from the next room. Now,
• 3:05:00
  Speaker 4: supposing these antics or somewhat similar ones were resorted to
• 3:05:04
  Speaker 4: by a spirit in his attempt to convey the word watch,
• 3:05:08
  Speaker 4: perhaps to remind the sitter of a particular watch he
• 3:05:11
  Speaker 4: used to wear, the spirit might well proceed as follows.
• 3:05:16
  Speaker 4: He taps his stomach and looks at a spot over
• 3:05:18
  Speaker 4: his left side. He seems to wish to convey the
• 3:05:22
  Speaker 4: impression that he has suffered much from bowel trouble, perhaps
• 3:05:26
  Speaker 4: a cancer on the left side. Yes, he seems to
• 3:05:29
  Speaker 4: be taking something away from his body. Evidently they removed
• 3:05:33
  Speaker 4: some growth, and he wishes to convey the idea that
• 3:05:35
  Speaker 4: something was taken from him. Now he is examining his hand.
• 3:05:40
  Speaker 4: He is looking intently. Now he is doing something with
• 3:05:43
  Speaker 4: his fingers. I can't see what it is, A little movement.
• 3:05:48
  Speaker 4: Was he connected with machinery in life? Now he is
• 3:05:51
  Speaker 4: pointing to the door, et cetera. The interpretation of symbols
• 3:05:59
  Speaker 4: such an interpreter of the facts, it will be observed
• 3:06:02
  Speaker 4: while describing his actions, is wholly misleading. As to its interpretation,
• 3:06:08
  Speaker 4: the symbolism has been wholly misconstrued, And inasmuch as the
• 3:06:12
  Speaker 4: subject probably never died of cancer, had no bowel trouble,
• 3:06:16
  Speaker 4: underwent no operation, and was never connected with machinery, it
• 3:06:20
  Speaker 4: is highly probable that the message would be put down
• 3:06:23
  Speaker 4: wholly to the medium's subconscious imagination, or even to guessing
• 3:06:27
  Speaker 4: or conscious fraud. Yet it will be observed the message was,
• 3:06:31
  Speaker 4: in its inception wholly verritical, the fault lying in the
• 3:06:35
  Speaker 4: symbolism misinterpreted by the medium. There is evidence to show
• 3:06:40
  Speaker 4: that other forms of symbolism are adopted, also applying to
• 3:06:44
  Speaker 4: the auditory as well as to the visual presentation of images.
• 3:06:49
  Speaker 4: It is well known that names are very difficult to
• 3:06:52
  Speaker 4: obtain by mediums, and this is probably due to the
• 3:06:55
  Speaker 4: fact that names are not pictures or visual symbols, and
• 3:06:59
  Speaker 4: in themselves mean nothing. As a rule, they are merely
• 3:07:03
  Speaker 4: a combination of letters having a certain sound. The forms
• 3:07:08
  Speaker 4: of symbolism, it is generally easier for the spirit to
• 3:07:12
  Speaker 4: impress a partially developed psychic by means of a picture
• 3:07:16
  Speaker 4: than in any other way, and for this reason names
• 3:07:19
  Speaker 4: are difficult to get. Still, in many cases, names are
• 3:07:23
  Speaker 4: obtained by a picture shown. Thus the name Merrifield was
• 3:07:29
  Speaker 4: in one case given to the psychic as a picture
• 3:07:31
  Speaker 4: of a number of children happily playing in a green field.
• 3:07:35
  Speaker 4: Among other forms of symbolism are the following. A large
• 3:07:39
  Speaker 4: key may be shown to the psychic. This may not
• 3:07:42
  Speaker 4: mean a key at all, but a symbol of success,
• 3:07:45
  Speaker 4: the key being the means by which the door of
• 3:07:47
  Speaker 4: prosperity is opened. Colors are frequently shown, and nearly all
• 3:07:53
  Speaker 4: colors are symbolic of something or other and have their
• 3:07:56
  Speaker 4: definite meaning. As we saw in the last chapter change.
• 3:08:00
  Speaker 4: Weird and horrible figures do not necessarily mean anything bad
• 3:08:04
  Speaker 4: or anything evil. They may be symbolic of something entirely different,
• 3:08:09
  Speaker 4: and this is frequently seen in dreams, which are composed
• 3:08:12
  Speaker 4: almost entirely of symbols. Throughout most psychics, when they are developing,
• 3:08:18
  Speaker 4: see peculiar specs, clouds, and forms shaping themselves before them
• 3:08:22
  Speaker 4: in space. They are naturally at a loss to interpret
• 3:08:26
  Speaker 4: and explain these images. While there is much latitude of
• 3:08:29
  Speaker 4: interpretation always in symbolism, the following simple suggestions based on
• 3:08:34
  Speaker 4: traditional teachings may be found helpful. Clouds and lights. Clouds,
• 3:08:42
  Speaker 4: if white, may be interpreted as signifying happiness and prosperity,
• 3:08:46
  Speaker 4: either to the psychic or to one near and dear
• 3:08:49
  Speaker 4: to them. If these seem to recede rapidly and fade
• 3:08:53
  Speaker 4: away in the distance, a journey is often indicated. If
• 3:08:57
  Speaker 4: the clouds appear to be advancing toward you, it indicates
• 3:09:00
  Speaker 4: that news will shortly reach you. Good if the clouds
• 3:09:03
  Speaker 4: are white, Bad if they are dark, If red and lurid,
• 3:09:07
  Speaker 4: ill fortune is upon your horizon, for which you must
• 3:09:10
  Speaker 4: be on constant guard. Black clouds symbolize troubles of the heart.
• 3:09:16
  Speaker 4: Tiny moving speeds of light, if they truly result from
• 3:09:19
  Speaker 4: psychic development, are said to introduce that you are progressing
• 3:09:23
  Speaker 4: favorably in your psychic sensitiveness. If these specks are dark, however,
• 3:09:28
  Speaker 4: evil or harmful influences may be about you, for which
• 3:09:32
  Speaker 4: you must be on a constant lookout. A light within
• 3:09:36
  Speaker 4: a light is said to symbolize the presence of some
• 3:09:39
  Speaker 4: spirit desirous of communicating. Should such a sign appear to you,
• 3:09:44
  Speaker 4: try at once to enter into communication with the spirit
• 3:09:47
  Speaker 4: intelligence by asking questions, and note whether the light you
• 3:09:51
  Speaker 4: see endeavors to reply to you by means of some
• 3:09:53
  Speaker 4: simple code. Reptiles and other unpleasant signs usually symbolize the
• 3:09:59
  Speaker 4: hidden fears of the psychic. They are symbolized in this
• 3:10:03
  Speaker 4: way externalizing the subconscious fear thought of the subject. Root
• 3:10:08
  Speaker 4: out your hidden fear and apprehension, Assert your mastery and fearlessness,
• 3:10:13
  Speaker 4: and the unpleasant sign will always disappear. The subconscious and symbols.
• 3:10:22
  Speaker 4: The subconscious mind has the faculty of describing in symbolic form, thoughts, impressions,
• 3:10:28
  Speaker 4: or influences which come to it, either through the senses
• 3:10:31
  Speaker 4: or more directly by telepathic or clairvoyant visions or messages
• 3:10:36
  Speaker 4: which are said to be given through it by the spirits.
• 3:10:39
  Speaker 4: The spirit may convey a certain message to the subconscious
• 3:10:43
  Speaker 4: mind of the psychic, and the message may be externalized
• 3:10:46
  Speaker 4: or presented to the ordinary conscious mind in symbolic form,
• 3:10:50
  Speaker 4: representing apparently something entirely different from the original message. It
• 3:10:55
  Speaker 4: is in the interpretation of these symbols that much of
• 3:10:58
  Speaker 4: the true art of means mediumship and psychic development will
• 3:11:02
  Speaker 4: be found to lie. The better the medium, the more
• 3:11:05
  Speaker 4: expert in the interpretation of these symbols. At present, no
• 3:11:10
  Speaker 4: general rule can be laid down as to the interpretation
• 3:11:13
  Speaker 4: of the symbols employed, since these will differ very largely
• 3:11:17
  Speaker 4: in every case, each medium having his own method of
• 3:11:20
  Speaker 4: interpretation and his own form of symbolism. You must learn
• 3:11:24
  Speaker 4: for yourself by repeated experience what the various symbols mean
• 3:11:28
  Speaker 4: to you, and thus form a code or method of
• 3:11:31
  Speaker 4: interpretation which you can always follow throughout your future development.
• 3:11:36
  Speaker 4: A close study of symbolism will yield you very important
• 3:11:40
  Speaker 4: practical results, as well as being of great interest in itself.
• 3:11:47
  Speaker 4: End of Chapter twelve.
• 3:11:49
  Speaker 1: Chapter thirteen. Telepathy, telepathy, mind reading, thought reading, thought transference
• 3:11:58
  Speaker 1: are all terms meaning very much the same thing, namely,
• 3:12:01
  Speaker 1: the ability to impress the mind of another person with
• 3:12:04
  Speaker 1: a definite thought or thoughts, without traveling through the usual
• 3:12:08
  Speaker 1: avenues of sense. The word telepathy was coined by mister F. W. H.
• 3:12:14
  Speaker 1: Myers in eighteen eighty two and is derived from two
• 3:12:18
  Speaker 1: Greek words telly at a distance and pathos feeling, and
• 3:12:24
  Speaker 1: means literally sensing at a distance. From this it has
• 3:12:28
  Speaker 1: come to mean thought reading in general. As we now
• 3:12:32
  Speaker 1: understand it, how telepathy operates, how telepathy takes place we
• 3:12:38
  Speaker 1: cannot yet say with certainty. Some scientific men, such as
• 3:12:42
  Speaker 1: Sir William Crooks, are inclined to believe that vibrations in
• 3:12:46
  Speaker 1: the ether travel from brain to brain, very much like
• 3:12:49
  Speaker 1: the messages in wireless telegraphy. Others, on the contrary, contend
• 3:12:55
  Speaker 1: that this explanation is insufficient and that we have no
• 3:12:59
  Speaker 1: proof that such brain waves exist. As mister Myers expressed it,
• 3:13:03
  Speaker 1: life has the power of manifesting itself to life, and
• 3:13:07
  Speaker 1: this is as far as we can go as yet
• 3:13:10
  Speaker 1: by way of scientific explanation of the facts. It is
• 3:13:14
  Speaker 1: almost certainly true that telepathy takes place not between the
• 3:13:17
  Speaker 1: conscious minds of two individuals, but by way of the subconscious,
• 3:13:22
  Speaker 1: that vast field which we described in chapter four the subconscious,
• 3:13:27
  Speaker 1: so that if a message is sent from one conscious
• 3:13:30
  Speaker 1: mind to another, it would travel in rather around about
• 3:13:34
  Speaker 1: fashion as follows, from the conscious to the subconscious mind
• 3:13:38
  Speaker 1: of A, from that to the subconscious mind of B,
• 3:13:42
  Speaker 1: and from the subconscious mind to the conscious mind of B.
• 3:13:46
  Speaker 1: In B, the process by which it was conveyed from
• 3:13:50
  Speaker 1: the subconscious to the ordinary mind would be that of externalization,
• 3:13:55
  Speaker 1: so frequently seen in dreams, crystal gazing, and other phenomena.
• 3:14:00
  Speaker 1: This fully explains to us why it is that we
• 3:14:03
  Speaker 1: frequently receive telepathic messages at the moment we are falling
• 3:14:07
  Speaker 1: to sleep, or at least appear to do so. We
• 3:14:10
  Speaker 1: may have received the message an hour or two before this,
• 3:14:13
  Speaker 1: but its externalization was impossible until the ordinary consciousness ceased
• 3:14:19
  Speaker 1: to be so active with the affairs of the day,
• 3:14:22
  Speaker 1: and then the subconscious mind had a chance to deliver
• 3:14:24
  Speaker 1: its message received some time before from some distant mind.
• 3:14:30
  Speaker 1: The various kinds of telepathic messages. Telepathic messages may be visual,
• 3:14:37
  Speaker 1: in which case they take the form of pictures, figures,
• 3:14:40
  Speaker 1: written or printed words, etc. They may be auditory, in
• 3:14:44
  Speaker 1: which case they take the form of spoken words. They
• 3:14:48
  Speaker 1: may be emotional, in which case the subject may feel
• 3:14:52
  Speaker 1: a particular depression or excitement. They may be volitional, in
• 3:14:56
  Speaker 1: which case the subject is seized with the imperative desire
• 3:15:00
  Speaker 1: to perform a certain action, et cetera. Telepathic messages may
• 3:15:04
  Speaker 1: originate either in the living or in the dead, as
• 3:15:07
  Speaker 1: they are transmitted from the subconscious mind, perhaps under the
• 3:15:11
  Speaker 1: supervision and direction of the conscious mind. They are often
• 3:15:14
  Speaker 1: transmitted most effectually during sleep, trance, under the influence of
• 3:15:19
  Speaker 1: some drug, in delirium, at the moment of death, et cetera.
• 3:15:23
  Speaker 1: These messages are most easily received at such times when
• 3:15:27
  Speaker 1: the conscious mind is asleep or in obeyance, and for
• 3:15:32
  Speaker 1: this reason we have so called visions of the dying, ecstasy, trance, speaking,
• 3:15:38
  Speaker 1: and revelation, et cetera. Telepathy from spirits. It is probably
• 3:15:44
  Speaker 1: true that spirits converse with one another directly by means
• 3:15:48
  Speaker 1: of telepathy, though they understand fully the thought of the other,
• 3:15:51
  Speaker 1: as though the sentence had been fully spoken. Swedenborg tells
• 3:15:56
  Speaker 1: us that this is the case, and that the telepathic
• 3:15:58
  Speaker 1: thoughts sent out by a spirit appear to other spirits
• 3:16:01
  Speaker 1: or to mediums in trance as clear and sonorous as
• 3:16:05
  Speaker 1: spoken words. If spirits in the flesh can converse at
• 3:16:09
  Speaker 1: times with one another by means of telepathy, and if
• 3:16:12
  Speaker 1: disembodied spirits converse with one another by this means, it
• 3:16:16
  Speaker 1: is only natural to suppose that this is frequently the
• 3:16:19
  Speaker 1: method of communication resorted to between embodied and disembodied spirits,
• 3:16:24
  Speaker 1: and all trance mediums know that this is in fact
• 3:16:27
  Speaker 1: the case. The larger meanings and applications of telepathy will
• 3:16:31
  Speaker 1: be discussed more fully in the chapter devoted to prayer
• 3:16:34
  Speaker 1: et cetera. Practical Experiments in Telepathy. The following practical exercises
• 3:16:41
  Speaker 1: will enable you to prove to your own satisfaction that
• 3:16:44
  Speaker 1: telepathy exists and that it can be reduced to a
• 3:16:48
  Speaker 1: more or less simple process by continued practice. Select a
• 3:16:53
  Speaker 1: friend with whom you are in sympathy physically, mentally, and morally.
• 3:16:58
  Speaker 1: One of you must be the sender or transmitter, the
• 3:17:02
  Speaker 1: other the receiver or recipient. Let us suppose for a
• 3:17:06
  Speaker 1: moment that you are the transmitter. The recipient should be
• 3:17:09
  Speaker 1: seated in a comfortable chair at one end of a
• 3:17:12
  Speaker 1: fairly large room, which must be freely ventilated. It is
• 3:17:16
  Speaker 1: best that at least during the early experiments, he should
• 3:17:20
  Speaker 1: be blindfolded or that he closed his eyes, or sit
• 3:17:23
  Speaker 1: with his back to you, pencil in hand and pad
• 3:17:26
  Speaker 1: on knee. He should sit in a semi darkened part
• 3:17:29
  Speaker 1: of the room. For your part, you should sit at
• 3:17:32
  Speaker 1: a table facing him, that is, his back, with a
• 3:17:35
  Speaker 1: pad of paper and pencil. Before you have a bright
• 3:17:39
  Speaker 1: light thrown on the pad of paper, leaving the rest
• 3:17:42
  Speaker 1: of the room in semi darkness. Now draw upon the
• 3:17:45
  Speaker 1: paper a symbol, perhaps a geometric figure, such as a triangle, circle, square,
• 3:17:50
  Speaker 1: et cetera. Look at this figure intently, and endeavor to
• 3:17:55
  Speaker 1: impress it on the recipient. You should not make each
• 3:17:58
  Speaker 1: trial exceed one minute in length. How to ensure success,
• 3:18:04
  Speaker 1: the attitude of mind which you hold during these experiments
• 3:18:07
  Speaker 1: is very important. You should will that your recipient should
• 3:18:12
  Speaker 1: see the picture presented to him. Yet you should not
• 3:18:15
  Speaker 1: strain yourself in the attempt, and wrinkling your brows, tensing
• 3:18:19
  Speaker 1: the muscles, et cetera. Will not add to the certainty
• 3:18:22
  Speaker 1: with which your picture is conveyed. Rather the reverse. On
• 3:18:26
  Speaker 1: the other hand, you should have complete confidence in the
• 3:18:29
  Speaker 1: fact that he will get the impression you are sending him.
• 3:18:33
  Speaker 1: Never allow yourself for a moment to believe that you
• 3:18:36
  Speaker 1: will fail. Say to yourself that he has already succeeded
• 3:18:40
  Speaker 1: in receiving it. Do not allow yourself to become flustered
• 3:18:44
  Speaker 1: or worried or anxious. Imagine your thoughts traveling to him
• 3:18:49
  Speaker 1: in a definite form, either in the shape of the
• 3:18:52
  Speaker 1: object itself or in the word square, circle, et cetera,
• 3:18:57
  Speaker 1: though in that case you must be careful that you
• 3:18:59
  Speaker 1: do not unconsciously whisper the word so that he hears it.
• 3:19:03
  Speaker 1: The recipient, on his part, should make his mind as
• 3:19:07
  Speaker 1: blank as possible, and note down any pictures or impressions
• 3:19:11
  Speaker 1: that come to him, no matter how wild they may appear.
• 3:19:15
  Speaker 1: Above all, you must not be discouraged by early non successes.
• 3:19:20
  Speaker 1: For these you must expect more complicated experiments. After you
• 3:19:26
  Speaker 1: have succeeded with the diagrams, you may try more complicated pictures,
• 3:19:31
  Speaker 1: such as playing cards, which are very good for this purpose,
• 3:19:34
  Speaker 1: as the deck may be shuffled between each draw, and
• 3:19:37
  Speaker 1: it is easy to calculate the percentage of guesses, since
• 3:19:40
  Speaker 1: chance would always be fifty one to one against the
• 3:19:43
  Speaker 1: subject hitting upon the correct card by accident. After these experiments,
• 3:19:47
  Speaker 1: you may try some in the transference of pain. Prick
• 3:19:51
  Speaker 1: yourself lightly in various parts of the body with a
• 3:19:54
  Speaker 1: sharp needle, or pinch yourself and see whether the subject
• 3:19:58
  Speaker 1: can locate the pain correctly on himself. If he's a
• 3:20:01
  Speaker 1: good subject, he will do so in very many instances,
• 3:20:05
  Speaker 1: as though the pain were transferred directly to him and
• 3:20:09
  Speaker 1: you were pricking or pinching him. Next, you may try
• 3:20:13
  Speaker 1: a number of experiments and smell and taste. Procure a
• 3:20:18
  Speaker 1: number of substances, such as cloves, nutmeg, pepper, sugar, et cetera,
• 3:20:22
  Speaker 1: and smell or taste these in turn, being careful that
• 3:20:25
  Speaker 1: you are far enough removed from your subject to prevent
• 3:20:28
  Speaker 1: him from smelling these in the usual way. Many good
• 3:20:32
  Speaker 1: subjects can tell immediately the substance you are putting into
• 3:20:36
  Speaker 1: your mouth the instant you placed it there. After you
• 3:20:40
  Speaker 1: have succeeded this far, you should try to increase the
• 3:20:43
  Speaker 1: distance between you until you can perform the same feats.
• 3:20:47
  Speaker 1: Though miles apart how to prevent evil influences from affecting you,
• 3:20:53
  Speaker 1: These simple experiments will prove to you and to the skeptic,
• 3:20:56
  Speaker 1: the existence of telepathy. They will render you more sensitive
• 3:21:00
  Speaker 1: to the reception of messages from distant living minds and
• 3:21:04
  Speaker 1: also messages from the discarnate. In this way, you will
• 3:21:07
  Speaker 1: cultivate your sensitiveness to messages of this character, and this
• 3:21:11
  Speaker 1: will be beneficial to you, provided that you do not
• 3:21:13
  Speaker 1: carry these practices too far and cultivate your sensitiveness unduly
• 3:21:18
  Speaker 1: in wrong directions. Under normal, healthy conditions, your mind will
• 3:21:23
  Speaker 1: not be affected by impressions of this character, since it
• 3:21:27
  Speaker 1: will be most difficult for you to receive them. As
• 3:21:29
  Speaker 1: a rule, no matter how hard you may try, the
• 3:21:33
  Speaker 1: mind always protects itself against too easy access by outside minds.
• 3:21:38
  Speaker 1: It is very rare, indeed, that subjects are impressed against
• 3:21:41
  Speaker 1: their will. Some persons, it is true, believe that others
• 3:21:46
  Speaker 1: at a distance are influencing them in this manner and
• 3:21:49
  Speaker 1: impressing them to do certain things. Many believe that they
• 3:21:53
  Speaker 1: are hypnotized, et cetera. But in nearly all cases these
• 3:21:57
  Speaker 1: beliefs are illusory, they have no foundation. In fact, when examined,
• 3:22:01
  Speaker 1: they are found to rest wholly in the imagination of
• 3:22:04
  Speaker 1: the subject, and they are frequently but the indications of
• 3:22:07
  Speaker 1: an unbalanced mind. This does not mean that such persons
• 3:22:11
  Speaker 1: are necessarily insane, but they would become so were they
• 3:22:15
  Speaker 1: to dwell upon their imagined grievance long enough and believe
• 3:22:19
  Speaker 1: in it after they have been shown repeatedly that such
• 3:22:21
  Speaker 1: was not the true case. It is this persistent will
• 3:22:25
  Speaker 1: to believe in a thing which is not true that
• 3:22:27
  Speaker 1: is one of the causes of insanity. The student who
• 3:22:31
  Speaker 1: practices telepathy within reason, and who has followed the instructions
• 3:22:35
  Speaker 1: contained in the early chapters of this book as regards
• 3:22:38
  Speaker 1: fortifying and protecting his own inner nature, need have no
• 3:22:42
  Speaker 1: fear that telepathic influences or impressions from others will ever
• 3:22:46
  Speaker 1: affect him against his own will. In nearly all cases,
• 3:22:50
  Speaker 1: these so called influences are imaginary, and even should they exist,
• 3:22:55
  Speaker 1: the subject, who has mustered himself and who has strengthened
• 3:22:59
  Speaker 1: his soul from within, is capable of overcoming and repulsing
• 3:23:03
  Speaker 1: any outside forces of this character, and of preventing any
• 3:23:07
  Speaker 1: telepathic influence ever reaching him, no matter whether it comes
• 3:23:11
  Speaker 1: from the living or from the dead. End of Chapter thirteen,
• 3:23:16
  Speaker 1: Chapter fourteen.
• 3:23:19
  Speaker 9: Clairvoyance. Clairvoyance is derived from two French words and means
• 3:23:24
  Speaker 9: literally clear seeing. It means far more, however, in the
• 3:23:28
  Speaker 9: language of spiritualism and psychics and is now used to
• 3:23:32
  Speaker 9: cover and classify, if not to explain, a large number
• 3:23:36
  Speaker 9: of different phenomena which someday will probably be explained in
• 3:23:40
  Speaker 9: other ways. There are various types and kinds of clairvoyance,
• 3:23:45
  Speaker 9: different authorities having given somewhat different definitions of the various subdivisions. Thus,
• 3:23:51
  Speaker 9: the manual of the National Spiritualists Association subdivides and defines
• 3:23:56
  Speaker 9: the various types of clairvoyance as follows. Subjective clairvoyance one.
• 3:24:03
  Speaker 9: Subjective clairvoyance is that psychic condition of a human being
• 3:24:08
  Speaker 9: who thereby becomes a medium, which enables spirit intelligences through
• 3:24:13
  Speaker 9: the manipulation of the nerve centers of sight, to impress
• 3:24:17
  Speaker 9: or photograph upon the brain of the medium pictures and
• 3:24:20
  Speaker 9: images which are seen as visions by the medium without
• 3:24:23
  Speaker 9: the aid of the physical eye. These pictures and images
• 3:24:28
  Speaker 9: may be of things spiritual or material, past or present,
• 3:24:32
  Speaker 9: remote or near, hidden or uncovered, or they may have
• 3:24:36
  Speaker 9: their existence simply in the conception or imagination of the
• 3:24:40
  Speaker 9: medium communicating them. Objective clairvoyance two. Objective clairvoyance is that
• 3:24:48
  Speaker 9: psychic power or function of seeing objectively spiritual beings, objects,
• 3:24:53
  Speaker 9: and things by and through the spiritual sensorium, which pervades
• 3:24:57
  Speaker 9: the physical mechanism of vision, without which objective clairvoyance would
• 3:25:01
  Speaker 9: be impossible. But few persons are born with this power.
• 3:25:05
  Speaker 9: In some it is developed, and in others it has
• 3:25:08
  Speaker 9: but a casual quickening. Its extent is governed by the
• 3:25:11
  Speaker 9: rate of vibration under which it operates. Thus, one clairvoyant
• 3:25:15
  Speaker 9: may see objectively spiritual things which to another may be
• 3:25:19
  Speaker 9: invisible because of the degree of difference in the intensity
• 3:25:22
  Speaker 9: of the power. X Ray clairvoyance three. X ray clairvoyance
• 3:25:29
  Speaker 9: is a form of clairvoyance which partakes of the characteristics
• 3:25:32
  Speaker 9: of the X ray and seems to be objective. The
• 3:25:35
  Speaker 9: clairvoyant who possesses this power is able to see physical
• 3:25:39
  Speaker 9: objects through intervening physical matter, can perceive the internal parts
• 3:25:43
  Speaker 9: of the human body, diagnose disease, and observe the operations
• 3:25:48
  Speaker 9: of healing and decay. Cataleptic clairvoyance four. Cataleptic clairvoyance occurs
• 3:25:56
  Speaker 9: when the body is in a trance state resembling sleep,
• 3:25:59
  Speaker 9: induce by hypnotic power exercised by an incarnate or decarnate spirit,
• 3:26:05
  Speaker 9: or it may be self induced. When in this state,
• 3:26:08
  Speaker 9: the spirit leaves the body and is able at its
• 3:26:10
  Speaker 9: own will, or the suggestion of the hypnotist, to travel
• 3:26:14
  Speaker 9: to remote places and to see clearly what is transpiring
• 3:26:17
  Speaker 9: in the places it visits, and to observe spiritual as
• 3:26:21
  Speaker 9: well as material things in its environment. While in this state,
• 3:26:25
  Speaker 9: it sometimes happens that the thoughts of the spirit in
• 3:26:28
  Speaker 9: its travels are expressed by the lips of the physical body,
• 3:26:32
  Speaker 9: and that thought images are conveyed to it through the
• 3:26:34
  Speaker 9: physical body. This is due to the fact that there
• 3:26:37
  Speaker 9: is a spirit chord which connects the body and the
• 3:26:40
  Speaker 9: spirit and transmits vibrations between them. As long as this
• 3:26:44
  Speaker 9: chord is not severed, the spirit can return to the body.
• 3:26:47
  Speaker 9: But should it be severed, than what we call death
• 3:26:50
  Speaker 9: would at once ensue. Under this form of clairvoyance, there
• 3:26:54
  Speaker 9: is an interplending of subjective and objective spiritual sight. Trans
• 3:26:59
  Speaker 9: control clairvoyance five. Trans control clairvoyance is that psychic state
• 3:27:05
  Speaker 9: under which the control of the physical body of the
• 3:27:08
  Speaker 9: medium is assumed by a spirit intelligence, and the consciousness
• 3:27:12
  Speaker 9: of the medium is for the time being dethroned. In
• 3:27:17
  Speaker 9: this case, the controlling spirit is really the clairvoyant and
• 3:27:20
  Speaker 9: simply uses the medium's body as a means of communicating
• 3:27:24
  Speaker 9: what the spirit sees, and therefore the question of subjective
• 3:27:27
  Speaker 9: and objective spiritual sight, insofar as the medium is concerned,
• 3:27:32
  Speaker 9: cannot be raised. To some persons who go to mediums
• 3:27:35
  Speaker 9: for readings, and who may become witnesses and trials at law,
• 3:27:39
  Speaker 9: it may not be known that under trans control the
• 3:27:42
  Speaker 9: medium is to all intents and purposes absent. Therefore, in
• 3:27:47
  Speaker 9: dealing with definitions of clairvoyance to be used for the
• 3:27:49
  Speaker 9: enlightenment of thinking people, judges, and juries, it seems necessary
• 3:27:54
  Speaker 9: for the protection of such mediums to explain what is
• 3:27:57
  Speaker 9: here termed trance control clairvoyance, telepathic clairvoyance, et cetera. Six.
• 3:28:05
  Speaker 9: Telepathic clairvoyance is the subjective perception and picture form of
• 3:28:09
  Speaker 9: thought transmitted from a distance. The type of clairvoyance illustrated
• 3:28:14
  Speaker 9: in Class four is frequently called traveling clairvoyance because the
• 3:28:19
  Speaker 9: spirit appears to travel after leaving its body and visit
• 3:28:22
  Speaker 9: distant scenes. According to the above definitions, this type of
• 3:28:27
  Speaker 9: clairvoyance is classified under definition number one, but other authorities
• 3:28:31
  Speaker 9: would give it a separate class by itself. When the
• 3:28:34
  Speaker 9: psychic's mind seems to travel backward along the stream of
• 3:28:37
  Speaker 9: time and remembers events which were beyond its normal recollection.
• 3:28:41
  Speaker 9: We have cases of so called retrocognition, when, on the
• 3:28:46
  Speaker 9: other hand, the psychic's mind seems to travel forward into
• 3:28:50
  Speaker 9: the future and sees scenes in events which, of course
• 3:28:53
  Speaker 9: he was otherwise unable to foretell. We have cases of prevision, prophecy,
• 3:28:58
  Speaker 9: and precognition. This latter subject will be dealt with more
• 3:29:02
  Speaker 9: folly in the chapter devoted to prophecy versus fortune telling.
• 3:29:07
  Speaker 9: We also have spontaneous and experimental clairvoyance. These definitions explaining
• 3:29:12
  Speaker 9: themselves then direct and indirect clairvoyance direct when no other
• 3:29:18
  Speaker 9: mind or agency is involved, but the psychic zone indirect
• 3:29:22
  Speaker 9: when it goes through a roundabout channel and involves some
• 3:29:25
  Speaker 9: other mind, incarnate or discarnate. As opposed to telepathic clairvoyance,
• 3:29:31
  Speaker 9: we have so called independent clairvoyance. Also, there are cases
• 3:29:35
  Speaker 9: of reciprocal clairvoyance, in which two persons see one another
• 3:29:39
  Speaker 9: at the same time and, as it were, exchange their
• 3:29:43
  Speaker 9: clairvoyant visions. The type of clairvoyance which is characterized by
• 3:29:47
  Speaker 9: leaving the body and visiting the spiritual spheres, afterwards returning
• 3:29:51
  Speaker 9: to reanimate the body, is called ecstasy. Mister Ledbetter divides
• 3:29:57
  Speaker 9: clairvoyance into three subdivisions clairvoyance in time, clairvoyance in space,
• 3:30:02
  Speaker 9: and direct clairvoyance, in which the astral or spiritual senses
• 3:30:06
  Speaker 9: are opened up so as to perceive planes of activity
• 3:30:09
  Speaker 9: now about us. Dream clairvoyance. Clairvoyance may also occur in dreams,
• 3:30:16
  Speaker 9: crystall visions, et cetera, and clare audience, which corresponds to clairvoyance,
• 3:30:21
  Speaker 9: save that the information is obtained by means of the
• 3:30:23
  Speaker 9: ear rather than the eye. May be obtained through shell hearing.
• 3:30:28
  Speaker 9: In this case, the messages are heard rather than seen.
• 3:30:31
  Speaker 9: Another technical name for clairvoyance, which is sometimes used is telesthesia.
• 3:30:36
  Speaker 9: Clairvoyance may manifest itself in a variety of forms, as
• 3:30:39
  Speaker 9: the above definitions would signify. The most common form is
• 3:30:43
  Speaker 9: spontaneous clairvoyance, in which the psychic sees pictures of absent
• 3:30:48
  Speaker 9: persons and scenes. Clairvoyant dreams are fairly common. Clairvoyant diagnosis,
• 3:30:57
  Speaker 9: there is a type of mental clairvoyance which enable the
• 3:31:00
  Speaker 9: subject to see, as it were, into the body of
• 3:31:03
  Speaker 9: another diagnosing his disease, as though he perceived clearly the
• 3:31:06
  Speaker 9: conditions present in that individual's body at the time. This
• 3:31:11
  Speaker 9: form of psychic vision was possessed by Andrew Jackson, Davis
• 3:31:14
  Speaker 9: in a remarkable degree, but is possessed by many psychics
• 3:31:18
  Speaker 9: of our own day. Another form of clairvoyance is that
• 3:31:22
  Speaker 9: in which underground metals and waters may sometimes be perceived. Usually,
• 3:31:26
  Speaker 9: in this case, the psychic walks over the ground to
• 3:31:29
  Speaker 9: be explored with a forked twig or stick in his hands.
• 3:31:33
  Speaker 9: Suddenly this bends or dips, and where this happens water
• 3:31:36
  Speaker 9: or metal is to be found. This is technically known
• 3:31:40
  Speaker 9: as dowsing, and has been proved to exist as a
• 3:31:43
  Speaker 9: scientific fact by Sir William F. Barrett, Professor of Physics
• 3:31:48
  Speaker 9: in the University of Dublin. Of late years. A new
• 3:31:52
  Speaker 9: and peculiar type of clavoyance has been developed by mister
• 3:31:55
  Speaker 9: Vincent N. Turvey of London, a friend of mister W. T. Stead.
• 3:32:00
  Speaker 9: He termed this phone voyance for the reason that he
• 3:32:03
  Speaker 9: receives his impressions and intuitions, et cetera, when he is
• 3:32:06
  Speaker 9: conversing with a distant friend over the telephone, and then only.
• 3:32:11
  Speaker 9: This is a form of sensitiveness which could be obtained
• 3:32:14
  Speaker 9: by many psychics if they developed it. The explanation of clairvoyance.
• 3:32:19
  Speaker 9: Clairvoyance has been explained in a variety of ways, We
• 3:32:22
  Speaker 9: may briefly summarize these theories as follows. One the astral
• 3:32:27
  Speaker 9: or spiritual sense theory. This may be stated as follows.
• 3:32:31
  Speaker 9: Corresponding to each physical sense organ the eye, ear, et cetera,
• 3:32:36
  Speaker 9: there is a corresponding spiritual or astral sense organ. We
• 3:32:40
  Speaker 9: see physical objects by means of the physical eye, and
• 3:32:43
  Speaker 9: hear them by means of the physical ear. When we
• 3:32:46
  Speaker 9: see clairvoyantly, on the contrary, we see by means of
• 3:32:50
  Speaker 9: our spiritual eye, and when we hear Claire audiently, we
• 3:32:54
  Speaker 9: hear by means of the spiritual or astral ear. These
• 3:32:57
  Speaker 9: spiritual sense organs function in a spiritual world, and of
• 3:33:00
  Speaker 9: course serve the spiritual body when we die, as our
• 3:33:03
  Speaker 9: physical organs now serve us and operate on the spirit
• 3:33:06
  Speaker 9: plane of activity. If their use is not cultivated in
• 3:33:10
  Speaker 9: precisely the right direction, it may lead to difficulties. For
• 3:33:14
  Speaker 9: the reason that both the astral and spiritual sight may
• 3:33:16
  Speaker 9: be used at the same time, they may become mixed up,
• 3:33:20
  Speaker 9: and you may see two worlds at once instead of one,
• 3:33:23
  Speaker 9: so that you cannot be sure when you go outside
• 3:33:25
  Speaker 9: the door whether you are going to step on the
• 3:33:27
  Speaker 9: pavement or into a great ditch, both of which you
• 3:33:30
  Speaker 9: see equally clearly before you. Many persons have got into
• 3:33:34
  Speaker 9: this condition, which takes some time to outgrow. Two the
• 3:33:39
  Speaker 9: spiritual influence theory. According to this theory, clairvoyance is accomplished
• 3:33:44
  Speaker 9: not by means of the subject's own unaided powers, but
• 3:33:47
  Speaker 9: always through the instrumentality of a spirit who sees the
• 3:33:50
  Speaker 9: distant scenes, et cetera, and impresses them upon the subject's
• 3:33:54
  Speaker 9: mind telepathically. Tubes thought forms and direct perception the astral
• 3:34:01
  Speaker 9: tube theory. According to this view, the clairvoyant constructs a
• 3:34:06
  Speaker 9: sort of telescope or tube for himself out of astral matter,
• 3:34:10
  Speaker 9: and through this he looks. The figures in this case
• 3:34:13
  Speaker 9: always appear small and far off. Four By the creation
• 3:34:19
  Speaker 9: of a thought form. On this theory, we create a
• 3:34:22
  Speaker 9: thought form for ourselves in the locality we desire to
• 3:34:25
  Speaker 9: visit and utilize it for the purpose of observation. We
• 3:34:29
  Speaker 9: look out of its eyes here with its ears, et cetera.
• 3:34:33
  Speaker 9: Five the direct perception theory. This theory says that outside
• 3:34:38
  Speaker 9: influences play no part in the phenomena, but that we
• 3:34:42
  Speaker 9: perceive distant scenes ourselves by means of some process of
• 3:34:45
  Speaker 9: self projection. But here we are met with a difficulty
• 3:34:49
  Speaker 9: that if the psychic is absent viewing the distant scene,
• 3:34:53
  Speaker 9: how can he also be present in the room, animating
• 3:34:56
  Speaker 9: his own body and speaking through it, as he undoubtedly does.
• 3:35:00
  Speaker 9: In many cases. Most psychics, when they begin their development,
• 3:35:05
  Speaker 9: see shapes and figures more frequently than they experience any
• 3:35:08
  Speaker 9: other phenomena. They wonder why this should be, Why should
• 3:35:13
  Speaker 9: nearly all of us see?
• 3:35:15
  Speaker 11: Now?
• 3:35:15
  Speaker 9: And then it is true we come across one who
• 3:35:18
  Speaker 9: hears more easily than sees, but he is the exception,
• 3:35:21
  Speaker 9: not the rule. Why and how we see in clairvoyance.
• 3:35:26
  Speaker 9: The explanation of this fact is probably the following. We
• 3:35:31
  Speaker 9: use our eyes more than we do any other one
• 3:35:33
  Speaker 9: of our senses. We feel that our active consciousness is
• 3:35:37
  Speaker 9: more connected with sight than with anything else. The sight
• 3:35:41
  Speaker 9: centers in the brain are more used than any of
• 3:35:44
  Speaker 9: the others, and this fact is proved by dreams in
• 3:35:47
  Speaker 9: which we see figures, but very seldom hear spoken words. Again,
• 3:35:52
  Speaker 9: our memory consists mostly of visual symbols. If we think
• 3:35:56
  Speaker 9: of a person, we call up his image before us,
• 3:35:59
  Speaker 9: this being memory image. Now, as these parts of the
• 3:36:03
  Speaker 9: mind and brain are so active, it is only an
• 3:36:06
  Speaker 9: extension of this faculty of inducing memory images, which enables
• 3:36:10
  Speaker 9: us to see objects and figures in clairvoyance. We only
• 3:36:14
  Speaker 9: have to force this faculty of the mind a little
• 3:36:16
  Speaker 9: more than usual to carry it beyond the limitations of
• 3:36:19
  Speaker 9: physical sense, whereas with the other senses, much less used,
• 3:36:24
  Speaker 9: we have to do a great deal more of this
• 3:36:26
  Speaker 9: cultivating or forcing process in order to develop the corresponding
• 3:36:30
  Speaker 9: spiritual organs. Clairvoyance and similar faculties depend in many cases
• 3:36:36
  Speaker 9: upon the partial liberation or freeing of the spirit from
• 3:36:39
  Speaker 9: the body and the stimulation of the corresponding psychic sense
• 3:36:42
  Speaker 9: organs into a higher degree of activity, and so permitting
• 3:36:47
  Speaker 9: their use. The following are a few exercises which will
• 3:36:50
  Speaker 9: be found helpful in developing this faculty of clairvoyance according
• 3:36:54
  Speaker 9: to our methods of development. Developing exercises, one s each
• 3:37:00
  Speaker 9: yourself in a comfortable chair in a semi darkened room.
• 3:37:03
  Speaker 9: Mentally construct i e. Imagine before you a tube open
• 3:37:07
  Speaker 9: at both ends. One end of this tube fits over
• 3:37:11
  Speaker 9: your eyes, and the other end extends indefinitely outward into space.
• 3:37:16
  Speaker 9: Imagine that this tube is hollow, and that you can
• 3:37:19
  Speaker 9: see through it perfectly. Turn this tube in the direction
• 3:37:22
  Speaker 9: of the house of a friend of yours. Mentally, go
• 3:37:25
  Speaker 9: into a room and see if you can discover in
• 3:37:28
  Speaker 9: it any one present, and if so, who he is
• 3:37:31
  Speaker 9: and what he looks like. Note what you see carefully.
• 3:37:36
  Speaker 9: You will be able to verify the next day how
• 3:37:38
  Speaker 9: far your vision is correct. Two, construct the tube as before.
• 3:37:44
  Speaker 9: At the other end of this tube, which you should
• 3:37:47
  Speaker 9: imagine about one hundred yards long, you must endeavor to
• 3:37:50
  Speaker 9: see clairvoyantly the face of a friend. Try to distinguish
• 3:37:54
  Speaker 9: the features of this face, making them clearer and clearer.
• 3:37:58
  Speaker 9: When you have done this, gradually pull it toward you
• 3:38:01
  Speaker 9: by an effort of will, until it is only about
• 3:38:04
  Speaker 9: two or three feet distant. It should then be perfectly
• 3:38:08
  Speaker 9: clear and every feature distinguishable. When you have succeeded in
• 3:38:12
  Speaker 9: visualizing this face so clearly that you see it as
• 3:38:15
  Speaker 9: distinctly as you would if that individual stood before you
• 3:38:18
  Speaker 9: in life, your progress as a clairvoyant will have made
• 3:38:21
  Speaker 9: great advances, and you may then begin experiments at influencing
• 3:38:26
  Speaker 9: this person at a distance, while seeing his face before you.
• 3:38:29
  Speaker 9: As explained, will that he should do a certain thing
• 3:38:33
  Speaker 9: to think of you at a certain time, or see
• 3:38:36
  Speaker 9: your face float before him as he is busy with
• 3:38:38
  Speaker 9: his daily occupations. If you practice this persistently, you will
• 3:38:43
  Speaker 9: ultimately achieve success, being able to influence persons without doubt
• 3:38:48
  Speaker 9: polarization and how to use it. This ability to influence
• 3:38:52
  Speaker 9: a distant person or object by means of your will,
• 3:38:55
  Speaker 9: when directed toward him, has been termed a polarization because
• 3:39:00
  Speaker 9: as you polarize a path or channel through the astral
• 3:39:02
  Speaker 9: atmosphere toward the desired point, and this channel facilitates psychic
• 3:39:07
  Speaker 9: communication in both directions. A great deal depends during these
• 3:39:12
  Speaker 9: experiments upon your ability to hold the object clearly in
• 3:39:15
  Speaker 9: your mind's eye and to concentrate upon it. If you
• 3:39:19
  Speaker 9: do not do this, your efforts will be lost, since
• 3:39:22
  Speaker 9: you will find there are a great many astral currents
• 3:39:25
  Speaker 9: playing to and fro which tend to disintegrate your own
• 3:39:28
  Speaker 9: currents set up by you, and unless these are strong,
• 3:39:32
  Speaker 9: you will not succeed in overcoming the astral cross currents.
• 3:39:36
  Speaker 9: In conducting these experiments, you must be sure, especially at first,
• 3:39:41
  Speaker 9: always to keep your consciousness centered in your own body
• 3:39:45
  Speaker 9: and not to let it go outward into space along
• 3:39:47
  Speaker 9: with your thought. Your will alone must travel outward. You
• 3:39:51
  Speaker 9: must keep your consciousness within your own physical body. If
• 3:39:55
  Speaker 9: you do not do this, you will be apt to
• 3:39:57
  Speaker 9: get into trouble. Your starting point, your focal center, as
• 3:40:01
  Speaker 9: it is called, must always be maintained. In developing clairvoyance,
• 3:40:07
  Speaker 9: you should remember that faith and belief tend to open
• 3:40:10
  Speaker 9: up your latent powers and faculties, while disbelief has the
• 3:40:13
  Speaker 9: contrary effect of closing them and shutting off all further development.
• 3:40:18
  Speaker 9: This is true in all lines of psychic unfoldment. Clairvoyance
• 3:40:22
  Speaker 9: is a faculty possessed by the whole human race in
• 3:40:25
  Speaker 9: varying degrees, and there are indications that with each generation
• 3:40:29
  Speaker 9: its power is becoming greater and greater, so that the
• 3:40:33
  Speaker 9: time will doubtless come when every one will see clairvoyantly,
• 3:40:36
  Speaker 9: just as we now see with our ordinary eyes. In fact,
• 3:40:39
  Speaker 9: the possession of strong intuition and sentiments, sensing the feelings
• 3:40:43
  Speaker 9: and emotions of others, et cetera, are but undeveloped clairvoyant flashes,
• 3:40:48
  Speaker 9: giving you an insight into the mind of a person
• 3:40:50
  Speaker 9: with whom you are conversing. Factors in the development of clairvoyance.
• 3:40:55
  Speaker 9: Concentration is an important factor in the cultivation of clairvoyance.
• 3:41:00
  Speaker 9: You must train your mind so that you can think
• 3:41:02
  Speaker 9: of a particular object for several minutes without relaxing or
• 3:41:05
  Speaker 9: allowing any other thought to enter your consciousness. You must
• 3:41:10
  Speaker 9: practice gazing in an object until you can do this
• 3:41:13
  Speaker 9: for two or three minutes without moving your eyes and
• 3:41:16
  Speaker 9: without fatigue. You should cultivate deep breathing exercises, and during inspiration,
• 3:41:22
  Speaker 9: think that you are drawing on the vital energy of
• 3:41:24
  Speaker 9: the universe, while with each breath you exhale, you are
• 3:41:28
  Speaker 9: throwing off any adverse influences which may have come to you.
• 3:41:32
  Speaker 9: Visualizing is an important factor in developing clairvoyance. You should
• 3:41:36
  Speaker 9: get into the habit of calling up before your mind
• 3:41:39
  Speaker 9: a face you have seen or a scene you have
• 3:41:41
  Speaker 9: witnessed that day, trying to remember every detail and making
• 3:41:45
  Speaker 9: it clearer and clearer. Until you have every detail clear
• 3:41:49
  Speaker 9: in your mind's eye, you should then endeavor to project
• 3:41:52
  Speaker 9: it outward into space as though you were seeing these
• 3:41:55
  Speaker 9: pictures outside your head as real entities and not merely
• 3:41:59
  Speaker 9: as memory pictures. Crystal gazing, et cetera will greatly help
• 3:42:03
  Speaker 9: in this. How to distinguish true from false? One question
• 3:42:08
  Speaker 9: which always presents itself to the mind of the student
• 3:42:11
  Speaker 9: is this, how can I distinguish the true from the false,
• 3:42:15
  Speaker 9: real clairvoyant visions from memory, pictures and hallucinations. It is
• 3:42:20
  Speaker 9: extremely difficult to do this, particularly for the beginner, and
• 3:42:24
  Speaker 9: this ability to distinguish comes only with prolonged practice and experience.
• 3:42:29
  Speaker 9: A lady of my acquaintance has all her life been
• 3:42:32
  Speaker 9: enabled to distinguish between phantasmal figures of the living and
• 3:42:35
  Speaker 9: those of the dead. That is, she could tell by
• 3:42:38
  Speaker 9: looking at the figure whether it represented a living or
• 3:42:41
  Speaker 9: a dead person. Again, she was always able to tell
• 3:42:45
  Speaker 9: whether this was a genuine or helpful intelligence, or whether
• 3:42:48
  Speaker 9: it was an evil or lying one. This ability to
• 3:42:52
  Speaker 9: distinguish cannot be gained in a day. It must come
• 3:42:55
  Speaker 9: by practice, and the beginnings of genuine clairvoyance can only
• 3:42:59
  Speaker 9: be ascertained by experiment and by following up on the
• 3:43:02
  Speaker 9: visions and figures which appear to one and see whether
• 3:43:05
  Speaker 9: they lead to anything definite in the way of progress
• 3:43:08
  Speaker 9: and enlightenment or not. As to the various symbols and
• 3:43:12
  Speaker 9: colors which appear to the clairvoyant, these should be interpreted
• 3:43:16
  Speaker 9: according to the rules laid down in chapters eleven and
• 3:43:19
  Speaker 9: twelve devoted to these subjects. Clairvoyance and dreams will be
• 3:43:23
  Speaker 9: discussed in the next chapter. A few words in conclusion.
• 3:43:28
  Speaker 9: As to the theory of clairvoyance, it will be remembered
• 3:43:32
  Speaker 9: that I enumerated before pages one hundred seventeen to one
• 3:43:35
  Speaker 9: hundred twenty four, the various theories which have been advanced
• 3:43:39
  Speaker 9: to explain clairvoyance, the astral sense theory, the direct vision theory,
• 3:43:44
  Speaker 9: et cetera. Our own view of the matter is that
• 3:43:47
  Speaker 9: all of the explanations previously proposed are in a sense true,
• 3:43:52
  Speaker 9: that is, they are all true in particular cases, but
• 3:43:55
  Speaker 9: that none of them explains all types of clairvoyance. The
• 3:43:59
  Speaker 9: spirit in Rue's theory is true in some instances, the
• 3:44:03
  Speaker 9: direct clairvoyance theory is true in others, and the astral
• 3:44:07
  Speaker 9: sense theory is the correct one in still others, et cetera.
• 3:44:11
  Speaker 9: The mystery solved as to the difficulty which is presented
• 3:44:16
  Speaker 9: by the fact that a clairvoyant can animate and speak
• 3:44:19
  Speaker 9: through his own body while he is psychically active elsewhere.
• 3:44:23
  Speaker 9: This is explained by assuming that only a portion of
• 3:44:26
  Speaker 9: his total psychic self remains behind, and that the more
• 3:44:29
  Speaker 9: active spirit part performs the journey or excursion, this part
• 3:44:34
  Speaker 9: being connected to the physical body by means of a
• 3:44:36
  Speaker 9: chord or connection which unites it to the latter. This
• 3:44:40
  Speaker 9: connection is sometimes called the silver thread and is the
• 3:44:44
  Speaker 9: channel of communication between the spirit and its body while
• 3:44:48
  Speaker 9: the former has gone on its excursion. If this thread
• 3:44:52
  Speaker 9: were to snap or become broken, death would take place,
• 3:44:55
  Speaker 9: since the spirit would be unable to return and reanimate
• 3:44:59
  Speaker 9: the body. Such accidents are extremely rare, but they have
• 3:45:03
  Speaker 9: been recorded from time to time in the past. In clairvoyance,
• 3:45:08
  Speaker 9: the connection remains, of course intact, and communication back and
• 3:45:12
  Speaker 9: forth between the body and the absent psychic self takes
• 3:45:16
  Speaker 9: place along this cord or thread. In still other types
• 3:45:20
  Speaker 9: of clairvoyance, on the other hand, no actual excursion or
• 3:45:23
  Speaker 9: leaving the body takes place. The act of consciousness remains
• 3:45:27
  Speaker 9: in the body, animating it, while the clairvoyant vision takes
• 3:45:31
  Speaker 9: place through the psychic telescope or tube before mentioned. In
• 3:45:36
  Speaker 9: such cases there is no difficulty in accounting for all
• 3:45:39
  Speaker 9: we see. But this is not such an advanced type
• 3:45:42
  Speaker 9: of clairvoyance as the former, in which the psychic self
• 3:45:46
  Speaker 9: leaves the body and goes on trips and excursions of
• 3:45:49
  Speaker 9: its own. End of Chapter fourteen.
• 3:45:54
  Speaker 3: Dreams. Dreams usually take place during sleep, though there is
• 3:45:59
  Speaker 3: a peculiar form of imaginative picturing, which may occur sometimes
• 3:46:04
  Speaker 3: during the waking hours, and which we call day dreaming.
• 3:46:08
  Speaker 3: Of these I shall treat in another place. Speaking first
• 3:46:12
  Speaker 3: of ordinary dreams, I may begin by pointing out that
• 3:46:16
  Speaker 3: before we can understand them, we must know a little
• 3:46:18
  Speaker 3: of the nature and phenomena of sleep in which they occur.
• 3:46:22
  Speaker 3: We all spend about one third of our lives in sleep,
• 3:46:25
  Speaker 3: so that this is a condition which we should certainly
• 3:46:28
  Speaker 3: know something about, if we possibly can. What is sleep?
• 3:46:34
  Speaker 3: Various theories have been advanced in the past to explain sleep,
• 3:46:38
  Speaker 3: but no satisfactory theory has ever been fully accepted. Thus
• 3:46:42
  Speaker 3: we have the so called chemical theories, which endeavor to
• 3:46:45
  Speaker 3: account for sleep by assuming that certain poisonous substances are
• 3:46:50
  Speaker 3: formed in the body during waking hours and are eliminated
• 3:46:54
  Speaker 3: during sleep. Others have suggested that sleep is due to
• 3:46:59
  Speaker 3: peculiar can nitions of the circulation of blood in the brain.
• 3:47:03
  Speaker 3: Still others that the action of certain glands explains sleep,
• 3:47:07
  Speaker 3: Others that muscular relaxation accounts for it, Others that the
• 3:47:12
  Speaker 3: lack of external stimuli is sufficient to induce profound slumber.
• 3:47:17
  Speaker 3: All of these theories have been shown insufficient to explain
• 3:47:20
  Speaker 3: the facts. We shall never arrive at a satisfactory theory
• 3:47:24
  Speaker 3: of sleep, doubtless until we admit the presence of a
• 3:47:28
  Speaker 3: vital force and the existence of an individual human spirit
• 3:47:32
  Speaker 3: which withdraws more or less completely from the body during
• 3:47:35
  Speaker 3: the hours of sleep, and derive spiritual invigoration and nourishment
• 3:47:40
  Speaker 3: during its sojourn in the spiritual world. We shall speak
• 3:47:44
  Speaker 3: of this more fully presently the seven common dreams for
• 3:47:51
  Speaker 3: the present we must explain. To begin with the common
• 3:47:54
  Speaker 3: types of dreams and show how they are to be
• 3:47:57
  Speaker 3: accounted for. There are seven types of dreams, which it
• 3:48:01
  Speaker 3: is said everybody experiences at one time or another in
• 3:48:05
  Speaker 3: his life. These are one the falling dream, two the
• 3:48:11
  Speaker 3: flying dream, three the dream of inadequate clothing. Four the
• 3:48:16
  Speaker 3: dream of not being able to get away from some
• 3:48:18
  Speaker 3: beast or injurious person or thing that is pursuing. Five,
• 3:48:23
  Speaker 3: the dream of being drawn irresistibly to some dangerous place.
• 3:48:27
  Speaker 3: Six the dream that some darling wish has been gratified.
• 3:48:32
  Speaker 3: Seven the dream of being about to go on a
• 3:48:34
  Speaker 3: journey and being unable to get your things into your trunk,
• 3:48:37
  Speaker 3: et cetera. Some of these dreams are to be explained
• 3:48:41
  Speaker 3: in one way, some in another. But broadly speaking, it
• 3:48:45
  Speaker 3: may be said that all ordinary dreams, such as the above,
• 3:48:49
  Speaker 3: or others of a like type, are due to one
• 3:48:51
  Speaker 3: of three causes one physical stimuli, two subconscious mental association,
• 3:48:58
  Speaker 3: three some kind imagination. In addition to this subconscious field,
• 3:49:04
  Speaker 3: there is also another, the super conscious, of which we
• 3:49:08
  Speaker 3: shall speak later, But as this is not recognized by
• 3:49:11
  Speaker 3: orthodox psychologists of today, we shall not discuss it for
• 3:49:15
  Speaker 3: the present. Causes of dreams. Physical stimuli give rise to
• 3:49:21
  Speaker 3: dreams in this way. The dream of inadequate clothing, for example,
• 3:49:26
  Speaker 3: is doubtless produced by chilling the surface of the body,
• 3:49:30
  Speaker 3: this in turn usually being due to the bedclothes falling
• 3:49:33
  Speaker 3: off onto the floor. The dream of falling is probably
• 3:49:37
  Speaker 3: due to the fact that by lying too long in
• 3:49:39
  Speaker 3: one position, the blood supply is cut off, causing loss
• 3:49:44
  Speaker 3: of sensation in the under part of the body, this
• 3:49:47
  Speaker 3: in turn giving rise to the idea that we are
• 3:49:49
  Speaker 3: not supported, consequently that we are flying or falling, et cetera.
• 3:49:55
  Speaker 3: If a book is dropped, this may be symbolized as
• 3:49:58
  Speaker 3: the report of a pistol in a duel et cetera.
• 3:50:03
  Speaker 3: Association causes many dreams in the following way, One idea
• 3:50:07
  Speaker 3: or object of the mind brings up another connected with it,
• 3:50:11
  Speaker 3: more or less directly, as it would be in life,
• 3:50:14
  Speaker 3: and the whole storehouse of the subconscious mind is drawn
• 3:50:17
  Speaker 3: upon in these associations, so that dreams are far more
• 3:50:21
  Speaker 3: varied than our conscious associations. In addition to this, the
• 3:50:25
  Speaker 3: third factor, namely imagination, is greatly enlarged and given free play,
• 3:50:31
  Speaker 3: for the reason that the conscious logical mind is dormant
• 3:50:34
  Speaker 3: to a great extent, and hence the wild flights of
• 3:50:37
  Speaker 3: imagination which we take in sleep are possible the interpretation
• 3:50:43
  Speaker 3: of dreams. It is because of these facts that nothing
• 3:50:48
  Speaker 3: appears absurd to us while we are dreaming. No matter
• 3:50:51
  Speaker 3: how ridiculous the situation may be, it never seems so
• 3:50:54
  Speaker 3: to us until we are awake and able to reason
• 3:50:57
  Speaker 3: over it. The curious medley of thoughts composing most dreams
• 3:51:01
  Speaker 3: presents a striking resemblance to the ravings of delirium and insanity.
• 3:51:06
  Speaker 3: In various medical authors have written books aiming to show
• 3:51:10
  Speaker 3: the close similarity between dreams and such insane wanderings. It
• 3:51:16
  Speaker 3: has been shown of late years that almost all dreams, however,
• 3:51:20
  Speaker 3: logical they may appear, are in reality more or less consistent,
• 3:51:24
  Speaker 3: and that a logical strain or undercurrent may be found
• 3:51:27
  Speaker 3: running through them if they are analyzed and examined carefully enough.
• 3:51:33
  Speaker 3: The celebrated doctor Freud of Vienna has worked out an
• 3:51:36
  Speaker 3: elaborate system of dream interpretation based on his exploration of
• 3:51:40
  Speaker 3: the subconscious mind, and those who may be interested may
• 3:51:44
  Speaker 3: consult his recent work on dreams. He traces most dreams
• 3:51:49
  Speaker 3: to early childhood impressions and believes that they express, as
• 3:51:53
  Speaker 3: a rule, suppressed wishes which have slumbered in the subconscious
• 3:51:56
  Speaker 3: mind of the dreamer and are externalized in this form.
• 3:52:02
  Speaker 3: Dreams have in fact been compared to the bubbles which
• 3:52:05
  Speaker 3: break upon the surface of a pond of water. In
• 3:52:08
  Speaker 3: both cases they have risen upwards through the lower strata,
• 3:52:11
  Speaker 3: and we see the finished product only what gave rise
• 3:52:15
  Speaker 3: to this This is a subject for further investigation. How
• 3:52:21
  Speaker 3: to analyze dreams. If you wish to ascertain the causes
• 3:52:26
  Speaker 3: of certain dreams, you may often do so in the
• 3:52:28
  Speaker 3: following manner. Place your subject, who wishes his dream analyzed,
• 3:52:33
  Speaker 3: in a comfortable chair, seated in a quiet room in
• 3:52:36
  Speaker 3: semi darkness, set going a metronome, or ask him to
• 3:52:41
  Speaker 3: listen to the tick of a large clock. While doing this,
• 3:52:44
  Speaker 3: certain images and impressions will arise before his mind. Ask
• 3:52:49
  Speaker 3: him to tell you what these are. As soon as
• 3:52:52
  Speaker 3: he has done so, question him as to the origin
• 3:52:54
  Speaker 3: of these, et cetera. And by continued questioning, going deeper
• 3:52:58
  Speaker 3: all the time into his mind, you will ultimately find
• 3:53:01
  Speaker 3: out the origin of his dream. An example will prove this.
• 3:53:07
  Speaker 3: A lady of our acquaintance went into hysterics every time
• 3:53:10
  Speaker 3: she smelled plum pudding. She could not account for this.
• 3:53:14
  Speaker 3: One night, she had a dream in which she saw
• 3:53:17
  Speaker 3: herself cooking pudding in the kitchen and woke up in
• 3:53:20
  Speaker 3: a great state of fear and excitement. Analysis of this
• 3:53:24
  Speaker 3: dream showed that when she was a little girl, she
• 3:53:27
  Speaker 3: had been left alone in the kitchen while pudding was cooking,
• 3:53:30
  Speaker 3: and that the pudding had burnt and nearly set the
• 3:53:32
  Speaker 3: house on fire. She saw herself running from the kitchen
• 3:53:36
  Speaker 3: and screaming. As soon as this was discovered, she no
• 3:53:39
  Speaker 3: longer experienced any fear or unpleasant sensations while smelling any
• 3:53:44
  Speaker 3: kind of pudding. She was, in fact, completely cured. The
• 3:53:50
  Speaker 3: sub conscious fear had been removed and its evil effects ceased.
• 3:53:55
  Speaker 3: Many similar fears which terrorize our dreams and cause nightmare
• 3:53:59
  Speaker 3: could be shown to be due to these early childish impressions,
• 3:54:03
  Speaker 3: were we to analyze carefully enough such dreams. The symbolism
• 3:54:08
  Speaker 3: of dreams. The main characteristic of nearly all dreams is
• 3:54:13
  Speaker 3: their symbolism of all our experience. As dreams are doubtless
• 3:54:17
  Speaker 3: the most symbolic, they represent certain wishes, desires, emotions, thoughts,
• 3:54:23
  Speaker 3: et cetera, which fill the subconscious mind and which become
• 3:54:27
  Speaker 3: associated together forming what are known as complexes. These thoughts,
• 3:54:32
  Speaker 3: as they become externalized, are presented in symbolic form. Thus
• 3:54:37
  Speaker 3: a snake may be a symbol of fear and hatred,
• 3:54:40
  Speaker 3: an angel may be a symbol of love. A key
• 3:54:44
  Speaker 3: may be a symbol of success, et cetera. Seeing and
• 3:54:49
  Speaker 3: hearing dreams, few people see colors and dreams. The shadows
• 3:54:54
  Speaker 3: and figures which make up nearly all dream images are
• 3:54:57
  Speaker 3: colorless or are of the consistence of light smoke. Just
• 3:55:01
  Speaker 3: why this should be so we do not exactly know.
• 3:55:04
  Speaker 3: But some artists who deal a great deal in color
• 3:55:08
  Speaker 3: experience dreams in which all the characters are clothed in
• 3:55:11
  Speaker 3: gorgeous and highly colored robes. This, however, is the exception,
• 3:55:16
  Speaker 3: not the rule. Again, why do we all see figures, scenes,
• 3:55:21
  Speaker 3: et cetera in our dreams? We very seldom hear either
• 3:55:25
  Speaker 3: music or spoken conversation. Words are more rare than pictures.
• 3:55:30
  Speaker 3: The reason for this is probably that we use our
• 3:55:32
  Speaker 3: eyes more continually and more consciously than we do our ears,
• 3:55:37
  Speaker 3: and for this reason the visual images are more easily
• 3:55:40
  Speaker 3: expressed than the auditory symbols. Smell, taste, and touch are
• 3:55:45
  Speaker 3: even more rare factors in dreams than hearing. Many persons
• 3:55:50
  Speaker 3: experience peculiar visions while falling to sleep. They see hundreds
• 3:55:55
  Speaker 3: of tiny faces before them in the dark, which may
• 3:55:58
  Speaker 3: condense into one and larger and larger, and finally vanishes,
• 3:56:03
  Speaker 3: et cetera. These are well understood and need cause no
• 3:56:07
  Speaker 3: fear or anxiety. Persistent dream images, on the other hand,
• 3:56:14
  Speaker 3: dream pictures or images may continue for some moments after awakening,
• 3:56:19
  Speaker 3: and these are called persistent dream images. Thus, doctor Abercrombie
• 3:56:24
  Speaker 3: mentions an instance of a medical friend of his who,
• 3:56:27
  Speaker 3: having sat up late one evening, fell asleep in his
• 3:56:30
  Speaker 3: chair and had a frightful dream in which the prominent
• 3:56:33
  Speaker 3: figure was an immense baboon. He awoke with the fright,
• 3:56:38
  Speaker 3: got up instantly and walked to a table which was
• 3:56:41
  Speaker 3: in the middle of the room. He was then awake
• 3:56:43
  Speaker 3: and quite conscious of the articles around him, but close
• 3:56:47
  Speaker 3: to the wall of the apartment, he distinctly saw the
• 3:56:50
  Speaker 3: baboon making the same grimaces which he had seen in
• 3:56:53
  Speaker 3: his dream, and the picture continued visible for about half
• 3:56:57
  Speaker 3: a minute. This is a good case of persistent dream image.
• 3:57:03
  Speaker 3: What is somnambulism? Occasionally the muscular system becomes active during
• 3:57:09
  Speaker 3: sleep instead of the senses only, and then we have
• 3:57:12
  Speaker 3: cases of somnambulism in which the patient walks and talks
• 3:57:17
  Speaker 3: in his sleep, et cetera, and even does consecutive mental work.
• 3:57:22
  Speaker 3: This shows a too active condition of his sub conscious mind,
• 3:57:26
  Speaker 3: which should be checked by proper treatment. It is extremely
• 3:57:30
  Speaker 3: dangerous to wake anyone suddenly in the middle of an
• 3:57:33
  Speaker 3: access of somnambulism. If the patient talks in his sleep,
• 3:57:38
  Speaker 3: it may be very interesting at times to converse with
• 3:57:41
  Speaker 3: him in a low tone and see whether or not
• 3:57:44
  Speaker 3: he will reply intelligently. Many cases are on record in
• 3:57:49
  Speaker 3: which valuable information has been obtained in this way, not
• 3:57:53
  Speaker 3: only about the subject, but about distant scenes and even
• 3:57:56
  Speaker 3: about his spirit friends. It is possible also to cultivate
• 3:58:01
  Speaker 3: automatic writing with a good somnambulist, and in one case
• 3:58:05
  Speaker 3: known to us, the patient went to bed with a
• 3:58:08
  Speaker 3: planchette board tied to her hand, the pencil resting on
• 3:58:12
  Speaker 3: a large sheet of paper, and when she awoke in
• 3:58:14
  Speaker 3: the morning it was covered with interesting messages. This is
• 3:58:19
  Speaker 3: an experiment which the enthusiastic student would do well to repeat.
• 3:58:24
  Speaker 3: I must now speak of super conscious dreams, in which
• 3:58:28
  Speaker 3: we are brought into contact with a higher plane of
• 3:58:30
  Speaker 3: life and activity in the same way that we are
• 3:58:33
  Speaker 3: in contact with a lower plane during many of our
• 3:58:36
  Speaker 3: ordinary dreams. When this happens, we experience so called supernormal dreams,
• 3:58:42
  Speaker 3: of which the following are types supernormal dreams. One the
• 3:58:48
  Speaker 3: telepathic dream, in which telepathy occurs during sleep between a
• 3:58:52
  Speaker 3: distant living mind and the sleeping mind of the subject.
• 3:58:57
  Speaker 3: Information is thereby imparted which the slip could not possibly
• 3:59:01
  Speaker 3: have known. For instance, in one case, the sleeper's brother
• 3:59:05
  Speaker 3: appeared to him and notified him of his own recent accident,
• 3:59:09
  Speaker 3: which proved to be true. In another case, the sleeper
• 3:59:13
  Speaker 3: dreamed that a friend of his told him something which
• 3:59:15
  Speaker 3: also proved to be true, et cetera. These are so
• 3:59:19
  Speaker 3: called telepathic dreams. Two clairvoyant dreams, in which the subject
• 3:59:25
  Speaker 3: sees distant scenes and his vision subsequently proves to be true.
• 3:59:30
  Speaker 3: In such cases, the dreamer apparently leaves his body and
• 3:59:34
  Speaker 3: travels to the locality in question. Three promontory dreams, in
• 3:59:39
  Speaker 3: which a vision of the future is obtained in a
• 3:59:42
  Speaker 3: few days, weeks, or months, as the case may be.
• 3:59:45
  Speaker 3: This dream vision is fulfilled to the letter. Four. Spirit
• 3:59:51
  Speaker 3: communication during dreams in which a discarnate spirit apparently appears
• 3:59:55
  Speaker 3: and gives a message to the sleeper, either of consolation
• 3:59:59
  Speaker 3: or perhaps tells him an important item of news which
• 4:00:02
  Speaker 3: he should know. In cases of this character, we border
• 4:00:07
  Speaker 3: very closely upon the medium trance and true mediumship. In
• 4:00:11
  Speaker 3: rare cases, communication has apparently been established in this manner.
• 4:00:17
  Speaker 3: Experimentally induce dreams. It is possible to induce telepathic dreams
• 4:00:23
  Speaker 3: experimentally in another and you will find it most interesting
• 4:00:26
  Speaker 3: to endeavor to do this, or to serve as the
• 4:00:29
  Speaker 3: subject for others who endeavor to induce certain dreams in
• 4:00:32
  Speaker 3: you during your sleeping hours. In such cases, the sleeper
• 4:00:37
  Speaker 3: has only to describe as carefully as possible his dreams.
• 4:00:41
  Speaker 3: On awakening, Those who endeavor to impress the dreams upon
• 4:00:45
  Speaker 3: him must picture in their minds a clearly formed series
• 4:00:49
  Speaker 3: of images, allowing these to float before them in space,
• 4:00:53
  Speaker 3: endeavoring to impress each one in turn upon the sleeper
• 4:00:57
  Speaker 3: by the power of will. After a little practice, these
• 4:01:01
  Speaker 3: experiments will often be found to succeed. It is possible
• 4:01:06
  Speaker 3: to control our own dreams to a certain extent if
• 4:01:09
  Speaker 3: we desire to do so. Thus, on falling to sleep,
• 4:01:13
  Speaker 3: you may will that you experience dreams of a certain character,
• 4:01:17
  Speaker 3: and if you set about it rightly, you can obtain these.
• 4:01:20
  Speaker 3: In many instances, help is frequently given in this way.
• 4:01:25
  Speaker 3: I know of several cases in which a subject has
• 4:01:27
  Speaker 3: fallen to sleep after mentally suggesting to herself that she
• 4:01:31
  Speaker 3: would receive enlightenment, help and counsel through her dreams concerning
• 4:01:36
  Speaker 3: the difficult problems of her daily life. In practically every
• 4:01:41
  Speaker 3: case this was given, though often in somewhat symbolic form.
• 4:01:45
  Speaker 3: If this were cultivated, it would prove a useful adjunct
• 4:01:49
  Speaker 3: to our daily lives. Remembering dreams another good experiment which
• 4:01:55
  Speaker 3: the interested pupils should make would be to endeavor to
• 4:01:58
  Speaker 3: catch himself falling asleep, that is, to analyze the gradual
• 4:02:03
  Speaker 3: loss of consciousness in his own person which occurs as
• 4:02:06
  Speaker 3: he is falling into sleep. Some people can catch themselves
• 4:02:11
  Speaker 3: in this way, and others cannot. Those who are wide
• 4:02:14
  Speaker 3: awake one minute and asleep the next will probably never
• 4:02:17
  Speaker 3: make first class mediums. Those who linger in the borderland
• 4:02:22
  Speaker 3: the longest are those who are naturally most psychic. Another
• 4:02:27
  Speaker 3: test is that of remembering dreams. If you can remember
• 4:02:31
  Speaker 3: clearly a large percentage of your dreams, you are probably
• 4:02:34
  Speaker 3: quite psychic. On the other hand, if you remember nothing
• 4:02:38
  Speaker 3: that has occurred during sleep, you are more or less
• 4:02:41
  Speaker 3: matter of fact, and unless you are the exception, probably
• 4:02:44
  Speaker 3: will not attain any very great development along psychic lines.
• 4:02:49
  Speaker 3: It is unwise, however, to cultivate to too great an extent,
• 4:02:53
  Speaker 3: this habit of remembering your dreams. If you do, you
• 4:02:56
  Speaker 3: will thin the wall which separates your dream life from
• 4:02:59
  Speaker 3: your wake life, and if this becomes perforated, trouble may result.
• 4:03:05
  Speaker 3: Keep the two distinct. Therefore, after your first initial experiments
• 4:03:09
  Speaker 3: at introspection and dream analysis end of chapter fifteen.
• 4:03:15
  Speaker 12: Chapter sixteen automatic writing. Automatic writing means writing which is
• 4:03:21
  Speaker 12: performed without the use of the conscious mind, that is,
• 4:03:24
  Speaker 12: writing which is performed by the unconscious muscular energies of
• 4:03:28
  Speaker 12: the hand and arm, hence automatic or non conscious writing.
• 4:03:32
  Speaker 12: A pencil is taken in the ordinary way and held
• 4:03:35
  Speaker 12: over a piece of paper, and in a short time
• 4:03:38
  Speaker 12: it will be noticed that slight movements of the pencil occur,
• 4:03:41
  Speaker 12: making scrawling marks on the paper. As time goes on,
• 4:03:45
  Speaker 12: these marks become more and more consistent and consecutive. They
• 4:03:49
  Speaker 12: begin to form circles, hooks, et cetera, until letters, then words,
• 4:03:54
  Speaker 12: and finally whole sentences are written out. How to obtain
• 4:03:58
  Speaker 12: automatic writing? The best way to obtain automatic writing is
• 4:04:03
  Speaker 12: to hold the arm clear of the table, that is,
• 4:04:05
  Speaker 12: so that neither the wrist, nor the elbows, nor any
• 4:04:08
  Speaker 12: part of the arm touches it. In this way, a
• 4:04:11
  Speaker 12: certain amount of fatigue is soon induced in the arm,
• 4:04:14
  Speaker 12: and as soon as this occurs, automatic writing tends to begin.
• 4:04:18
  Speaker 12: In obtaining writing of this character, you must be careful
• 4:04:21
  Speaker 12: to abstract your conscious guidance from the hand as much
• 4:04:24
  Speaker 12: as possible, leaving it to itself. Do not try and
• 4:04:27
  Speaker 12: write anything of your own volition. Let it guide itself,
• 4:04:31
  Speaker 12: even if it writes nonsense at first. Some persons obtain
• 4:04:35
  Speaker 12: writing more easily if the pencil be placed between the
• 4:04:37
  Speaker 12: first and second fingers, but whatever way is most convenient
• 4:04:41
  Speaker 12: to you should be adopted in cultivating automatic writing. Make
• 4:04:45
  Speaker 12: the mind as blank as possible. After a time, you
• 4:04:48
  Speaker 12: may be able to think of other things at the
• 4:04:50
  Speaker 12: same time, carry on a train of conversation, read a book,
• 4:04:53
  Speaker 12: et cetera, at the same time that your hand is
• 4:04:56
  Speaker 12: writing the messages. But it is improbable that you will
• 4:04:59
  Speaker 12: be able to do this at fi first. The chief
• 4:05:01
  Speaker 12: thing is to make the mind blank and await results.
• 4:05:04
  Speaker 12: Two important rules to follow when developing automatic writing. You
• 4:05:09
  Speaker 12: should sit for not longer than fifteen or twenty minutes daily,
• 4:05:13
  Speaker 12: and if possible, always at the same time. It is
• 4:05:16
  Speaker 12: very important that these two rules be observed for two reasons.
• 4:05:20
  Speaker 12: In the first place, your spirit friends, who are we
• 4:05:24
  Speaker 12: are told trying to help you in your writing, would
• 4:05:27
  Speaker 12: come to assist you at certain stated times more easily
• 4:05:30
  Speaker 12: than irregularly, especially if you told them exactly at what
• 4:05:33
  Speaker 12: time to come. It is a good plan to say aloud,
• 4:05:37
  Speaker 12: just when you have finished the writing, good bye tomorrow.
• 4:05:39
  Speaker 12: At the same time, we will sit again for the messages.
• 4:05:42
  Speaker 12: In the second place, the time should be limited. When
• 4:05:45
  Speaker 12: you obtain writing of this character. You are apt to
• 4:05:48
  Speaker 12: get so interested in the results when once messages begin
• 4:05:51
  Speaker 12: to come, and so curious in seeing what your hands says,
• 4:05:55
  Speaker 12: that you will lose all account of time, and if
• 4:05:57
  Speaker 12: you have nothing urgent to do, are liable to run
• 4:06:00
  Speaker 12: on hour after hour, writing automatically and replying to the
• 4:06:03
  Speaker 12: messages you receive. If you do this for any length
• 4:06:06
  Speaker 12: of time, you will break down the wall of defense
• 4:06:09
  Speaker 12: which normally exists against outside influences. And of the importance
• 4:06:13
  Speaker 12: of which I have spoken so often in the preceding chapters,
• 4:06:16
  Speaker 12: mister W. T. Stead, the well known journalist and spiritualist,
• 4:06:20
  Speaker 12: once stated that he considered these two warnings of the
• 4:06:23
  Speaker 12: utmost importance, and attributed his own success and the fact
• 4:06:27
  Speaker 12: that he had never encountered any difficulties or any trouble
• 4:06:30
  Speaker 12: in his automatic writing to the fact that he had
• 4:06:33
  Speaker 12: heeded strictly this advice. How automatic writing is accomplished. Automatic
• 4:06:39
  Speaker 12: writing is doubtless performed by the subconscious muscular action on
• 4:06:43
  Speaker 12: the part of the hand and arm of the writer.
• 4:06:45
  Speaker 12: That is, in the majority of cases, but this does
• 4:06:48
  Speaker 12: not serve to explain it, as many people believe. Granting
• 4:06:52
  Speaker 12: that the actual writing is obtained in this way, the
• 4:06:54
  Speaker 12: question remains, how about the information which is often obtained
• 4:06:58
  Speaker 12: by means of the writing, information which the writer could
• 4:07:02
  Speaker 12: not possibly have known by any normal means. For instance,
• 4:07:06
  Speaker 12: suppose you are sitting at your table, pencil in hand,
• 4:07:09
  Speaker 12: waiting to see what is written. Your hand writes, I
• 4:07:12
  Speaker 12: am James Valentine. I was killed in a railroad accident
• 4:07:15
  Speaker 12: this afternoon at four o'clock. Granting that your own hand
• 4:07:18
  Speaker 12: actually moved the pencil to write this message. Where did
• 4:07:21
  Speaker 12: this piece of information come from? How did your mind
• 4:07:25
  Speaker 12: know what to write? And the fact that James Valentine
• 4:07:27
  Speaker 12: had been killed? That is the question which remains to
• 4:07:30
  Speaker 12: be solved, and is the one which the majority of
• 4:07:33
  Speaker 12: scientists who have undertaken to investigate and explain these phenomena
• 4:07:37
  Speaker 12: slur over and leave altogether unexplained. In many other cases, also,
• 4:07:41
  Speaker 12: the power seems to be greater than the medium alone
• 4:07:44
  Speaker 12: could have produced, and in such cases an outside power
• 4:07:48
  Speaker 12: was doubtless employed. As in many physical phenomena, the character
• 4:07:52
  Speaker 12: of the messages received. Many of the messages you receive,
• 4:07:56
  Speaker 12: especially at first, will doubtless prove incoherent and disconns like dreams.
• 4:08:01
  Speaker 12: In fact, they are dreams only Instead of seeing these
• 4:08:04
  Speaker 12: thoughts and visions, they are written out by your own hand.
• 4:08:07
  Speaker 12: In both cases, however, it is your dream consciousness subconsciousness
• 4:08:12
  Speaker 12: which originates the message or the visions. In many cases, however,
• 4:08:16
  Speaker 12: clear and consistent messages are written, and these may be
• 4:08:20
  Speaker 12: supernormal and show evidence of telepathy, clairvoyance, premonition, or spirit communication,
• 4:08:26
  Speaker 12: just as dreams do. Many mediums obtain their messages direct
• 4:08:30
  Speaker 12: by automatic writing. Missus Piper of Boston in many ways,
• 4:08:33
  Speaker 12: the most famous medium in the history of psychics, obtain
• 4:08:37
  Speaker 12: nearly all her communications.
• 4:08:38
  Speaker 6: In this manner.
• 4:08:39
  Speaker 12: In her case, she passes into very deep trance while
• 4:08:43
  Speaker 12: writing and has to be supported by cushions. In your
• 4:08:46
  Speaker 12: own case, it is improbable that you will go into
• 4:08:48
  Speaker 12: trance at first, though you may have a tendency to
• 4:08:51
  Speaker 12: do so, and if you begin to feel sleepy or
• 4:08:54
  Speaker 12: drowsy during the writing, you should give way to this
• 4:08:57
  Speaker 12: and allow yourself to pass into the trance condition. When
• 4:09:00
  Speaker 12: this state, many of the best messages are obtained. It
• 4:09:03
  Speaker 12: is advisable, however, to do this for the first few
• 4:09:06
  Speaker 12: times only in the presence of an experienced medium or
• 4:09:09
  Speaker 12: psychic who can attend to you during the period of
• 4:09:11
  Speaker 12: trance and who will ask questions for your hand to
• 4:09:14
  Speaker 12: reply to, et cetera phenomena which may occur during the writing.
• 4:09:19
  Speaker 12: This feeling of drowsiness appears very often in automatic writing,
• 4:09:23
  Speaker 12: but it is not universal. Many mediums who obtain remarkable
• 4:09:26
  Speaker 12: messages in this manner have never passed into trance and
• 4:09:29
  Speaker 12: have no desire to do so. They remain perfectly normal throughout.
• 4:09:33
  Speaker 12: It may be that when you begin to write, your
• 4:09:36
  Speaker 12: hand and arm will show signs of insensibility, that is,
• 4:09:39
  Speaker 12: it will lose its sensation and any feeling of pain,
• 4:09:42
  Speaker 12: et cetera. It becomes, as we say, anesthetic. You may
• 4:09:46
  Speaker 12: be quite unconscious of this fact and only discover it
• 4:09:49
  Speaker 12: by accident. A good plan is to have a friend
• 4:09:51
  Speaker 12: test it for you. When you are obtaining automatic writing,
• 4:09:55
  Speaker 12: close your eyes and turn your head away. Then ask
• 4:09:58
  Speaker 12: your friend to prick you very lightly with the needle
• 4:10:00
  Speaker 12: in various parts of your hands and arms and see
• 4:10:03
  Speaker 12: whether you experience any pain. It is quite possible that
• 4:10:06
  Speaker 12: you will not do so, even if the pricks are severe.
• 4:10:10
  Speaker 12: It is curious to note however, that these pricks are
• 4:10:12
  Speaker 12: noticed by the subconscious mind, for it often happens that
• 4:10:16
  Speaker 12: the hand will write automatically you are hurting me, or
• 4:10:19
  Speaker 12: you pricked me in the third finger joint, or something
• 4:10:22
  Speaker 12: of the kind, while you yourself might remain totally ignorant of
• 4:10:25
  Speaker 12: the fact, so far as any consciousness of it was concerned.
• 4:10:29
  Speaker 12: It is important for you to remember that automatic messages,
• 4:10:32
  Speaker 12: like all messages of a like character, must be judged
• 4:10:35
  Speaker 12: and accepted for what they are worth. More phenomena, Some
• 4:10:40
  Speaker 12: of these messages are very remarkable and contain sound advice
• 4:10:43
  Speaker 12: which can be followed with profit. Some apparently originate from
• 4:10:47
  Speaker 12: those spirit friends who claim to give them. On the
• 4:10:50
  Speaker 12: other hand, many of them are foolish, lying, or merely silly.
• 4:10:54
  Speaker 12: So that here, as in all other cases, discrimination must
• 4:10:58
  Speaker 12: be used, and you must exert your our own common
• 4:11:00
  Speaker 12: sense and judgment in the matter of accepting these messages.
• 4:11:04
  Speaker 12: And you must see to what extent you may be
• 4:11:05
  Speaker 12: willing to abide and profit by the advice given. It
• 4:11:09
  Speaker 12: sometimes happens that automatic writing forms letters, but these appear
• 4:11:12
  Speaker 12: curiously shaped and the words cannot be read. Sometimes it
• 4:11:16
  Speaker 12: begins at the right hand side of the page and
• 4:11:18
  Speaker 12: writes toward the left, like Hebrew. When this is the case,
• 4:11:22
  Speaker 12: it is always a good plan to hold the sheet
• 4:11:24
  Speaker 12: of paper up to a mirror to see whether the
• 4:11:26
  Speaker 12: writing can be read in this way. If so, the
• 4:11:28
  Speaker 12: writing has been merely reversed, and is what we term
• 4:11:31
  Speaker 12: mirror writing. Some persons can write with the left hand
• 4:11:35
  Speaker 12: as well as with the right, but usually this is
• 4:11:37
  Speaker 12: not the case except with left handed persons. The reason
• 4:11:41
  Speaker 12: seems to be that the left hand is poorly developed
• 4:11:43
  Speaker 12: as a writing machine. For this reason, we can hardly
• 4:11:46
  Speaker 12: expect any intelligence who may desire to give messages to
• 4:11:50
  Speaker 12: find this an easy way of expressing them. Still, it
• 4:11:52
  Speaker 12: may be tried after writing has been obtained by the
• 4:11:55
  Speaker 12: right hand. Occasionally messages are given in foreign languages or
• 4:11:59
  Speaker 12: in queer tongues unknown to the sitter. These may be
• 4:12:02
  Speaker 12: genuine messages, and if they come in a language unknown
• 4:12:05
  Speaker 12: to you, you may be more or less assured that
• 4:12:07
  Speaker 12: they emanate from some spirit friend who speaks the language
• 4:12:10
  Speaker 12: in question. Occasionally, however, your hand will write gibberish, and
• 4:12:14
  Speaker 12: there are many cases on record where this has been
• 4:12:16
  Speaker 12: done and no true language has been written. How to
• 4:12:20
  Speaker 12: develop the power, it is a good plan to sit
• 4:12:23
  Speaker 12: in a semi darkened room while obtaining automatic writing in
• 4:12:26
  Speaker 12: a comfortable position and with the mind as free from
• 4:12:29
  Speaker 12: care and preoccupation as possible. Automatic writing may, however, be
• 4:12:33
  Speaker 12: obtained in a light room if desired. Telepathic experiments may
• 4:12:37
  Speaker 12: be tried in this manner. A friend of yours may
• 4:12:40
  Speaker 12: try to impress upon you certain words, cards, figures, et cetera,
• 4:12:44
  Speaker 12: which your hand writes automatically. The writing, you must remember,
• 4:12:48
  Speaker 12: is only another method for the subconscious to express itself
• 4:12:51
  Speaker 12: to the conscious mind, and happens to be a motor
• 4:12:54
  Speaker 12: channel rather than a sensory channel. If it were the latter,
• 4:12:57
  Speaker 12: you would see or hear the message instead of it.
• 4:13:01
  Speaker 12: In both cases, however, the phenomena represent mere emerchants. It
• 4:13:05
  Speaker 12: is not necessary to write automatically with a pencil. For
• 4:13:08
  Speaker 12: a planchet board, Wuigi board, or some other apparatus may
• 4:13:11
  Speaker 12: be used for this purpose. Indeed, this is a much
• 4:13:14
  Speaker 12: simpler method to begin with, and writing is obtained more
• 4:13:17
  Speaker 12: easily than by the pencil alone. Most people find it
• 4:13:20
  Speaker 12: more satisfactory, however, to discarve these instruments later on and
• 4:13:24
  Speaker 12: employ the pencil direct The above rules should enable the
• 4:13:28
  Speaker 12: student to obtain automatic writing in a comparatively short time.
• 4:13:32
  Speaker 12: Patience is required here as elsewhere, hold the mind in
• 4:13:36
  Speaker 12: a receptive attitude, send out a mental call for guidance
• 4:13:39
  Speaker 12: and wisdom, and do not come to the conclusion too
• 4:13:42
  Speaker 12: quickly that the messages you receive are nonsense. Often a
• 4:13:46
  Speaker 12: jumble of letters that at first sight mean nothing may
• 4:13:49
  Speaker 12: form a very significant message when rightly interpreted. End of
• 4:13:54
  Speaker 12: Chapter sixteen, Chapter seventeen. Crystal gazing and shell Here crystal
• 4:14:01
  Speaker 12: gazing means simply the practice of looking into a ball
• 4:14:04
  Speaker 12: of crystal glass or some similar substance, and endeavoring to
• 4:14:08
  Speaker 12: see within it pictures or images which apparently present themselves
• 4:14:12
  Speaker 12: to the eye while thus gazing at it. Crystal gazing
• 4:14:16
  Speaker 12: is very ancient. The Egyptians used it in their practices
• 4:14:19
  Speaker 12: of divination, and throughout ancient history we find traces of
• 4:14:23
  Speaker 12: this magical art. In the Middle Ages, it was revived,
• 4:14:27
  Speaker 12: especially by the learned Doctor D, who lived in the
• 4:14:30
  Speaker 12: reign of Queen Elizabeth in England, and who employed a
• 4:14:33
  Speaker 12: seer or scrier by the name of Kelly. Doctor D
• 4:14:37
  Speaker 12: wrote a book on his researches, which work is now classical.
• 4:14:40
  Speaker 12: In more recent times. Crystal gazing has been made a
• 4:14:43
  Speaker 12: subject of special study by the Psychical Research Society, and
• 4:14:47
  Speaker 12: several books may now be had upon the question. It
• 4:14:50
  Speaker 12: is very simple and at the same time one of
• 4:14:53
  Speaker 12: the safest means of psychic development. It is not necessary,
• 4:14:56
  Speaker 12: as a matter of fact, to employ a crystal or
• 4:14:59
  Speaker 12: even a glass ball, particularly if you are a good subject,
• 4:15:03
  Speaker 12: but it would greatly help matters if you did possess one,
• 4:15:06
  Speaker 12: and we should advise the student to procure one, if possible,
• 4:15:10
  Speaker 12: and use this for purposes of experimentation. How to begin.
• 4:15:15
  Speaker 12: The best way to begin is to procure a crystal
• 4:15:17
  Speaker 12: of at least three inches in diameter, larger if possible,
• 4:15:21
  Speaker 12: and mounted upon a slender wooden stand. The stand and
• 4:15:24
  Speaker 12: crystal should be placed against a background of black felt
• 4:15:27
  Speaker 12: or cloth, and the crystal should be shaded with more
• 4:15:30
  Speaker 12: cloth of the same character, so that there is no
• 4:15:33
  Speaker 12: high light anywhere upon it. That is, no point upon
• 4:15:36
  Speaker 12: which the sun's rays fall, making it a bright spot.
• 4:15:39
  Speaker 12: If the outlines of the ball appear a little cloudy
• 4:15:42
  Speaker 12: and uncertain owing to the semi darkness, this will often
• 4:15:45
  Speaker 12: help matters. Place yourself in front of the ball, your
• 4:15:49
  Speaker 12: eyes being about a foot from its surface. You should
• 4:15:52
  Speaker 12: be seated in a comfortable chair, your eyes shaded from
• 4:15:54
  Speaker 12: the light, and relaxed in body and quiet in mind.
• 4:15:58
  Speaker 12: Gaze steadily at the crystal or a few minutes. Do
• 4:16:01
  Speaker 12: not strain or focus the eyes, particularly upon any part
• 4:16:04
  Speaker 12: of the ball, or try to see into its interior.
• 4:16:07
  Speaker 12: Do not blink the eyes more than you can help.
• 4:16:09
  Speaker 12: At the same time, do not strain them by trying
• 4:16:11
  Speaker 12: to keep them open for any length of time without blinking.
• 4:16:15
  Speaker 12: Do not let your eyes wander from the ball, nor
• 4:16:17
  Speaker 12: your attention relax from the subject in hand. Do not
• 4:16:21
  Speaker 12: let your eyes stare vacantly, but look intently at the
• 4:16:24
  Speaker 12: ball without undue strain or concentration. Try not to think
• 4:16:28
  Speaker 12: of anything in particular during the process of this gazing.
• 4:16:31
  Speaker 12: Make the mind fairly blank. At the same time, do
• 4:16:34
  Speaker 12: not allow yourself to become sleepy or the mind to
• 4:16:37
  Speaker 12: become totally blank to outside impressions. It is inadvisable to
• 4:16:41
  Speaker 12: keep this up for more than five minutes at a
• 4:16:43
  Speaker 12: time at first, for if you do, you will find
• 4:16:45
  Speaker 12: that your eyes will become strained and will water after
• 4:16:48
  Speaker 12: you leave off the experiment. If this is the case,
• 4:16:51
  Speaker 12: you may be sure you have continued gazing for too
• 4:16:54
  Speaker 12: long a period. As an automatic writing, it is advisable,
• 4:16:58
  Speaker 12: if possible, to sit at the same time every day
• 4:17:01
  Speaker 12: while developing, and for the same length of time each day.
• 4:17:05
  Speaker 12: This time may be lengthened as you progress, though it
• 4:17:08
  Speaker 12: is usually found unnecessary to look into the crystal for
• 4:17:11
  Speaker 12: more than a few minutes at a time, for you
• 4:17:13
  Speaker 12: cannot get consistent, long drawn out visions as you can
• 4:17:16
  Speaker 12: automatic writing. Explanation of crystal gazing. Crystal gazing depends largely
• 4:17:22
  Speaker 12: upon the ability possessed by the psychic to visualize or
• 4:17:26
  Speaker 12: express in pictorial form thoughts and images which arise from
• 4:17:30
  Speaker 12: the subconscious mind. The majority of crystal visions are of
• 4:17:33
  Speaker 12: this character. You must not assume that because you see
• 4:17:36
  Speaker 12: figures in the ball, that these figures are really in
• 4:17:39
  Speaker 12: that place, That is, that they are objective or external
• 4:17:44
  Speaker 12: and exist within the crystal. No, they are mental pictures
• 4:17:48
  Speaker 12: or hallucinations. But they are expressed or externalized in this way.
• 4:17:53
  Speaker 12: For example, you may think of a friend's face and
• 4:17:56
  Speaker 12: bring it up vividly before your mind's eye as a
• 4:17:58
  Speaker 12: memory picture. Now, in ordinary life the process of externalization
• 4:18:03
  Speaker 12: ends there. But if you are a good visualizer, you
• 4:18:06
  Speaker 12: can carry it further and actually project into the crystal
• 4:18:10
  Speaker 12: the picture of your thought, placing it in the ball,
• 4:18:12
  Speaker 12: where you will see your friend's face clearly reflected from
• 4:18:15
  Speaker 12: within its depths. But your friend is not really in
• 4:18:18
  Speaker 12: the ball. It is merely your mental conception or picture
• 4:18:22
  Speaker 12: of him. Nearly all crystal visions are of this character.
• 4:18:26
  Speaker 12: As before said, supernormal crystal visions. Crystal visions, however, often
• 4:18:32
  Speaker 12: contain information and messages which the sitter could not possibly
• 4:18:36
  Speaker 12: have known normally, and which are conveyed to him by
• 4:18:39
  Speaker 12: This means. For instance, you may look into the ball
• 4:18:42
  Speaker 12: one day and see acted before you in the crystal
• 4:18:45
  Speaker 12: vision a tragedy in which some friend of yours plays
• 4:18:48
  Speaker 12: a part. You know nothing whatever about this, yet later
• 4:18:52
  Speaker 12: on you receive from this friend a letter telling you
• 4:18:55
  Speaker 12: of the details of the tragedy in question. Your vision
• 4:18:58
  Speaker 12: has proved correct. It is authentic and supernormal in character.
• 4:19:03
  Speaker 12: Thus you will see that crystal visions are more than
• 4:19:05
  Speaker 12: mere empty visions or hallucinations. The character and content of
• 4:19:10
  Speaker 12: these pictures often convey striking information, and they may be telepathic, clairvoyant,
• 4:19:15
  Speaker 12: or promontory, just as dreams are, or they may represent
• 4:19:20
  Speaker 12: genuine spirit messages conveyed from some deceased friend or relative.
• 4:19:24
  Speaker 12: It is no unknown thing to see words written in
• 4:19:27
  Speaker 12: the ball as though you were reading handwriting. A friend
• 4:19:30
  Speaker 12: of mine once looked into her crystal ball and saw
• 4:19:32
  Speaker 12: within it a newspaper notice of the death of her
• 4:19:35
  Speaker 12: dearest friend. She was totally ignorant of the fact and
• 4:19:38
  Speaker 12: only learned it later on. This same lady, who is
• 4:19:42
  Speaker 12: a writer, has the power of projecting or placing in
• 4:19:45
  Speaker 12: the crystal at will figures or scenes which she conjures
• 4:19:49
  Speaker 12: up before her, and when they are in the ball,
• 4:19:52
  Speaker 12: they will continue acting out the parts assigned to them,
• 4:19:54
  Speaker 12: just as they would in a dream. For the figures
• 4:19:57
  Speaker 12: seen in the crystal are not inert and motionless, but
• 4:20:00
  Speaker 12: move about and appear to have life and motion of
• 4:20:03
  Speaker 12: their own. On many occasions, when this lady placed the
• 4:20:06
  Speaker 12: characters of a novel she was writing into the crystal
• 4:20:09
  Speaker 12: by an effort of will, she was enabled to see
• 4:20:11
  Speaker 12: them there, and they frequently enacted certain scenes which gave
• 4:20:15
  Speaker 12: her a good idea for the continuation of the plot
• 4:20:17
  Speaker 12: of the story. In such a case, you will see
• 4:20:21
  Speaker 12: Cristel gazing performed a very useful and practical service how
• 4:20:26
  Speaker 12: to develop the power. You may develop the power of
• 4:20:29
  Speaker 12: visualizing in yourself, which is extremely important, by such simple
• 4:20:33
  Speaker 12: imagination exercises as the following, Ask yourself a question such as,
• 4:20:38
  Speaker 12: what was the color of Mother Hubbard's dog? Was Jack
• 4:20:41
  Speaker 12: the giant killer? Dark or fair? Was Helen of Troy
• 4:20:44
  Speaker 12: tall or small and slender? Such questions as these should
• 4:20:48
  Speaker 12: bring up before your mind's eye in immediate answer in
• 4:20:52
  Speaker 12: the form of a mental picture of the person or
• 4:20:54
  Speaker 12: event in question, And if they do not do so,
• 4:20:57
  Speaker 12: you may be sure that your power of visualizing is
• 4:20:59
  Speaker 12: not good and will have to be developed before you
• 4:21:02
  Speaker 12: can have clear crystal visions. If your power of visualizing
• 4:21:06
  Speaker 12: is extremely good, you will probably be enabled, after a
• 4:21:09
  Speaker 12: certain length of time to dispense with the ball altogether
• 4:21:13
  Speaker 12: and see your visions upon a white or black background
• 4:21:15
  Speaker 12: by concentrating upon it, and finally anywhere in space that
• 4:21:19
  Speaker 12: you may choose to induce them. When you have arrived
• 4:21:22
  Speaker 12: at this stage of development, however, you are very far
• 4:21:25
  Speaker 12: along the path of successful mediumship, clouding and visualization. If
• 4:21:30
  Speaker 12: you are to obtain crystal visions, you will probably notice
• 4:21:33
  Speaker 12: that just before the vision appears, the ball will cloud
• 4:21:37
  Speaker 12: over as though a blackish gray mist were filling it,
• 4:21:39
  Speaker 12: or were interposed between your eyes and it. This clouding,
• 4:21:43
  Speaker 12: as it is called, is well known and is a
• 4:21:46
  Speaker 12: symptom of oncoming visions. If after sitting for five minutes
• 4:21:50
  Speaker 12: every day for a couple of weeks, you do not
• 4:21:52
  Speaker 12: obtain any visions at all, you may rest assured that
• 4:21:55
  Speaker 12: you are a very poor visualizer and will probably not
• 4:21:58
  Speaker 12: succeed in this direction. You might try, however, one simple
• 4:22:02
  Speaker 12: experiment for a few days longer. Gaze at a bright
• 4:22:05
  Speaker 12: and highly colored object upon which the light is falling
• 4:22:08
  Speaker 12: for about a minute. Then close your eyes for a
• 4:22:11
  Speaker 12: few seconds, and then look at the ball. If you
• 4:22:14
  Speaker 12: are ever to see anything, you should, after a few attempts,
• 4:22:17
  Speaker 12: see within the ball a duplicate of the object you
• 4:22:20
  Speaker 12: have been looking at, in its complimentary colors. It is
• 4:22:23
  Speaker 12: asserted by a certain school of occultists that the visions
• 4:22:26
  Speaker 12: seen within the crystal are not invariably subjective or hallucinatory,
• 4:22:30
  Speaker 12: but are real entities, and that the figures have an
• 4:22:33
  Speaker 12: independent existence apart from the seer. This, however, is a
• 4:22:37
  Speaker 12: complicated question which is unsuitable for a primary book of
• 4:22:40
  Speaker 12: instruction upon psychic development, such as the present. It will
• 4:22:44
  Speaker 12: therefore be omitted from consideration. With this brief mention. Shell hearing,
• 4:22:50
  Speaker 12: if you place to your ear two large conk shells,
• 4:22:53
  Speaker 12: you will hear a peculiar rushing or roaring sound, as
• 4:22:56
  Speaker 12: of the sea in the far distance. This is only natural,
• 4:22:59
  Speaker 12: and probably due to the air within its cavities and
• 4:23:02
  Speaker 12: the resounding properties of the various curves of the shell.
• 4:23:05
  Speaker 12: So far, all is simple enough, but many persons who
• 4:23:08
  Speaker 12: are slightly psychic, as soon as they place the shells
• 4:23:11
  Speaker 12: to their ears, hear distinct and characteristic sounds, usually in
• 4:23:16
  Speaker 12: the form of whispered or spoken words. These words may
• 4:23:19
  Speaker 12: be inarticulate, they may be incoherent like dreams, They may
• 4:23:23
  Speaker 12: repeat your own name time after time, or they may
• 4:23:26
  Speaker 12: convey systematic and definite messages, as in the case of
• 4:23:30
  Speaker 12: crystal gazing, dreams and automatic writing. Shell hearing is a
• 4:23:34
  Speaker 12: method of externalizing or expressing an outward form the thoughts
• 4:23:38
  Speaker 12: and auditory messages of the subconscious mind. But they may
• 4:23:42
  Speaker 12: be more than this. They may at times embody telepathic,
• 4:23:45
  Speaker 12: clairvoyant or premonitory messages, or they may represent genuine spirit communication.
• 4:23:51
  Speaker 12: It all depends on the content of the message. And
• 4:23:53
  Speaker 12: upon the character of the words spoken. Just as in
• 4:23:56
  Speaker 12: Planchat writing, if you obtain a jumble of nonsense, you
• 4:24:00
  Speaker 12: may be sure that it is the product of your
• 4:24:02
  Speaker 12: own subconscious activity. But if you obtain a characteristic and
• 4:24:06
  Speaker 12: direct message, you may have reason to believe it emanates
• 4:24:09
  Speaker 12: from the friend it purports to proceed from. In shell hearing,
• 4:24:13
  Speaker 12: it is the same important warnings and advice. If the
• 4:24:18
  Speaker 12: messages are nonsensical, they should be disregarded. If, on the
• 4:24:22
  Speaker 12: other hand, they are interesting, clear cut, and are proved
• 4:24:25
  Speaker 12: to be correct, you should regard them as possibly genuine,
• 4:24:28
  Speaker 12: mediumistic messages, and they should be judged and valued by
• 4:24:32
  Speaker 12: you accordingly. In all cases of this character, here as elsewhere,
• 4:24:36
  Speaker 12: you must use your own critical judgment and common sense
• 4:24:39
  Speaker 12: upon the messages you receive. Shell hearing is certainly one
• 4:24:43
  Speaker 12: of the clearest, at the same time one of the
• 4:24:45
  Speaker 12: most pleasant methods of receiving communications that can be employed.
• 4:24:49
  Speaker 12: The voices which you hear may be recognizable or unrecognizable.
• 4:24:54
  Speaker 12: It is the former that are a good proof of authenticity.
• 4:24:57
  Speaker 12: They may develop by themselves or emerge from a con
• 4:25:00
  Speaker 12: difused babble of sound. Unrecognized voices will often utter warnings
• 4:25:04
  Speaker 12: or convey information of this character. Human voices are not
• 4:25:08
  Speaker 12: always heard in the shell, but occasional, musical and other
• 4:25:12
  Speaker 12: sounds which cannot easily be described. Finally, in important warnings
• 4:25:17
  Speaker 12: should be heated. If after discontinuing shell hearing, you continue
• 4:25:21
  Speaker 12: to hear voices, you should immediately drop all experiments for
• 4:25:25
  Speaker 12: some days, as this phenomenon of insistent voices is one
• 4:25:28
  Speaker 12: of the first symptoms of danger. As long as the
• 4:25:31
  Speaker 12: manifestations are well controlled, you may feel that you are
• 4:25:34
  Speaker 12: on the safe road and developing as you should. But
• 4:25:37
  Speaker 12: if they begin to get beyond your control, you should
• 4:25:40
  Speaker 12: stop shell hearing for some time until you have strengthened
• 4:25:43
  Speaker 12: your inner self to such an extent that you think
• 4:25:46
  Speaker 12: it advisable to continue experimenting again in this direction. End
• 4:25:51
  Speaker 12: of Chapter seventeen. Chapter eighteen. Spiritual healing. Spiritual healing means
• 4:25:59
  Speaker 12: that mentally or physically sick persons may be and are
• 4:26:03
  Speaker 12: healed by the power of a spiritual energy operating through
• 4:26:07
  Speaker 12: the body of a certain medium or more or less
• 4:26:10
  Speaker 12: directly without his agency. It is distinct from hypnotism, mesmerism,
• 4:26:15
  Speaker 12: magnetic healing, faith cure, mind cure, or any other kind
• 4:26:19
  Speaker 12: of healing whatever, and must not be confused with them.
• 4:26:23
  Speaker 12: All these other curative measures depend upon suggestion or upon
• 4:26:26
  Speaker 12: the hidden and unknown powers of the human body to
• 4:26:29
  Speaker 12: affect the cure. But spiritual healing is more direct. It
• 4:26:32
  Speaker 12: is not the medium who heals in this case, but
• 4:26:35
  Speaker 12: a form of spiritual energy which operates through him. What
• 4:26:39
  Speaker 12: is spiritual healing. Spiritual healing is affected in various ways,
• 4:26:44
  Speaker 12: as the following definitions adopted by the National Spiritualist Association
• 4:26:48
  Speaker 12: will show. A By the spiritual influences working through the
• 4:26:52
  Speaker 12: body of the medium and thus infusing curative, stimulating and
• 4:26:56
  Speaker 12: vitalizing fluids and energy into the diseased parts of the
• 4:27:00
  Speaker 12: patient's body. B By the spiritual influences illuminating the brain
• 4:27:05
  Speaker 12: of the healing medium and thereby intensifying the perception of
• 4:27:09
  Speaker 12: the medium, so that the case, nature, and seat of
• 4:27:12
  Speaker 12: the disease in the patient become known to the medium,
• 4:27:15
  Speaker 12: and the herb or other remedy which will benefit the
• 4:27:18
  Speaker 12: patient also becomes known to the medium. C Through the
• 4:27:22
  Speaker 12: application of absent treatments, whereby spiritual beings combine their own
• 4:27:26
  Speaker 12: healing forces with the magnetism and vitalizing energy of the
• 4:27:30
  Speaker 12: medium and convey them to the patient who is distant
• 4:27:33
  Speaker 12: from the medium, and cause them to be absorbed by
• 4:27:36
  Speaker 12: the system of the patient. It will be seen that
• 4:27:38
  Speaker 12: these definitions not only cover the facts of spiritual healing,
• 4:27:42
  Speaker 12: but also absent treatment and psychic diagnosis. Advice is given
• 4:27:47
  Speaker 12: on numerous occasions by the spirits as to the exact
• 4:27:50
  Speaker 12: course of treatment to be followed. From all this, it
• 4:27:53
  Speaker 12: will be seen that spiritual healing is not only very
• 4:27:55
  Speaker 12: different from any other kind of healing, but that it
• 4:27:58
  Speaker 12: is also far more inclusive and more wonderful how cures
• 4:28:02
  Speaker 12: are affected. The principle upon which spiritual healing is said
• 4:28:06
  Speaker 12: to be based is simply this. A certain vital and
• 4:28:10
  Speaker 12: magnetic energy is contained in every living body. In health,
• 4:28:14
  Speaker 12: this is large in quantity, and in disease this stock
• 4:28:17
  Speaker 12: becomes depleted. Ordinarily, the only way to recover this lost
• 4:28:21
  Speaker 12: vitality and energy is to rest, sleep, and take care
• 4:28:25
  Speaker 12: of the body and mind that this vital energy again
• 4:28:28
  Speaker 12: fills and recharges it to the same extent as before.
• 4:28:31
  Speaker 12: But this is a slow and uncertain process. It is, however,
• 4:28:35
  Speaker 12: the only sure way we know. Stimulants et cetera, which
• 4:28:39
  Speaker 12: apparently add strength to the body do not do so.
• 4:28:42
  Speaker 12: In reality, they abstract it faster. When we expend it faster.
• 4:28:46
  Speaker 12: We are under the delusion that we are stronger, but
• 4:28:49
  Speaker 12: ultimately we are weaker. In the case of spiritual healing,
• 4:28:52
  Speaker 12: on the other hand, it is very different. Vital energy
• 4:28:56
  Speaker 12: is imparted to the system from without. It fills the
• 4:28:59
  Speaker 12: nerve centers and literally adds new life to the whole body.
• 4:29:02
  Speaker 12: These nerve centers being aroused, the various functions of the
• 4:29:05
  Speaker 12: body are stimulated in turn, and in this manner the
• 4:29:08
  Speaker 12: patient is cured. The cosmic vital energy, this vital energy,
• 4:29:13
  Speaker 12: which is imparted by means of spiritual healing, is a
• 4:29:16
  Speaker 12: great cosmic power which pervades the whole universe. It is everywhere,
• 4:29:21
  Speaker 12: It is back of every phenomenon. In it, we live
• 4:29:24
  Speaker 12: and move and have our being. It is illimitable in
• 4:29:28
  Speaker 12: extent and in power. We simply have to draw upon
• 4:29:31
  Speaker 12: it to the extent we can, and the more we
• 4:29:33
  Speaker 12: can draw, the more rapidly do we become well, the
• 4:29:36
  Speaker 12: speedier the cure. There is no reason to suppose that
• 4:29:40
  Speaker 12: if we could tap this great reservoir in the right way,
• 4:29:43
  Speaker 12: we should not become well instantly and Indeed, there are
• 4:29:45
  Speaker 12: many cases of this character where apparently this has been done,
• 4:29:49
  Speaker 12: instances of so called miraculous cures. Being of this nature,
• 4:29:54
  Speaker 12: we must learn to tap the source of spiritual energy,
• 4:29:57
  Speaker 12: and when we have reached this inexhaustible fountain, then health
• 4:30:00
  Speaker 12: and strength are ours healing miracles. The facts of spiritual
• 4:30:06
  Speaker 12: healing are as old as history. The laying on of
• 4:30:08
  Speaker 12: hands was one of the most ancient modes of treatment,
• 4:30:11
  Speaker 12: and was employed by the Egyptians. Christ employed it frequently
• 4:30:15
  Speaker 12: when a woman touched the hem of his garment, and
• 4:30:17
  Speaker 12: he perceived that the virtue had gone out of him,
• 4:30:20
  Speaker 12: he doubtless felt a loss of the precious vital magnetism
• 4:30:24
  Speaker 12: by means of which he affected his marvelous cures. The
• 4:30:27
  Speaker 12: healing miracles in the New Testament are full of cases
• 4:30:30
  Speaker 12: of this character, and in our own day we often
• 4:30:33
  Speaker 12: read of wondrous cures effected by those who have somehow
• 4:30:36
  Speaker 12: learned to come in touch with a higher power, some
• 4:30:39
  Speaker 12: source of energy not available to all of us, and
• 4:30:41
  Speaker 12: to draw upon it for the purpose of their healing miracles.
• 4:30:45
  Speaker 12: To a certain extent, doubtless we draw upon this fund
• 4:30:48
  Speaker 12: during our sleep, but it may be drawn upon in
• 4:30:51
  Speaker 12: far larger quantities by those who have the secret of
• 4:30:53
  Speaker 12: how to do so. Some spiritual healers could do this,
• 4:30:57
  Speaker 12: but discarnate spirits can apparently direct and min manipulate this
• 4:31:00
  Speaker 12: vital energy far more effectively and to better purpose, for
• 4:31:04
  Speaker 12: the reason that living as they do in the world
• 4:31:07
  Speaker 12: of spiritual energy, they understand more of its laws and
• 4:31:10
  Speaker 12: can better control and govern them. Hence they can affect
• 4:31:13
  Speaker 12: a cure very often when every other means has failed.
• 4:31:18
  Speaker 12: Possible explanation of such cures. While it is true that
• 4:31:22
  Speaker 12: most cures depend upon this vitalizing magnetic current, it is
• 4:31:26
  Speaker 12: possible that in certain cases actual physical transformation are affected.
• 4:31:31
  Speaker 12: There are many cases on record in which actual tissue
• 4:31:34
  Speaker 12: has been replaced apparently instantaneously by some extraordinary means. In
• 4:31:39
  Speaker 12: these cases, it is possible that the spiritual energy has
• 4:31:42
  Speaker 12: actually built up a part of the body out of matter,
• 4:31:45
  Speaker 12: and the vital forces which were employed materialized it in fact,
• 4:31:50
  Speaker 12: and left this part of the body whole and sound
• 4:31:52
  Speaker 12: as before. To those who believe in the reality of materialization,
• 4:31:57
  Speaker 12: that human bodies of flesh and blood can be built
• 4:32:00
  Speaker 12: up out of invisible elements, there is nothing incredible in
• 4:32:03
  Speaker 12: this suggestion, but it is only advanced as a tentative
• 4:32:07
  Speaker 12: and possible explanation of certain facts which have to date
• 4:32:10
  Speaker 12: received no explanation whatever. How to draw upon the cosmic energy?
• 4:32:16
  Speaker 12: The great question is how are we to draw upon
• 4:32:18
  Speaker 12: this great store of energy? If we are alone, how
• 4:32:21
  Speaker 12: effect a cure within ourselves? And if you are a medium,
• 4:32:25
  Speaker 12: how cultivate and develop the power of drawing upon this
• 4:32:28
  Speaker 12: cosmic energy to such an extent that cures may thereby
• 4:32:31
  Speaker 12: be effected through or by the means of your instrumentality.
• 4:32:35
  Speaker 12: Let us take the former question first. We will suppose
• 4:32:38
  Speaker 12: you are alone, with no one near to help you.
• 4:32:40
  Speaker 12: You desire to be helped and cured by spiritual means.
• 4:32:44
  Speaker 12: What are you to do? In the first place, you
• 4:32:46
  Speaker 12: must learn how to relax. If your muscles are ten
• 4:32:49
  Speaker 12: cent rigid, you will never receive any influx of spiritual energy.
• 4:32:53
  Speaker 12: You shut it out. Since the receptive attitude is the
• 4:32:56
  Speaker 12: only one in which this energy can be obtained, so
• 4:32:59
  Speaker 12: you must in sure complete muscular relaxation. It may be
• 4:33:03
  Speaker 12: obtained as follows. Lie on a hard couch with no
• 4:33:07
  Speaker 12: support for the head, relax all over as completely as possible.
• 4:33:11
  Speaker 12: Then think of your neck you will probably find it
• 4:33:14
  Speaker 12: tense and stiff when your attention is turned upon it,
• 4:33:17
  Speaker 12: and that you are holding your head on your shoulders.
• 4:33:20
  Speaker 12: Relax it, allowing the head to sink into the couch
• 4:33:23
  Speaker 12: and support it. When you have done this thoroughly, think
• 4:33:27
  Speaker 12: of your right arm and relax that, then the left arm,
• 4:33:31
  Speaker 12: then the right leg, then the left leg, and finally
• 4:33:34
  Speaker 12: the whole trunk. After you have encircled the body in
• 4:33:37
  Speaker 12: this way two or three times, you will be well relaxed,
• 4:33:41
  Speaker 12: and you must then begin your breathing exercises. Breathe slowly
• 4:33:45
  Speaker 12: and regularly, inhaling from the diaphragm, not the chest. Breathe
• 4:33:50
  Speaker 12: through the nose, as before explained. Keep up these breathing
• 4:33:54
  Speaker 12: exercises for five minutes, expanding the lungs and seeing to
• 4:33:58
  Speaker 12: it that you have plenty of fresh air. This will
• 4:34:00
  Speaker 12: be quite enough for the first day or two, and
• 4:34:03
  Speaker 12: it is inadvisable to try any more. You will arise
• 4:34:06
  Speaker 12: refreshed and invigorated as the result of your exercise progressive exercises.
• 4:34:13
  Speaker 12: On the third day, you may begin your mental practices.
• 4:34:16
  Speaker 12: When breathing. With every breath you take in, think to yourself,
• 4:34:20
  Speaker 12: I am power, I am strength, I am health, I
• 4:34:24
  Speaker 12: am well, et cetera. Keep this up for three or
• 4:34:28
  Speaker 12: four minutes, concentrating upon it and really believing it. Then
• 4:34:32
  Speaker 12: rest quietly for a minute or two. Then quietly and
• 4:34:35
  Speaker 12: hopefully call upon this spiritual energy to cure you. Remember,
• 4:34:39
  Speaker 12: the more completely you can give yourself up to the
• 4:34:41
  Speaker 12: influences which come to help and cure you, the more
• 4:34:44
  Speaker 12: completely and rapidly will you be cured. Send out a
• 4:34:47
  Speaker 12: mental call for help and assistance, and it will surely
• 4:34:50
  Speaker 12: come to you. The function of the vital body spiritual
• 4:34:55
  Speaker 12: healing depends very largely upon the fact that the physical
• 4:34:59
  Speaker 12: body can be act upon and influenced from higher spheres
• 4:35:02
  Speaker 12: than planes of activity, through or by means of the
• 4:35:05
  Speaker 12: vital or etheric body which inhabits the physical body. This
• 4:35:09
  Speaker 12: inner body acts as a sort of medium or vehicle
• 4:35:12
  Speaker 12: through which the cosmic energy flows. And the problem is
• 4:35:15
  Speaker 12: to connect up this inner body both with the physical
• 4:35:18
  Speaker 12: body on the one hand, and with the great reservoir
• 4:35:20
  Speaker 12: of spiritual energy on the other. It must be admitted
• 4:35:23
  Speaker 12: that we do not know exactly how this is done
• 4:35:26
  Speaker 12: in the present age of the world's spiritual evolution. If
• 4:35:29
  Speaker 12: we did, we should be enabled to perform almost miraculous cures,
• 4:35:33
  Speaker 12: instantly resembling those of Christ, who doubtless possessed a wonderful
• 4:35:37
  Speaker 12: knowledge of these laws. If the law is to be
• 4:35:40
  Speaker 12: discovered at all, it is doubtless along these lines. Experiment therefore,
• 4:35:45
  Speaker 12: and when you hit upon certain positive results, you may
• 4:35:48
  Speaker 12: be sure that you have discovered a portion of the
• 4:35:50
  Speaker 12: great truth. Do not assume, however, on that account, that
• 4:35:54
  Speaker 12: you have the whole truth, for you will make a
• 4:35:56
  Speaker 12: great mistake if you do. How to become a spiritual Now,
• 4:36:01
  Speaker 12: let us suppose that you are a medium, and that
• 4:36:03
  Speaker 12: you are treating someone else. You desire to gain this
• 4:36:06
  Speaker 12: power and to obtain assistance from the spirit world. This
• 4:36:09
  Speaker 12: is how you should proceed. You must, first of all,
• 4:36:12
  Speaker 12: see to it that you are in good physical health.
• 4:36:14
  Speaker 12: If you are not, your vital magnetism is apt to
• 4:36:17
  Speaker 12: be tainted and injure the patient. Further, as you often
• 4:36:20
  Speaker 12: draw the patient's ills from his body into yours, you
• 4:36:24
  Speaker 12: must be in good health to do this. Next, your
• 4:36:27
  Speaker 12: mind must be receptive, sympathetic, and in an attitude of
• 4:36:30
  Speaker 12: kindly helpfulness. If you feel selfish, this at once sets
• 4:36:35
  Speaker 12: up a barrier or wall which you will be unable
• 4:36:37
  Speaker 12: to break through. Finally, your psychic sensitiveness and mediumship must
• 4:36:42
  Speaker 12: be developed to a certain extent to enable you to
• 4:36:45
  Speaker 12: practice this phase with any hope of success. The methods
• 4:36:49
  Speaker 12: which you must follow to increase your mediumistic power have
• 4:36:52
  Speaker 12: been explained in some of the previous chapters, and will
• 4:36:55
  Speaker 12: be more fully explained than those which follow. Now, assuming
• 4:36:58
  Speaker 12: that you have your patient before you, place your hands
• 4:37:01
  Speaker 12: on his forehead and make gentle strokings. Then place one
• 4:37:04
  Speaker 12: hand on his forehead in one on his solar plexus.
• 4:37:08
  Speaker 12: Take a number of deep breaths, asking your patient to
• 4:37:10
  Speaker 12: close his eyes and breathe with you in perfect rhythm.
• 4:37:14
  Speaker 12: In this way you get into unison and sympathy. Then
• 4:37:17
  Speaker 12: make yourself negative and ask the spiritual power to come
• 4:37:20
  Speaker 12: and help and assist you in your process of cure.
• 4:37:24
  Speaker 12: Make yourself a channel for it. You will feel tingling
• 4:37:27
  Speaker 12: sensations in your arms, and the patient will feel them
• 4:37:30
  Speaker 12: in his body. This is the beginning of the process.
• 4:37:33
  Speaker 12: Try to find just the right mental and spiritual latitude
• 4:37:37
  Speaker 12: and power will certainly come. From day to day. Your
• 4:37:40
  Speaker 12: ability to draw upon the great cosmic energy will increase.
• 4:37:44
  Speaker 12: You will get greater and greater power, and as this develops,
• 4:37:47
  Speaker 12: you will be able to handle and control it more
• 4:37:49
  Speaker 12: and more. Your power as a spiritual healer will, in
• 4:37:53
  Speaker 12: this manner increase from day to day. End of Chapter eighteen.
• 4:37:59
  Speaker 13: Chapter nineteen the cultivation of sensitiveness. Sensitiveness means the ability
• 4:38:05
  Speaker 13: to sense or perceive, in some subtle manner auras impressions
• 4:38:08
  Speaker 13: and influences, either issuing from another living person or from
• 4:38:13
  Speaker 13: some thing, or emanating from spirits. And so far as
• 4:38:16
  Speaker 13: a sensitive or medium can sensor feel these influences, he
• 4:38:19
  Speaker 13: is a psychic. And the cultivation of this power is
• 4:38:22
  Speaker 13: in a sense the essence of all true progress and mediumship.
• 4:38:27
  Speaker 13: This is therefore one of the most important lessons which
• 4:38:30
  Speaker 13: can be learned, for as you progress in psychic sensitiveness,
• 4:38:33
  Speaker 13: you also progress in mediumship, other things being equal. The
• 4:38:37
  Speaker 13: first chapter of this book was devoted to development, but
• 4:38:40
  Speaker 13: that only gave the outward form, as it were, of
• 4:38:43
  Speaker 13: the process, and did not enter in any way fully
• 4:38:45
  Speaker 13: into its essence. We cannot pretend to do so even
• 4:38:48
  Speaker 13: in this chapter, since the subject is too vast and
• 4:38:51
  Speaker 13: too delicate. But I may take the student some distance
• 4:38:54
  Speaker 13: further along the road, for after he has mastered the
• 4:38:56
  Speaker 13: preceding chapters, he will be more enable to undertake these
• 4:38:59
  Speaker 13: extras sizes than he was at the beginning of his development.
• 4:39:03
  Speaker 13: How to distinguish true from false. One of the greatest difficulties,
• 4:39:07
  Speaker 13: doubtless in the cultivation of sensitiveness is how to distinguish
• 4:39:11
  Speaker 13: true from false, hallucination from reality. At first, this will
• 4:39:16
  Speaker 13: doubtless be next to impossible, that many false steps will
• 4:39:19
  Speaker 13: have to be taken before you find from actual, bitter
• 4:39:22
  Speaker 13: experience what is true and what is not. But as
• 4:39:26
  Speaker 13: the innocence becomes developed, you will find that it not
• 4:39:28
  Speaker 13: only gives you the knowledge in question, but that it
• 4:39:31
  Speaker 13: also enables you to distinguish one from the other, true
• 4:39:34
  Speaker 13: from false, and illuminates the whole subject, so that mistake
• 4:39:38
  Speaker 13: is almost impossible. This certainty, which you will then have
• 4:39:42
  Speaker 13: cannot be communicated to another. It is often impossible to
• 4:39:46
  Speaker 13: prove to one who does not experience this inner vision
• 4:39:49
  Speaker 13: of reality that what you receive is true. Nonetheless, as
• 4:39:53
  Speaker 13: mister Charles Brent says in his sixth sense, the serious
• 4:39:57
  Speaker 13: crux is how, in the realm of the spiritu and
• 4:40:00
  Speaker 13: the physically intangible, to distinguish between the real and the
• 4:40:04
  Speaker 13: seeming the true and the false. This is the function
• 4:40:07
  Speaker 13: of the mystic sense to do, aided by the full
• 4:40:10
  Speaker 13: complement of inner faculties. In a measure, the mystic sense,
• 4:40:14
  Speaker 13: like the bodily senses, acts automatically, but like them, it
• 4:40:18
  Speaker 13: needs special training in order to separate phantasm from reality,
• 4:40:23
  Speaker 13: to determine values, and to grade and classify ideals until
• 4:40:26
  Speaker 13: they reveal themselves to be ordered unity, not less, but
• 4:40:30
  Speaker 13: more mysterious, because more intelligible to the whole man. Is
• 4:40:35
  Speaker 13: because of all this that long training in psychic development
• 4:40:38
  Speaker 13: is necessary, and sudden jumps or leaps into full possession
• 4:40:41
  Speaker 13: of this knowledge is impossible. The first step, the first
• 4:40:46
  Speaker 13: thing to do in cultivating your inner sensitiveness is to
• 4:40:49
  Speaker 13: stimulate your physical senses to the point of their highest activity.
• 4:40:54
  Speaker 13: Endeavor to perceive and feel vibrations unfelt by others, for
• 4:40:57
  Speaker 13: much depends upon vibration. Train your senses. Then train yourself
• 4:41:02
  Speaker 13: and seeing auras and in psychometry as before explained. In
• 4:41:06
  Speaker 13: this way, getting further along the road, try to see
• 4:41:09
  Speaker 13: and to feel the emanation coming from people you meet.
• 4:41:13
  Speaker 13: Look at them steadily and see whether you cannot discover
• 4:41:16
  Speaker 13: a sort of hot air or vaporous emanation, issuing from
• 4:41:20
  Speaker 13: their bodies and radiating out into space. As soon as
• 4:41:24
  Speaker 13: you have succeeded in this, begin to analyze your feelings
• 4:41:27
  Speaker 13: and emotions and interpret them. Do this one when you
• 4:41:31
  Speaker 13: touch the person in question, two when you receive a
• 4:41:34
  Speaker 13: letter from him, which you should hold in your hand
• 4:41:37
  Speaker 13: or between both hands, three when you hear him speak,
• 4:41:41
  Speaker 13: and four when you merely see him. When trying these experiments,
• 4:41:46
  Speaker 13: assume a listening attitude as before explained, and breathe slowly
• 4:41:50
  Speaker 13: and deeply. This breathing must not be too conscious so
• 4:41:55
  Speaker 13: as to take your attention. However, relax yourself as much
• 4:41:58
  Speaker 13: as possible during this period. Try in the dark or
• 4:42:01
  Speaker 13: semi dark at first, in the light later on. Psychic
• 4:42:06
  Speaker 13: atmosphere when you are walking along the street. Cultivate the
• 4:42:10
  Speaker 13: practice of sensing persons and seeing their aura. You will
• 4:42:14
  Speaker 13: soon be able to feel a sort of air or
• 4:42:16
  Speaker 13: atmosphere about each individual, just as there is a definite
• 4:42:19
  Speaker 13: air or atmosphere about a house or a town. Thus,
• 4:42:23
  Speaker 13: a manufacturing town has quite a different atmosphere from one
• 4:42:27
  Speaker 13: which is not. You will soon be able to get
• 4:42:29
  Speaker 13: this in a general manner. After you have progressed thus far,
• 4:42:33
  Speaker 13: you should endeavor to feel any cuts, bruises, pains, etc.
• 4:42:37
  Speaker 13: Which may be upon a person's body. You should do
• 4:42:40
  Speaker 13: this at first by passing your open hands gently over
• 4:42:43
  Speaker 13: the surface of the body, and as soon as you
• 4:42:45
  Speaker 13: come to a spot which is sensitive and sore, you
• 4:42:48
  Speaker 13: will feel a slight pain in your own body in
• 4:42:50
  Speaker 13: the corresponding place. Before you are able to do this
• 4:42:54
  Speaker 13: with much success, however, you should develop certain phases of psychometry,
• 4:42:58
  Speaker 13: as for instance the following. Make a number of small
• 4:43:02
  Speaker 13: paper packages, all exactly alike in appearance. In these place salt, pepper, mustard, cloves, nutmeg, sugar, cayenne,
• 4:43:12
  Speaker 13: et cetera. Mix these all up so you cannot tell
• 4:43:15
  Speaker 13: which is which. Now practice feeling or handling these until
• 4:43:18
  Speaker 13: you can tell the contents of any given package by
• 4:43:21
  Speaker 13: merely feeling the paper in which it was wrapped. As
• 4:43:24
  Speaker 13: soon as you have done this, you are ready for
• 4:43:26
  Speaker 13: more advanced practices. Having progressed thus far, you are in
• 4:43:30
  Speaker 13: a position to try your first experiments in psychic diagnosis.
• 4:43:34
  Speaker 13: Pass your hands over the body of your patient, who
• 4:43:37
  Speaker 13: should be divested of as many clothes as possible, and
• 4:43:40
  Speaker 13: if your sensitiveness has begun to develop, you will feel
• 4:43:43
  Speaker 13: a pain or some sensation in your hand or arm,
• 4:43:47
  Speaker 13: or in some corresponding part of your own body. As
• 4:43:49
  Speaker 13: you reach the disease spot in your patient's body, cultivate
• 4:43:53
  Speaker 13: this until you can succeed with more or less certainty
• 4:43:55
  Speaker 13: and precision. The more you practice this, the more perfect
• 4:43:58
  Speaker 13: you will become, and the more rapid your advancement will be.
• 4:44:03
  Speaker 13: When you have reached this stage, you must go one
• 4:44:05
  Speaker 13: step further. Having located the seat of the trouble and
• 4:44:08
  Speaker 13: its general nature, you must seek to know how to
• 4:44:11
  Speaker 13: cure it. Hold the mind in a receptive attitude when
• 4:44:14
  Speaker 13: doing this, and you'll soon begin to receive the distinct
• 4:44:17
  Speaker 13: impression that you must do something for the patient, but
• 4:44:20
  Speaker 13: you will not know as yet what it is. After
• 4:44:24
  Speaker 13: little time, you will get the distinct impression what to
• 4:44:26
  Speaker 13: do to make certain passes or manipulations, to prescribe a
• 4:44:30
  Speaker 13: certain drug, to apply certain water applications, et cetera. As
• 4:44:34
  Speaker 13: soon as you have reached this stage, you are on
• 4:44:36
  Speaker 13: the high road to becoming a successful spiritual healer, and
• 4:44:40
  Speaker 13: your power will develop with every sitting. It would be
• 4:44:43
  Speaker 13: well for you at this stage to sit by yourself,
• 4:44:46
  Speaker 13: especially for development in this direction. An added power will
• 4:44:49
  Speaker 13: doubtless be given you with which to work your cures
• 4:44:53
  Speaker 13: progressive exercises in self development. It may be, however, that
• 4:44:58
  Speaker 13: you do not care to develop your sense sensitiveness in
• 4:45:00
  Speaker 13: this direction. You shall only develop it for your own progress,
• 4:45:04
  Speaker 13: and not for the purpose of becoming a healer at all.
• 4:45:07
  Speaker 13: In that case, you must follow a slightly different method
• 4:45:10
  Speaker 13: of development. Though all the exercises we have described will
• 4:45:13
  Speaker 13: be found helpful and advantageous, if you desire to cultivate
• 4:45:17
  Speaker 13: your own sensitiveness, the following exercises will be found very useful.
• 4:45:21
  Speaker 13: In this connection, one try to analyze your own emotions
• 4:45:26
  Speaker 13: when in the presence of a a large company of
• 4:45:28
  Speaker 13: people and b a small gathering. You will probably find
• 4:45:32
  Speaker 13: that your impressions are very different, and that a large
• 4:45:35
  Speaker 13: crowd will give you the impression of being more scattered
• 4:45:37
  Speaker 13: in mind than a small one. In other words, you
• 4:45:41
  Speaker 13: will begin to sensor feel the mind of the crowd.
• 4:45:44
  Speaker 13: It is well known that such a thing exists, for
• 4:45:46
  Speaker 13: crowds will often do things and perform actions which no
• 4:45:49
  Speaker 13: individual in it would perform alone. If you can sense
• 4:45:52
  Speaker 13: this mind of the crowd, your sensitiveness is progressing favorably.
• 4:45:56
  Speaker 2: And rapidly.
• 4:45:58
  Speaker 13: Two stand before mirror. See whether or not you are
• 4:46:02
  Speaker 13: nable to perceive any influence coming from your reflected image
• 4:46:05
  Speaker 13: in the mirror. Many sensitive persons can do this, and
• 4:46:09
  Speaker 13: the more sensitive you are, the more you can feel this.
• 4:46:12
  Speaker 13: You will sense the magnetic fluid coming from the reflected
• 4:46:15
  Speaker 13: form in the mirror. Three. If you are in the
• 4:46:19
  Speaker 13: habit of sleeping with anyone regularly, endeavor to analyze the
• 4:46:22
  Speaker 13: impressions you receive from the ore emanating from the body
• 4:46:25
  Speaker 13: of the person with whom you may be sleeping. See
• 4:46:28
  Speaker 13: whether this is positive or negative. Positive, or is slightly
• 4:46:32
  Speaker 13: warm negative, or is somewhat cold. Four hold your right
• 4:46:38
  Speaker 13: hand above a mirror, then the left hand. Try to
• 4:46:42
  Speaker 13: feel whether one hand feels cooler than the other, or
• 4:46:44
  Speaker 13: whether both are of equal temperature. The hand which is
• 4:46:48
  Speaker 13: warmest is on the more positive side of the body.
• 4:46:51
  Speaker 13: Five close your eyes and have someone make magnetic passes
• 4:46:56
  Speaker 13: over your head and shoulders. Try to tell whether those
• 4:46:59
  Speaker 13: passes are being made in an upward or downward direction.
• 4:47:02
  Speaker 13: Downward passes are positive or sleeping passes. Upward passes are
• 4:47:07
  Speaker 13: negative or waking passes. Six. Procure several metals such as copper, iron, tin, zinc, etc.
• 4:47:19
  Speaker 13: Place your hand over each in turn and ascertain the
• 4:47:22
  Speaker 13: different impressions you get from each one. Then wrap them
• 4:47:25
  Speaker 13: in separate pieces of paper, making all alike in appearance,
• 4:47:29
  Speaker 13: and see whether you can always tell the correct metal
• 4:47:31
  Speaker 13: from feeling the paper. Then place your open hand over
• 4:47:35
  Speaker 13: the paper without touching it. Next, remove your hand gradually
• 4:47:40
  Speaker 13: further and further away, until you're some distance from the metal.
• 4:47:44
  Speaker 13: After a time, you should be enabled to do all
• 4:47:46
  Speaker 13: this from a considerable distance. It is only an extension
• 4:47:49
  Speaker 13: of this power which enables dowsers or metal and water
• 4:47:53
  Speaker 13: finders to locate the whereabouts of metal and water under
• 4:47:55
  Speaker 13: the ground by walking over the spot above the ground
• 4:47:58
  Speaker 13: with hands outstretched, with a divining or dousing rod held
• 4:48:02
  Speaker 13: in their hands. Seven. Always have flowers in your sleeping room.
• 4:48:07
  Speaker 13: They are a good influence. Analyze the difference between your
• 4:48:10
  Speaker 13: impressions when the flowers are removed and when they are
• 4:48:13
  Speaker 13: in the room. Colors and emotions. Eight. Procure some water
• 4:48:19
  Speaker 13: colors and paint solid strips of color on a piece
• 4:48:22
  Speaker 13: of white paper. Make these about a half an inch
• 4:48:25
  Speaker 13: broad and three inches long on one piece. Paint a
• 4:48:28
  Speaker 13: bright red strip on another of vivid blue on another,
• 4:48:32
  Speaker 13: emerald green on another, black, et cetera. Blindfold your eyes,
• 4:48:37
  Speaker 13: shuffle the papers, and then place your hand on the
• 4:48:39
  Speaker 13: topmost one, and see whether you can tell from your
• 4:48:42
  Speaker 13: impressions what color you are touching. Red will give you
• 4:48:46
  Speaker 13: a sensation of warmth, light, blue of cold, et cetera.
• 4:48:50
  Speaker 13: As explained in the chapter devoted to color and its
• 4:48:52
  Speaker 13: Interpretation nine, try to cultivate what is known as sensitiveness
• 4:48:58
  Speaker 13: to psychic contagion. You must remember that thoughts and emotions
• 4:49:02
  Speaker 13: are just as contagious as diseases, and that you can
• 4:49:05
  Speaker 13: catch them in just the same way when in the
• 4:49:08
  Speaker 13: company of other persons. Therefore, endeavor to catch or feel
• 4:49:11
  Speaker 13: their emotions and feelings. You will probably get at first
• 4:49:15
  Speaker 13: the thoughts, etc. They are expressing, then those which they
• 4:49:19
  Speaker 13: are just about to express, so that you take the
• 4:49:23
  Speaker 13: words out of their mouths. Then you will begin to
• 4:49:26
  Speaker 13: sense the feelings and emotions of the speaker before they
• 4:49:29
  Speaker 13: are put into words. Finally, you will be enabled to
• 4:49:31
  Speaker 13: appreciate his whole feeling and thinking self by a species
• 4:49:35
  Speaker 13: of intuition or impression. Endeavor to draw this out of
• 4:49:39
  Speaker 13: your subject, and do not let it come to you
• 4:49:41
  Speaker 13: without any effort on your part. Be active, that is,
• 4:49:44
  Speaker 13: instead of merely passive, and this way lies safety and
• 4:49:48
  Speaker 13: success the expression of impressions received. Ten. Finally, you must
• 4:49:54
  Speaker 13: teach yourself to express what you feel. Often this is
• 4:49:58
  Speaker 13: most difficulty feel a thing and feel inclined to say it,
• 4:50:02
  Speaker 13: where something seems to hold you back until it is
• 4:50:04
  Speaker 13: too late. Overcome this restrictive feeling. It is important you
• 4:50:08
  Speaker 13: should do so, for this is one of the most
• 4:50:10
  Speaker 13: important things to learn in the cultivation of mediumship. When
• 4:50:14
  Speaker 13: you have learned to express your impressions, you have progressed
• 4:50:16
  Speaker 13: far along the road. These practices in the cultivation of
• 4:50:21
  Speaker 13: sensitiveness are the most valuable you can have as a
• 4:50:23
  Speaker 13: preparation for the cultivation of true mediumship. At the same time,
• 4:50:28
  Speaker 13: they are safe exercises to follow. Practice them therefore before
• 4:50:32
  Speaker 13: you attempt any definitely mediumistic exercises, and you will be
• 4:50:36
  Speaker 13: rewarded by a safe and sane increase of your inner
• 4:50:39
  Speaker 13: spiritual faculties. End of Chapter nineteen.
• 4:50:43
  Speaker 2: Chapter twenty. Trance. Trance is a condition into which certain
• 4:50:49
  Speaker 2: mediums enter in order to receive messages and give them
• 4:50:53
  Speaker 2: in the form of speaking or writing. No one knows
• 4:50:56
  Speaker 2: at the present time, what the medium trance is, or,
• 4:50:59
  Speaker 2: for them matter, any other kind of trance. Doctor George Moore,
• 4:51:04
  Speaker 2: in his Use of the Body and Relation to the Mind,
• 4:51:06
  Speaker 2: says trance is a state of body sometimes produced in man,
• 4:51:11
  Speaker 2: a condition utterly inexplicable by any principle taught in the schools.
• 4:51:15
  Speaker 2: Professor William James stated his belief that the medium trance
• 4:51:19
  Speaker 2: was different from any other trance of which we have
• 4:51:21
  Speaker 2: any knowledge, and this seems to be borne out by
• 4:51:24
  Speaker 2: the fact that spirit messages are given in this condition,
• 4:51:27
  Speaker 2: as well as telepathic, clairvoyant and premonitory messages of all kinds.
• 4:51:33
  Speaker 2: What is trance? Both trance and catalepsy occur spontaneously. Both
• 4:51:40
  Speaker 2: may also be induced artificially by hypnotism. Both are mistaken
• 4:51:44
  Speaker 2: for death, and in many respects they are very similar.
• 4:51:47
  Speaker 2: In catalepsy the body is rigid, whereas in trance this
• 4:51:51
  Speaker 2: is very rarely the case, this forming the chief mark
• 4:51:54
  Speaker 2: of distinction external indication between the two states. What the
• 4:51:59
  Speaker 2: internal difference is we do not know. Various attempts, however,
• 4:52:03
  Speaker 2: have been made to define them. Doctor Franz Hartmann E. G.
• 4:52:07
  Speaker 2: Thus distinguishes them. Quote there seems hardly any limit to
• 4:52:12
  Speaker 2: the time during which a person may remain in a trance.
• 4:52:15
  Speaker 2: But catalepsy is due to some obstruction in the organic
• 4:52:19
  Speaker 2: mechanism of the body on account of its exhausted nervous power.
• 4:52:23
  Speaker 2: In the last case, the activity of life begins again
• 4:52:26
  Speaker 2: as soon as the impediment is removed or the nervous
• 4:52:29
  Speaker 2: energy has recuperated its strength. End quote Death, Its Causes
• 4:52:34
  Speaker 2: and Phenomena by Heroard Carrington and John R.
• 4:52:37
  Speaker 9: Meter.
• 4:52:38
  Speaker 2: When a hypnotist places his subject under hypnotic control, the
• 4:52:42
  Speaker 2: subject remains en rapport with the operator. The influence comes
• 4:52:47
  Speaker 2: from a living person. In the medium trance, it seems
• 4:52:50
  Speaker 2: possible that the operator is not a living but a
• 4:52:53
  Speaker 2: deceased person, and that it is a kind of telepathic
• 4:52:56
  Speaker 2: influence from spirits which induces this state. In fact, it
• 4:53:00
  Speaker 2: is brought about by influence from the other side. Light
• 4:53:05
  Speaker 2: and deep trance. There are all grades and degrees of trance,
• 4:53:09
  Speaker 2: from the very light stage, in which there is but
• 4:53:12
  Speaker 2: little difference from the ordinary waking consciousness, to that degree
• 4:53:16
  Speaker 2: of deep trance where the medium is totally unconscious of
• 4:53:19
  Speaker 2: everything that passes around him. Very deep trance of this
• 4:53:23
  Speaker 2: character is rare, but many of the most famous mediums
• 4:53:26
  Speaker 2: have got their best messages while in that condition. The
• 4:53:30
  Speaker 2: famous Missus Piper of Boston had almost to die du
• 4:53:33
  Speaker 2: all outward appearances before she could enter this deep trance,
• 4:53:37
  Speaker 2: and at the end of two hours or so during
• 4:53:39
  Speaker 2: which the trance lasted, the only signs of life were
• 4:53:43
  Speaker 2: slow respiration and heartbeat. The only signs of consciousness were
• 4:53:47
  Speaker 2: manifest in the right hand and arm, which did the
• 4:53:49
  Speaker 2: automatic writing. Many test mediums and sensitives, on the other hand,
• 4:53:55
  Speaker 2: passed into a stage of trance so light that no
• 4:53:58
  Speaker 2: one but an expert could any trance at all. Yet
• 4:54:02
  Speaker 2: in many such cases no memory of the condition remains
• 4:54:05
  Speaker 2: after the trance is finished. These light trances differ but
• 4:54:09
  Speaker 2: slightly from cases of day dreams, absent mindedness, et cetera.
• 4:54:13
  Speaker 2: When we say to a person half in joke, you
• 4:54:16
  Speaker 2: were in a trance by shades and degrees. This becomes
• 4:54:19
  Speaker 2: deeper as the state becomes more profound, and lower and
• 4:54:23
  Speaker 2: lower layers or strata of the subconscious mind are reached.
• 4:54:27
  Speaker 2: Missus Piper had three distinct layers of this character. The
• 4:54:31
  Speaker 2: first differed slightly from the waking state. In this condition,
• 4:54:34
  Speaker 2: she talked. The second condition was far deeper trance, and
• 4:54:38
  Speaker 2: in this stage spirits were seen instead of human beings.
• 4:54:42
  Speaker 2: In the third, or deepest stage, speech was usually absent
• 4:54:45
  Speaker 2: and automatic writing occurred. Spirit control during trance. In trance,
• 4:54:53
  Speaker 2: we may assume that there is a gradual and fluctuating
• 4:54:55
  Speaker 2: control of the medium's mind and body by the communicating spirit,
• 4:55:00
  Speaker 2: and that as one vacates or is driven out by
• 4:55:02
  Speaker 2: the invading intelligence, the latter is able to control more
• 4:55:05
  Speaker 2: and more effectually the medium. Just as two solid bodies
• 4:55:10
  Speaker 2: cannot be in the same place at the same time,
• 4:55:12
  Speaker 2: so two spirit intelligences cannot occupy and control the same
• 4:55:16
  Speaker 2: body at the same moment. When once the fact of
• 4:55:19
  Speaker 2: spirit control is granted, the nature and character of this
• 4:55:23
  Speaker 2: control remains to be solved. How does the spirit manipulate
• 4:55:27
  Speaker 2: the brain and nervous mechanism of the medium to bring
• 4:55:29
  Speaker 2: about the desired results, What parts of the brain are used,
• 4:55:33
  Speaker 2: and how These and many similar questions remain to be answered,
• 4:55:37
  Speaker 2: and it may take many years of scientific research before
• 4:55:41
  Speaker 2: we are enabled to answer queries such as these with
• 4:55:43
  Speaker 2: any degree of confidence. The difference between somnambulism and trance,
• 4:55:50
  Speaker 2: the difference between somnambulism and the medium trance seems to
• 4:55:54
  Speaker 2: be that in the former we remain unrapport with ourselves,
• 4:55:58
  Speaker 2: and in the latter we are in touch with this
• 4:55:59
  Speaker 2: spirit world. Many mediums who give inspirational messages or lectures
• 4:56:04
  Speaker 2: from the platform are in a condition of light trance,
• 4:56:07
  Speaker 2: and children have been known to pass into this condition
• 4:56:10
  Speaker 2: and give a large amount of valuable information unknown to
• 4:56:13
  Speaker 2: their seniors, and which certainly could not have been known
• 4:56:15
  Speaker 2: to themselves. Properly managed, the trans condition is not harmful,
• 4:56:20
  Speaker 2: though it may become so in the hands of blundering persons.
• 4:56:24
  Speaker 2: The Spiritualist's Manual gives four chief reasons why the trance
• 4:56:28
  Speaker 2: state should not be harmful to those who enter it.
• 4:56:31
  Speaker 2: These are various methods of conveying information during trance. One,
• 4:56:37
  Speaker 2: the intelligences acting upon them the mediums are almost invariably
• 4:56:42
  Speaker 2: of a superior character, and therefore must mold the organism
• 4:56:45
  Speaker 2: by constant use for the expression of higher forms of thought. Two,
• 4:56:51
  Speaker 2: the relation of the medium to the manifesting intelligence is
• 4:56:54
  Speaker 2: that of pupil to teacher, sometimes that of a child
• 4:56:57
  Speaker 2: to a wise and loving parent, and some times both
• 4:57:00
  Speaker 2: these relations combined with a subtle and ennobling spirituality. Three,
• 4:57:06
  Speaker 2: there is always a mutual spiritual relation even though the
• 4:57:10
  Speaker 2: medium is not humanly conscious of it, and no one
• 4:57:13
  Speaker 2: can be a medium for the perfect expression of spiritual
• 4:57:15
  Speaker 2: messages or discourses who does not consent to the procedure
• 4:57:19
  Speaker 2: and cooperate with a manifesting spirit.
• 4:57:22
  Speaker 8: Four.
• 4:57:23
  Speaker 2: As the master musician improves the instrument he plays upon,
• 4:57:27
  Speaker 2: so also a spirit controlling a human organism for the
• 4:57:30
  Speaker 2: purpose of expressing wholesome thought imparts a greater power both
• 4:57:34
  Speaker 2: to the brain and spirit of the medium. It is
• 4:57:37
  Speaker 2: often difficult for spirits to control a medium sufficiently to
• 4:57:40
  Speaker 2: manifest in any way through him different types of control.
• 4:57:45
  Speaker 2: There are various types of control which are used by
• 4:57:48
  Speaker 2: spirits in trance mediumship. A. There is the telepathic method,
• 4:57:53
  Speaker 2: in which the thought is conveyed direct to the mind
• 4:57:55
  Speaker 2: of the medium, who is sufficiently awake in light trance
• 4:57:58
  Speaker 2: to receive this thought and give it out to the
• 4:58:00
  Speaker 2: sitter in speech or writing. B. There is the picture
• 4:58:05
  Speaker 2: or pictographic method, in which the spirits present certain images
• 4:58:09
  Speaker 2: or pictures to the clairvoyant eye of the medium, and
• 4:58:12
  Speaker 2: these pictures are seen and interpreted either directly or symbolically
• 4:58:17
  Speaker 2: c There is the sense impression method, in which general
• 4:58:20
  Speaker 2: sensations or impressions are conveyed to the medium, who takes
• 4:58:24
  Speaker 2: on the condition of the communicating spirit describes pains felt
• 4:58:27
  Speaker 2: in various parts of the body, et cetera, as the
• 4:58:30
  Speaker 2: case may be. D There is the direct control method,
• 4:58:34
  Speaker 2: in which the spirit apparently removes the medium's own spirit
• 4:58:38
  Speaker 2: more or less from the body in deep trance, and
• 4:58:41
  Speaker 2: manipulates it as he would an instrument, by acting upon
• 4:58:44
  Speaker 2: the nervous system direct in much the same way that
• 4:58:46
  Speaker 2: we act upon our own nervous systems throughout life. This
• 4:58:50
  Speaker 2: latter method is very rare and is only found in
• 4:58:53
  Speaker 2: cases of very deep trance. Doubtless, there are other methods
• 4:58:57
  Speaker 2: which spirits employ at times, and probably combine all be
• 4:59:00
  Speaker 2: above on occasion, but these are the most distinctive methods,
• 4:59:04
  Speaker 2: and they are the ones which may be seen more
• 4:59:06
  Speaker 2: readily than any others in cases of trance mediumship. In
• 4:59:10
  Speaker 2: cases of so called ecstasy, the spirit of the medium
• 4:59:13
  Speaker 2: obtains the information himself, either by clairvoyante vision or by
• 4:59:18
  Speaker 2: partially separating itself from the body and visiting the spiritual
• 4:59:21
  Speaker 2: world direct The visions which are obtained in ecstasy are
• 4:59:25
  Speaker 2: thus descriptive of the spiritual world and what is happening there,
• 4:59:29
  Speaker 2: And for this reason most of the revelations so called
• 4:59:33
  Speaker 2: are ecstatic visions, more or less symbolic the best way
• 4:59:37
  Speaker 2: to enter trance. Many persons cannot enter trans spontaneously, but
• 4:59:43
  Speaker 2: have to be mesmerized by another person before this condition
• 4:59:46
  Speaker 2: is brought about. Even Andrew Jackson Davis was mesmerized for
• 4:59:51
  Speaker 2: years before he could develop spontaneous trance so that he
• 4:59:54
  Speaker 2: could enter it at will. This may be one of
• 4:59:57
  Speaker 2: the best ways for the beginner to begin his trans mediumship,
• 5:00:01
  Speaker 2: but you should take care that the person who mesperizes
• 5:00:04
  Speaker 2: you is of a suitable temperament and in every way
• 5:00:07
  Speaker 2: fitted and qualified to do so. If he is not,
• 5:00:11
  Speaker 2: you are liable to attract to yourself spirits of a
• 5:00:13
  Speaker 2: lower order, and then you will bring to yourself lying
• 5:00:16
  Speaker 2: and malevolent spirits, and you may induce a case of
• 5:00:19
  Speaker 2: so called obsession. However, if the operator is harmonious and
• 5:00:24
  Speaker 2: qualifying for his task, he will not only prevent this,
• 5:00:28
  Speaker 2: but would see you through more safely than if you
• 5:00:30
  Speaker 2: enter this condition spontaneously and by yourself. Trance is very
• 5:00:35
  Speaker 2: closely akin to some cases of suspended animation, to certain
• 5:00:39
  Speaker 2: yoga trance conditions, and even death itself, which has been
• 5:00:43
  Speaker 2: called its twin brother. As we have seen, however, it
• 5:00:47
  Speaker 2: differs from all these very widely spontaneous trance is doubtless
• 5:00:52
  Speaker 2: the most commonly experienced, and is the one which you
• 5:00:54
  Speaker 2: should endeavor to cultivate in yourself, other things being equal,
• 5:00:59
  Speaker 2: During these nditions, as you develop, many odd and striking
• 5:01:03
  Speaker 2: phenomena will doubtless become manifest to you. If your hand
• 5:01:07
  Speaker 2: writes automatically, you will probably note that it becomes more
• 5:01:10
  Speaker 2: or less sensitive or anesthetic, as explained in the chapter
• 5:01:15
  Speaker 2: on automatic writing. If speech is induced as the result
• 5:01:18
  Speaker 2: of trance, this may be striking and coherent, or quite
• 5:01:22
  Speaker 2: possibly mere nonsense and gibberish. If the latter develops, you
• 5:01:26
  Speaker 2: may be sure that something is wrong, and you should
• 5:01:28
  Speaker 2: strive to ascertain what this condition is and correct it
• 5:01:31
  Speaker 2: if possible. Here as elsewhere, you must be careful and
• 5:01:36
  Speaker 2: exercise your own judgment and discretion on the messages received,
• 5:01:39
  Speaker 2: and not to accept all these as absolute truth, for
• 5:01:43
  Speaker 2: if you do, you are likely to be greatly deceived,
• 5:01:46
  Speaker 2: especially at the beginning of your mediumship, where everything is
• 5:01:49
  Speaker 2: faulty and difficult. The clearer the communications, generally speaking, the
• 5:01:54
  Speaker 2: surer the messages. But those coming through what might be
• 5:01:57
  Speaker 2: called amateur mediums are to betray only when they have
• 5:02:01
  Speaker 2: been verified. How to experiment with the trance You may
• 5:02:07
  Speaker 2: experiment with your own trans condition profitably in the following manner.
• 5:02:12
  Speaker 2: Sit with pencil in hand for automatic writing, and induce
• 5:02:16
  Speaker 2: one or more friends of yours to do the same
• 5:02:18
  Speaker 2: thing at the same time. See whether there is any
• 5:02:21
  Speaker 2: connection between your writings when they are compared the next day.
• 5:02:24
  Speaker 2: In many instances where this has been tried, striking coincidental
• 5:02:28
  Speaker 2: messages have been received partly through one medium and partly
• 5:02:31
  Speaker 2: through another. They thus tend to confirm each other and
• 5:02:35
  Speaker 2: show that the same spirit intelligence is active and manifesting
• 5:02:38
  Speaker 2: through both mediums at the same time, almost or one
• 5:02:41
  Speaker 2: directly after the other. How to enter trance by yourself.
• 5:02:48
  Speaker 2: In order to induce trance spontaneously in yourself, you should
• 5:02:52
  Speaker 2: proceed more or less as follows. Begin by gazing for
• 5:02:55
  Speaker 2: some time at a bright object, such as a reflected
• 5:02:58
  Speaker 2: light coming from a when never crystal ball, et cetera.
• 5:03:02
  Speaker 2: This will tend to tire the eyes and nerves slightly
• 5:03:05
  Speaker 2: and bring about a dazed condition, which is usually the
• 5:03:08
  Speaker 2: beginning of trance. While looking at the bright object, breathe
• 5:03:12
  Speaker 2: deeply and regularly through the nose and from the diaphragm,
• 5:03:15
  Speaker 2: as explained before in chapter six. You must not let
• 5:03:18
  Speaker 2: this distract your attention, however, as all the bodily processes
• 5:03:22
  Speaker 2: should be unconscious. If you have already practiced deep breathing
• 5:03:26
  Speaker 2: as before explained, you should by this time be so
• 5:03:29
  Speaker 2: far advanced that you can do so at will without
• 5:03:31
  Speaker 2: consciously thinking of it. While looking at the bright object,
• 5:03:36
  Speaker 2: do not concentrate or think of anything in particular beyond
• 5:03:39
  Speaker 2: keeping yourself conscious and remembering all the time that you
• 5:03:42
  Speaker 2: are yourself, that you are not leaving your body, and
• 5:03:45
  Speaker 2: that you are not going to become totally unconscious. During
• 5:03:49
  Speaker 2: this process. The room should be as quiet as possible,
• 5:03:52
  Speaker 2: though some monotonous sound such as the ticking of a
• 5:03:55
  Speaker 2: large clock might assist matters. Do not listen to this consciously, however.
• 5:04:00
  Speaker 2: Abolish all feelings of fear and all anxiety, as such
• 5:04:04
  Speaker 2: mental states will effectually prevent you from entering the trans condition.
• 5:04:08
  Speaker 2: Let yourself go and develop as far as possible symptoms
• 5:04:14
  Speaker 2: of early trance mediumship. You must not imagine that the
• 5:04:19
  Speaker 2: beginnings of your mediumship will be either profitable or pleasant,
• 5:04:22
  Speaker 2: because they probably will not be. Nearly All successful mediums
• 5:04:26
  Speaker 2: will tell you that they have passed through a period
• 5:04:28
  Speaker 2: at the beginning of their mediumship when they thought themselves
• 5:04:31
  Speaker 2: in danger and believed that their minds were being in
• 5:04:34
  Speaker 2: pair for the time being. This, however, passes off as
• 5:04:38
  Speaker 2: you progress, provided that you progress along the right road
• 5:04:41
  Speaker 2: at the beginning of your mediumship, and this you should
• 5:04:44
  Speaker 2: endeavor in every way to do. If you can consult
• 5:04:47
  Speaker 2: an experienced medium, or still better, if you can sit
• 5:04:50
  Speaker 2: with him during your development or induce him to be
• 5:04:53
  Speaker 2: present during your psychic unfoldment, things will be far easier
• 5:04:57
  Speaker 2: for you and far safer than they would be otherwise.
• 5:05:01
  Speaker 2: The oncoming of trance is often signified by certain physical
• 5:05:04
  Speaker 2: and psychical manifestations, which must not alarm you when they appear,
• 5:05:08
  Speaker 2: as they sometimes but not always do. Hiccoughs, sudden and
• 5:05:12
  Speaker 2: spasmodic pains and cramps, a feeling of all goneness, nausea,
• 5:05:17
  Speaker 2: flashes of white or the sensation of faintness, and that
• 5:05:21
  Speaker 2: everything is turning black before you. These are a few
• 5:05:24
  Speaker 2: of the symptoms which you are liable to experience during
• 5:05:26
  Speaker 2: your early development, and though they may not be pleasant,
• 5:05:30
  Speaker 2: you had better be warned of them in advance and
• 5:05:32
  Speaker 2: not be alarmed when they appear. Sometimes, however, none of
• 5:05:36
  Speaker 2: these signs are manifest, only a delightful sensation of falling
• 5:05:40
  Speaker 2: asleep upon a bed of roses. In these cases, the
• 5:05:43
  Speaker 2: psychic has developed himself properly and systematically, and his guides
• 5:05:48
  Speaker 2: or controls are also wise and helpful. These are the
• 5:05:51
  Speaker 2: fortunate but unhappily rare cases. But it is hoped that
• 5:05:55
  Speaker 2: by following the advice given in this book, many more
• 5:05:58
  Speaker 2: will be enabled to develop in this wholesome manner. The
• 5:06:02
  Speaker 2: three rules to follow. There are three chief and most
• 5:06:06
  Speaker 2: essential factors to be considered. One, your mental and physical
• 5:06:11
  Speaker 2: health must be quite up to the standard. If you
• 5:06:14
  Speaker 2: are depleted, exhausted, or run down physically, if you are
• 5:06:18
  Speaker 2: suffering from any disease, or if, on the other hand,
• 5:06:21
  Speaker 2: you are full of fear, apprehension, and doubts, or if
• 5:06:24
  Speaker 2: anger and similar thoughts rage in your soul, you may
• 5:06:28
  Speaker 2: anticipate a difficult time in your development and unpleasant experiences
• 5:06:32
  Speaker 2: throughout that slow